As - Series MANUAL AS SERIE DELTA

AS Series Module Manual
Industrial Automation Headquarters

Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan City,
Taoyuan County 33068, Taiwan
TEL: 886-3-362-6301 / FAX: 886-3-371-6301
Asia
Delta Electronics (Jiangsu) Ltd.
Wujiang Plant 3
1688 Jiangxing East Road,
Wujiang Economic Development Zone
Wujiang City, Jiang Su Province, P.R.C. 215200
TEL: 86-512-6340-3008 / FAX: 86-769-6340-7290
Delta Greentech (China) Co., Ltd.

238 Min-Xia Road, Pudong District,
ShangHai, P.R.C. 201209
TEL: 86-21-58635678 / FAX: 86-21-58630003
Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc.

Tokyo Office
2-1-14 Minato-ku Shibadaimon,
Tokyo 105-0012, Japan
TEL: 81-3-5733-1111 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1211
Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.

1511, Byucksan Digital Valley 6-cha, Gasan-dong,
Geumcheon-gu, Seoul, Korea, 153-704

TEL: 82-2-515-5303 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302
Delta Electronics Int’l (S) Pte Ltd.

4 Kaki Bukit Ave 1, #05-05, Singapore 417939
TEL: 65-6747-5155 / FAX: 65-6744-9228
Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd.

Plot No 43 Sector 35, HSIIDC
Gurgaon, PIN 122001, Haryana, India
TEL : 91-124-4874900 / FAX : 91-124-4874945
Americas
Delta Products Corporation (USA)
Raleigh Office
P.O. Box 12173,5101 Davis Drive,
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A.
TEL: 1-919-767-3800 / FAX: 1-919-767-8080
Delta Greentech (Brasil) S.A.

Sao Paulo Office
Rua Itapeva, 26 - 3° andar Edificio Itapeva One-Bela Vista
01332-000-São Paulo-SP-Brazil
TEL: 55 11 3568-3855 / FAX: 55 11 3568-3865
Europe
Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
Eindhoven Office
De Witbogt 20, 5652 AG Eindhoven, The Netherlands
TEL : +31 (0)40-8003800 / FAX : +31 (0)40-8003898
AS-0249820-08
*We reserve the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice.
2020/04/28 www.deltaww.com
Revision History
Ve r s i o n Revision Date
1st The first version was published. 2 0 1 6 / 11 / 3 0
1. Chapter 1: Added information concerning new models
AS08AD-B and AS08AD-C.
AS08AD-B andAS08AD-C.
3. Chapter 3: Updated information concerning CR#23-24
and software new screenshots.
4. Chapter 4: Updated information concerning CR#35-
2nd 54/CR#210-225 and software new screenshots. 2017/07/07
4/CR#210-217 and software new screenshots.
217 and software new screenshots.
7. Chapter 7: Updated information concerning theoretical
calibration and software new screenshots
8. Chapter 8: Updated information concerning new FW2.0.
A S 0 6 RT D - A a n d A S 0 8 T C - A a n d i n s t a l l a t i o n i n f o r m a t i o n
updated in section 1.3.1.
3rd 2. Chapter 5: Added information concerning new model 2018/02/09
A S 0 6 RT D - A .
AS08TC-A.
1. Chapter 1: Added information concerning ambient air
temperature-barometric pressure-altitude.
2. Chapter 2: Added information concerning filter average,
cable length and resistance. Updated section 2.2.4
CR#23-38 and section 2.2.5 CR#43-74.
3. Chapter 3: Added information concerning cable length
and resistance. Updated section 3.2.1 analog to digital
conversion range, output impedance and section 3.2.4
CR17-20 and CR#21-36.
4. Chapter 4: Added information concerning filter average,
cable length and resistance. Updated section 4.2.1
analog to digital conversion range, output impedance
4th and 4.2.4 CR#31-21. 2 0 1 8 / 11 / 2 6
5. Chapter 5: Updated section 5.2.1 JPt100 range, section
5.2.4-5.2.5 added notes on CR, updated section 5.2.6
PID information, revised section 5.2.7 control mode.
6. Chapter 6: Section 6.2.1 revised type B range, added a
note, section 6.2.4-6.2.5 added notes on CR, revised
CR# for the records, updated section 6.2.6 PID
information and revised section 6.2.7 control mode.
7. Chapter 7: Section 7.2.4 added notes on CR.
8. Chapter 8: New functions in new FW2.02.
9. Chapter 9: Updated section 9.2.5 output impedance
information and added sections 9.2.7.1-9.2.7.9 for new
functions added and operational examples.
1. Chapter 7: Revised contents of CR#0 and #59 in
5th section 7.2.4. 2019/1/29
2. Chapter 8: Deleted a note in section 8.6.4.
6th 1. Chapter 5: Updated wiring information in section 5.2.8. 2019/5/10
Ve r s i o n Revision Date
1. Chapter 1: Added model information including AS02PU-
A, AS04PU-A, AS02HC-A, AS04SIL-A and AS-FPFN02
2. Chapter 2: Updated section 2.2.1 specification, 2.2.4
and 2.2.5 CR table, and 2.4 adding a new error code.
3. Chapter 3: Updated section 3.2.4 CR table and 3.4
adding a new error code.
4. Chapter 4: Updated section 4.2 specification, 4.2.4 CR
table and 4.4 adding a new error code.
5. Chapter 5: Updated section 5.2 specification, 5.2.4 and
5.2.5 CR table, and 5.4 adding a new error code.
6. Chapter 6: Updated section 6.2.4 and 6.2.5 CR table.
7th 2 0 1 9 / 11 / 2 9
Added DMPID instruction supporting firmware versions
and section 6.4 adding a new error code.
7. Chapter 7: Updated section 7.2.4 and 7.2.5 CR table
and 7.5 adding a new error code.
8. Chapter 8: Added a new error code in section 8.7.2.2.
9. Chapter 9: Updated AS-F2AD specifications in sections
9 . 2 . 4 a n d 9 . 2 . 5 . D e l e t e d S M 111 0 a n d S R 1 5 4 0 i n
section 9.2.7. Added AS-FPFN02 information in
sections 9.2.8 and 9.3.5.
1 0 . C h a p t e r 11 : N e w c h a p t e r i n t r o d u c i n g p o s i t i o n i n g
modules AS02PU-A and AS04PU-A.
1. Chapter 1: Updated section 1.1 to include software
information for new AX series PLC, updated AS02HC-A
specifications and added AS-FOPC02 information.
Added an installation note in section 1.3.4.
2. Chapter 2: New chapter introducing digital input/output
modules.
3. Chapter 3 – 7: Added DIADesigner+ and Hardware
Configuration information.
4. Chapter 8: Updated CR#120 default value and input
values 100 to 105 of CR200 command set in section
8.2.4.
5. Chapter 9: Added AS-FPEN02 and AS04SIL-A
information, added LED indicator information of
8th EtherNet/IP in section 9.4.2, and added error LED 4/28/2020
indicator information of AS00SCM-A in section 9.7.2.2.
6. Chapter 10: Updated software images in section 10.2.7
and 10.2.7.2, updated section 10.2.7.7, added AS-
FPFN02 installed on AS00SCM-A information in section
10.2.8, added AS-FOPC02 product information in
sections 10.2.9 and 10.3.6, updated LED indicator
information of AS-FEN02 in section 10.3.4.
7. Chapter 12: Updated response time and input isolation
specifications in section 12.2.1.
8. Chapter 13: New chapter introducing IO link
communication module, AS04SIL-A.
9. Chapter 14: New chapter introducing high speed
counter modules AS02PU and AS04PU.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Specifications .................................................................................... 1-5

1.2.1 General Specifications .................................................................... 1-5
1.2.2 EMS Standards ............................................................................. 1-6
1.3 Installation ........................................................................................ 1-8

1.3.1 Installing a Module ........................................................................ 1-8
1.3.2 Installing a Removable Terminal Block .............................................. 1-8
1.3.3 Changing a Module ...................................................................... 1-10
1.3.4 Installing and Removing an Extension Card ..................................... 1-11
1.3.5 Installing a Wiring Module ............................................................ 1-12
Chapter 2 Digital Input / Output Modules
2.1 Digital Input/Output Module Specifications....................................... 2-2

2.1.2 Digital Input/Output Module Profiles ................................................ 2-4
2.1.3 Digital Input/Output Module Terminals ........................................... 2-12
Chapter 3 Analog Input Module AS04/08AD

3.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.1 Characteristics .......................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Specifications and Functions .......................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 Specifications ........................................................................... 3-3
3.2.2 Profile ...................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals .......................................................... 3-6
3.2.4 AS04AD Control Register ............................................................ 3-6
3.2.5 AS08AD Control Registers ........................................................ 3-11
3.2.6 Functions ............................................................................... 3-17
3.2.7 Wiring ................................................................................... 3-20
3.2.8 LED Indicators ........................................................................ 3-24
3.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft .................................................................. 3-24
3.3.1 Initial Setting.......................................................................... 3-24
i
3.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module .............................................. 3-27
3.3.3 Online Mode ........................................................................... 3-28
3.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ........................................ 3-29
3.3.5 Parameters ............................................................................ 3-30
3.4 DIADesigner+ (Hardware Configuration) ..................................... 3-34
3.4.1 Initial Setting ......................................................................... 3-34
3.4.3 Online Mode ........................................................................... 3-38
3.4.4 Parameters ............................................................................ 3-39
3.5 Troubleshooting ........................................................................... 3-41
3.5.1 Error Codes ............................................................................ 3-41
3.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ....................................................... 3-42
Chapter 4 Analog Output Module AS04DA

4.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 4-2
4.2.1 Specifications ........................................................................... 4-3
4.2.2 Profile ..................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals .......................................................... 4-6
4.2.4 Control Registers ...................................................................... 4-6
4.2.5 Functions ................................................................................. 4-8
4.2.6 Wiring ................................................................................... 4-12
4.2.7 LED Indicators ........................................................................ 4-14
4.3.1 Initial Setting ......................................................................... 4-14
4.3.3 Online Mode ........................................................................... 4-18
4.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ........................................ 4-19
4.3.5 Parameters ............................................................................ 4-20
4.4.1 Initial Setting ......................................................................... 4-23
4.4.3 Online Mode ........................................................................... 4-27
4.4.4 Parameters ............................................................................ 4-28
4.5.1 Error Codes ............................................................................ 4-30
ii
Chapter 5 Analog Input / Output Module AS06XA
5.1 Overview ....................................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Specifications and Functions ......................................................... 5-3
5.2.1 Specifications ........................................................................... 5-3
5.2.2 Profile ...................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals........................................................... 5-7
5.2.4 Control Registers ....................................................................... 5-8
5.2.5 Functions ............................................................................... 5-13
5.2.6 Wiring ................................................................................... 5-20
5.2.7 LED Indicators ........................................................................ 5-22
5.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ................................................................. 5-23
5.3.1 Initial Setting.......................................................................... 5-23
5.3.3 Online Mode ........................................................................... 5-27
5.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ......................................... 5-28
5.3.5 Parameters ............................................................................. 5-29
5.4 DIADesigner+ (Hardware Configuration) .................................... 5-34
5.4.1 Initial Setting.......................................................................... 5-34
5.4.3 Online Mode ........................................................................... 5-38
5.4.4 Parameters ............................................................................. 5-39
5.5 Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 5-41
5.5.1 Error Codes ............................................................................ 5-41
5.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ........................................................ 5-41
Chapter 6 Temperature Measurement Module AS04/06RTD

6.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 6-2
6.1.1 Characteristics........................................................................... 6-2
6.2 Specifications and Functions.............................................................. 6-3
6.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.2 Profile ........................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ................................................................ 6-5
6.2.4 AS04RTD Control Registers .............................................................. 6-6
6.2.5 AS06RTD Control Registers ............................................................ 6-10
6.2.6 Functions..................................................................................... 6-15
6.2.7 Control Mode ............................................................................... 6-18
iii
6.2.8 Wiring ........................................................................................ 6-18
6.2.9 LED Indicators ............................................................................. 6-20
6.3. HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 6-21
6.3.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................... 6-21
6.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module ................................................... 6-24
6.3.3 Online Mode ................................................................................ 6-25
6.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File .............................................. 6-26
6.3.5 Parameters .................................................................................. 6-27
6.4 DIADesigner+ (Hardware Configuration) ......................................... 6-30
6.4.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................... 6-30
6.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module ................................................... 6-32
6.4.3 Online Mode ................................................................................ 6-33
6.4.4 Parameters .................................................................................. 6-34
6.5 Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 6-36
6.5.1 Error Codes ................................................................................. 6-36
6.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure............................................................. 6-37
6.5.3 State of the Connection ................................................................. 6-38
Chapter 7 Temperature Measurement Module AS04/08TC
7.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 7-2

7.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................. 7-3
7.2 Specifications and Functions ............................................................. 7-4

7.2.1 Specifications ............................................................................... 7-4
7.2.2 Profile ......................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals .............................................................. 7-6
7.2.4 AS04TC Control Registers .............................................................. 7-6
7.2.5 AS08TC Control Registers ............................................................ 7-10
7.2.6 Functions................................................................................... 7-16
7.2.7 Control Mode ............................................................................. 7-19
7.2.8 Wiring ....................................................................................... 7-38
7.2.9 LED Indicators............................................................................ 7-39
7.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 7-39

7.3.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 7-39
7.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module .................................................. 7-42
7.3.3 Online Mode ............................................................................... 7-43
7.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................ 7-44
7.3.5 Parameters ................................................................................ 7-45
iv
7.4 DIADesigner+ (Hardware Configuration) ........................................ 7-49
7.4.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 7-49
7.4.3 Online Mode ............................................................................... 7-53
7.4.4 Parameters ................................................................................ 7-54
7.5 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 7-56

7.5.1 Error Codes ................................................................................ 7-56
7.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ........................................................... 7-57
Chapter 8 Load Cell Module AS02LC
8.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Specifications .................................................................................... 8-2

8.2.1 Specifications ............................................................................... 8-2
8.2.2 Profile ......................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.4 Control Registers .......................................................................... 8-5
8.2.5 Functions ................................................................................... 8-12
8.2.6 Wiring ....................................................................................... 8-17
8.3 Making Adjustments ........................................................................ 8-19

8.3.1 Steps to adjust points .................................................................. 8-19
8.3.2 Adjustment settings / LC Wizard ................................................... 8-20
8.3.3 Adjustment Settings / Calibrational Commands ............................... 8-24
8.3.4 LED Indicators ............................................................................ 8-27
8.4 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft...................................................................... 8-27

8.4.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 8-27
8.4.3 Online Mode ............................................................................... 8-31
8.4.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File............................................. 8-32
8.4.5 Parameters ................................................................................ 8-33

8.5.1 Error Codes ................................................................................ 8-35
v
Chapter 9 Serial Communication Module AS00SCM
9.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 9-2
9.2 Specification, Function and Wiring ...................................................... 9-3

9.2.1 The functional specifications ................................................................ 9-3
9.2.2 Dimensions and Profile ....................................................................... 9-4
9.2.3 Knob Functions.................................................................................. 9-5
9.2.4 Wiring .............................................................................................. 9-7
9.3 COM mode ........................................................................................... 9-9

9.3.1 Modbus ............................................................................................ 9-9
9.3.2 UD Link .......................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.3 CANopen Mode ................................................................................ 9-14
9.4 RTU Mode .......................................................................................... 9-16

9.4.1 CANopen Mode (AS-FCOPM) .............................................................. 9-16
9.4.2 EtherNet/IP Mode ............................................................................ 9-22
9.4.3 Remote Module Setting..................................................................... 9-35
9.5 Normal Exchange Area ...................................................................... 9-37
9.6 Application ........................................................................................ 9-39

9.6.1 Modbus .......................................................................................... 9-39
9.6.2 UD Link .......................................................................................... 9-49
9.6.3 Remote IO Application (AS-FCOPM) .................................................... 9-65
9.6.4 Remote IO Application (AS-FEN02)..................................................... 9-72
9.6.5 Remote IO Application (Multiple AS-FEN02) ......................................... 9-74
9.7 Error Codes ....................................................................................... 9-75

9.7.1 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM-A as a Communication Module ...... 9-76
9.7.2 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM-A as a Remote Module ................. 9-77
Chapter 10 Function Cards
10.1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 10-3
10.2 Specification and Function ................................................................ 10-3

10.2.1 AS-F232 .................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.2 AS-F422 .................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.3 AS-F485 .................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.4 AS-F2AD ................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.5 AS-F2DA ................................................................................... 10-5
vi
10.2.6 AS-FCOPM ................................................................................. 10-5
10.2.7 AS-FEN02 .................................................................................. 10-6
10.2.8 AS-FPFN02 ............................................................................... 10-24
10.2.9 AS-FOPC02 .............................................................................. 10-45
10.3 Profiles and Dimensions .................................................................. 10-49

10.3.1 AS-F232 .................................................................................. 10-49
10.3.2 AS-F422/AS-F485/AS-F2AD/AS-F2DA .......................................... 10-49
10.3.3 AS-FCOPM ............................................................................... 10-49
10.3.4 AS-FEN02 ................................................................................ 10-50
10.3.5 AS-FPFN02 ............................................................................... 10-51
10.3.6 AS-FOPC02 .............................................................................. 10-52
10.4 Wiring ............................................................................................. 10-53

10.4.1 AS-F2AD .................................................................................. 10-53
10.4.2 AS-F2DA .................................................................................. 10-54

10.5.1 Initial Setting ........................................................................... 10-55
Chapter 11 DeviceNet Master Scanner Module AS01DNET-A
11.1 Introduction o AS01DNET-A .............................................................. 11-3

11.1.1 Feature ...................................................................................... 11-3
11.1.2 Specifications ............................................................................. 11-3
11.2 Components of AS01DNET-A ............................................................. 11-4

11.2.1 Profile and Dimensions................................................................. 11-4
11.2.2 Components ............................................................................... 11-5
11.2.3 Mode Toggle（RTU- Master/Slave） ................................................ 11-5
11.2.4 DeviceNet Connector ................................................................... 11-5
11.2.5 Address Switch ........................................................................... 11-6
11.2.6 Function Switch .......................................................................... 11-6
11.2.7 Digital Displayer.......................................................................... 11-6
11.3 DeviceNet Network Communication .................................................. 11-7

11.3.1 Relationship between Transmission Distance and Baud Rate .............. 11-7
11.3.2 DeivceNet Network Topology Structure ........................................... 11-7
11.3.3 Choice and Purpose of a DeviceNet Terminal Resistor ..................... 11-11
11.3.4 DeviceNet Network Supply Power ................................................ 11-12
11.4 Master /Slave Mode ........................................................................ 11-13

11.4.1 Introduction of Master/Slave Mode .............................................. 11-13
11.4.2 Installation ............................................................................... 11-14
vii
11.4.3 IO Mapping for AS01DNET in AS PLC ............................................ 11-15
11.4.4 Bit-strobe Command .................................................................. 11-17
11.4.5 Network Node Status Display....................................................... 11-18
11.4.6 Setting the Time for Data Exchange between Master and Slaves ....... 11-18
11.4.7 Application Example ................................................................... 11-19
11.4.8 Sending Explicit Message through Ladder Diagram ......................... 11-29
11.4.9 LED Indicators and Troubleshooting .............................................. 11-36
11.4.10 Master-Slave Mode Switch and 8 Baud Rates Setting via Software .... 11-39
11.5 RTU Mode ........................................................................................ 11-51

11.5.1 Introduction of AS01DNET (in RTU Mode) ...................................... 11-51
11.5.2 AS-Series Extension Modules Connectable to AS01DNET (RTU) ......... 11-52
11.5.3 Installation ............................................................................... 11-53
11.5.4 Configuring AS01DNET (in RTU mode) .......................................... 11-55
11.5.6 Error Diagnosis and Trouble Shooting ........................................... 11-91
11.6 How to Call DeviceNet Builder through ISPSoft (AS-Series PLC) .... 11-97
Chapter 12 Positioning Modules AS02/04PU
12.1 Overview ......................................................................................... 12-2

12.1.1. Characteristics ........................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Specifications and Functions ........................................................... 12-3

12.2.1. Specifications ............................................................................. 12-3
12.2.2. Profile ....................................................................................... 12-5
12.2.3. Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................ 12-6
12.2.4. Special Designed Instrucitons ....................................................... 12-8
12.2.5. Wiring ....................................................................................... 12-9
12.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ................................................................... 12-12

12.3.1. Initial Setting ............................................................................ 12-12
12.3.2. Checking the Version of a Module ................................................. 12-15
12.3.3. Online Mode .............................................................................. 12-16
12.3.4. Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ........................................... 12-17
12.3.5. Parameters ............................................................................... 12-18
12.3.6. Normal Exchange Area ............................................................... 12-20
12.4 Troubleshooting ............................................................................ 12-21

12.4.1. Error Codes .............................................................................. 12-21
12.4.2. Troubleshooting Procedure .......................................................... 12-21
12.4.3. State Codes (Axis 1 - 4) ............................................................. 12-21
viii
Chapter 13 I/O Link Communication Modules AS04SIL
13.1 Overview ...................................................................................... 13-3

13.1.1 Firmware and Software Versions ................................................ 13-3
13.2 Specification and Wiring............................................................... 13-4

13.2.1 Specifications .......................................................................... 13-4
13.2.2 Profile .................................................................................... 13-6
13.2.3 Wiring .................................................................................... 13-7
13.3 Functions ..................................................................................... 13-9

13.3.1 Basic Functions........................................................................ 13-9
13.3.2 Application Functions .............................................................. 13-14
13.4 Application Examples ................................................................. 13-17

13.4.1 Using AS Series CPU as Upper Device ....................................... 13-17
13.4.2 Using AH Series CPU or Non-Delta Master PLC as Upper Device .... 13-18
13.4.3 Application of AS Special Remote Mode ..................................... 13-19
13.4.4 Application of Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode................. 13-32
13.4.5 Application of CANopen DS301 Mode ........................................ 13-33
13.5 IO-Link Event Code Table ........................................................... 13-40
13.6 Module Status Codes .................................................................. 13-42
Chapter 14 High Speed Counter Moudle AS02/04HC
14.1 Overview ...................................................................................... 14-2

14.1.1 Characteristics......................................................................... 14-2
14.2 Specifications and Functions ........................................................ 14-3

Specifications .......................................................................... 14-3
14.2.2 Profile .................................................................................... 14-6
14.2.3 Terminals ................................................................................ 14-7
14.2.4 Wiring .................................................................................... 14-8
14.2.5 Pulse Input Counting .............................................................. 14-11
14.2.6 SSI Input Counting ................................................................ 14-12
14.2.7 Z-Phase Function Setting ........................................................ 14-19
14.2.8 LED Indicators ....................................................................... 14-20
14.3 Operation ................................................................................... 14-21

14.3.1 List of Dedicated API Instructions ............................................. 14-21
14.3.2 The impact of AS CPU Status on AS02HC-A ............................... 14-22
ix
14.4 Hardware Configuration via HWCONFIG in ISPSoft .................... 14-23
14.4.1 Initial Setting ......................................................................... 14-23
14.4.2 Checking the Module Version .................................................... 14-26
14.4.3 Online Mode .......................................................................... 14-27
14.4.4 Import and Export a Parameter File ........................................... 14-28
14.4.5 Parameters ............................................................................ 14-29
14.4.6 Normal Exchange Area ............................................................ 14-31
14.5 Troubleshooting ......................................................................... 14-32

14.5.1 Error Codes ........................................................................... 14-32
x
1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table of Contents
1.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Specifications .................................................................................... 1-5

1.2.1 General Specifications.................................................................... 1-5
1.2.2 EMS Standards ............................................................................. 1-6
1.2.2.1 EMI......................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.2.2 EMS ........................................................................................ 1-6
1.2.2.3 Conducted Immunity Test .......................................................... 1-7
1.3 Installation ........................................................................................ 1-8

1.3.1 Installing a Module ........................................................................ 1-8
1.3.2 Installing a Removable Terminal Block .............................................. 1-8
1.3.3 Changing a Module ...................................................................... 1-10
1.3.4 Installing and Removing an Extension Card ..................................... 1-11
1.3.5 Installing a Wiring Module ............................................................ 1-12
1-1
AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l
1.1 Overview
_1 This manual introduces the use of special modules. The special modules are the analog input/output modules,
temperature measurement modules, load cell modules, and network modules. For software operation, you
need to use ISPSoft, if you are using AS Series PLC CPU. Refer to ISPSoft User Manual for more information.
The new software DIADesigner+ only supports AX Series PLC CPU and AS Series modules now, refer to
DIADesigner+ User Manual for more information on software operation.
The following table shows the module descriptions.
Classification Model Name Description
4-channel analog input module
Hardware resolution: 16 bits

AS04AD-A
0–10 V, 0/1–5 V, -5 to +5 V, -10 to +10 V, 0/4–20 mA, -20 to +20 mA
Conversion time: 2 ms/channel

AS08AD-B
0–10 V, 0/1–5 V, -5 to +5 V, -10 to +10 V

AS08AD-C
0/4–20 mA, -20 to +20 mA
Analog
input/output
module
AS04DA-A
-10 to +10 V, 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA
0–10 V, 0/1–5 V, -5 to +5 V, -10 to +10 V, 0/4–20 mA, -20 to +20 mA

AS06XA-A
-10 to +10 V, 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA
1-2
Ch ap te r 1 In tro duc tio n
4-channel, 2-wire/3-wire RTD 1_

Sensor type: Pt100 / Ni100 / Pt1000 / Ni1000 / JPt100 / LG-Ni1000 /
AS04RTD-A Cu50 / Cu100 / 0–300Ω / 0–3000Ω input impedance
Resolution: 0.1°C/0.1°F (16 bits)
6-channel, 2-wire/3-wire RTD
Sensor type: Pt100 / Ni100 / Pt1000 / Ni1000 / JPt100 / LG-Ni1000 /
AS06RTD-A Cu50 / Cu100 / 0–300Ω / 0–3000Ω input impedance

Temperature
measurement
module
4-channel thermocouple
Sensor type: J, K, R, S, T, E, N, B, and -100 to +100 mV

AS04TC-A
8-channel thermocouple
Sensor type: J, K, R, S, T, E, N, B, and -100 to +100 mV

AS08TC-A
2-channel, 4-wire/6-wire load cell sensor
Eigenvalue applicable to a load cell: 1, 2, 4, 6, 20, 40, 80 mV/V

Load cell
AS02LC-A Highest accuracy: 0.04% of full-scale
module
ADC Resolution : 24 bits
Conversion time: 2.5–400 ms (nine options to choose from)
2-axis positioning control
1 high-speed differential input, 5-24 VDC, maximum at 200 kHz

AS02PU-A
5 external inputs, 24 VDC, 5 mA,
2-axis high-speed differential outputs, 5 VDC, maximum at 200 kHz

Positioning /
4-axis positioning control
counter
6 inputs, 24 VDC, 5mA,
module AS04PU-A
4-axis high-speed open collector output, 5-30 VDC, 0.1A,
maximum at 200 kHz
2-channel high-speed counters

AS02HC-A
Input methods for the 2-channel are pulse-input (max. at 200 kHz) and
1-3
_1 SSI communication interface input (max. at 1.25 MHz)
Incrementing / decrementing encoder input
4-point high-speed open collector output, 5-30 VDC, 0.1A,
work with high speed differential output
Serial communication module, 2x communication ports, applicable to

AS00SCM-A
Network communication cards, supporting MODBUS protocols
module AS01DNET-A DeviceNet communication port, functioning as master or slave
AS04SIL-A IO-Link module, built-in with 4 IO-Link communication ports
AS00SCM-A
+ Network module with AS-FCOPM function cards
AS-FCOPM
AS00SCM-A
Remote I/O
+ Network module with AS-FEN02 function cards
module
AS-FEN02
DeviceNet remote IO slave, its right side connectswith AS Series

AS01DNET-A
extension modules, including digital modules, analog modules,
(RTU)
temperature modules, etc.
AS-F232 Serial communication port, RS232, functioning as master or slave
CANopen communication port, supporting DS301, AS series remote

AS-FCOPM
modules, and Delta servo systems
2-channel analog input, 0–10 V (12 bits), 4–20 mA (11 bits),

AS-F2AD
Function cards 2-channel analog input, 0–10 V, 4–20 mA (12 bits),

AS-F2DA
2x Ethernet ports, supporting data exchange, supporting MODBUS

AS-FEN02
TCP, EtherNet/IP Adapter, AS Series remote control, and DLR function
2x Ethernet ports, supporting data exchange, supporting PROFINET

AS-FPFN02
Device (adapter)
2x Ethernet ports, supporting data exchange, supporting OPC-UA
AS-FOPC02 Server and EtherNet/IP Adapter, only available for AS300 Series PLC
CPU
1-4
1.2 Specifications
1.2.1 General Specifications 1_
Item Specifications
Operating temperature -20 to +60°C

Storage temperature -40 to +80°C
5–95%
Operating humidity
No condensation
5–95%
Storage humidity
No condensation
Work environment No corrosive gas
Installation location In a control box
Pollution degree 2
Ingress protection
IP20
(IP ratings)
EMC (electromagnetic
Refer to Chapter 7 for more information.
compatibility)
Tested with:
5 Hz ≦ f ≦ 8.4 Hz, constant amplitude 3.5 mm
Vibration resistance 8.4 Hz ≦ f ≦ 150 Hz, constant acceleration 1 g

Duration of oscillation: 10 sweep cycles per axis on each direction of the three
mutually perpendicular axes
International Standard IEC 61131-2 & IEC 60068-2-6 (TEST Fc)
Tested with:
Half-sine wave
Strength of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration
Shock resistance
Shock direction: The shocks on each direction per axis, of the three mutually
perpendicular axes (for a total of 18 shocks)
International Standard IEC 61131-2 & IEC 60068-2-27 (TEST Ea)
Safety Conforms to IEC 61131-2, UL508
Ambient air Operating: 1080 ~ 795hPa (-1000 ~ 2000 m)
temperature-barometric
pressure-altitude Storage:1080 ~ 660hPa (-1000 ~ 3500 m)
1-5
1.2.2 EMS Standards

_1 1.2.2.1 EMI
Port Frequency Range Level (Normative) Reference Standard
Enclosure port 30-230 MHz 40 dB (μV/m) quasi-peak
(radiated)
(measured at a
230-1000 MHz 47 dB (μV/m) quasi-peak
distance of 10
meters) IEC 61000-6-4

79 dB (μV) quasi-peak
0.15-0.5 MHz
AC power port 66 dB (μV) average
(conducted) 73 dB (μV) quasi-peak

0.5-30 MHz
60 dB (μV) average
1.2.2.2 EMS
Environmental
Reference Standard Test Test Level
Phenomenon
Electrostatic Contact ±4 kV
IEC 61000-4-2
Discharge Air ±8 kV
Radio Frequency 2.0-2.7 GHz 1 V/m

80% AM,
Electromagnetic Field 1.4-2.0 GHz 3 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3 1 kHz
Amplitude
sinusoidal 80-1000 MHz 10 V/m
Modulated
Power Frequency 60 Hz 30 A/m

IEC 61000-4-8
Magnetic Field 50 Hz 30 A/m
1-6
1.2.2.3 Conducted Immunity Test

1_
Radio
Fast Transient High Energy
Environmental Phenomenon Frequency
Burst Surge
Interference
Reference Standard IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-6
Interface/Port Specific Interface/Port Test Level Test Level Test Level
Shielded cable 1 kV 1 kV CM 10 V
Data communication
Unshielded cable 1 kV 1 kV CM 10 V
2 kV CM
AC I/O (unshielded) 2 kV 10 V
1 kV DM
Digital and analog I/O Analog or DC I/O

1 kV 1 kV CM 10 V
(unshielded)
All shielded lines (earth) 1 kV 1 kV CM 10 V
2 kV CM
AC power 2 kV 10 V
1 kV DM
Equipment power
0.5 kV CM
DC power 2 kV 10 V
0.5 kV DM
AC I/O and AC auxiliary 2 kV CM

2 kV 10 V
I/O power and power 1 kV DM
auxiliary power output DC I/O and DC auxiliary 0.5 kV CM

2 kV 10 V
power 0.5 kV DM
1-7
1.3 Installation
_1 1.3.1 Installing a Module
1. Press the clip rings if they are out as the image 1 shown. Push the module to the desire position
until you hear a click to finish installation.
2. Link the I/O modules on the right side of the PLC and make sure they are hooked together. Push the
modules into the DIN rail until you hear a click.
3. After you installed the module, fasten the screws on the modules to secure the module on the DIN rail.
1
2
If there is a vibration source near the installation site, install anti-vibration baffles on the sides of the AS Series
modules for better stabilization, such as the gray baffles show below.
1-8
 Install the baffles:

1. Hook the baffle onto the DIN rail and press it down as the directional arrow shows below.
1_
2. Use screws to secure the baffle.
3. The completed baffle installation is shown below.
1-9
1.3.2 Installing a Removable Terminal Block

_1 Install a removable terminal block on the module as illustrated below.
 Installation
1. Level the terminal block at the printed circuit board, and press it into the module.
 Removal
1. Pull down the clip in the direction indicated by the arrow and then pull the terminal block up
as illustrated below.
1 1
1.3.3 Changing a Module
1. Take the removable terminal block out of the module, and then pull the clip out from the DIN rail as
shown below.
1-10
2. Remove the module.
3. Slide the new module in as shown below.

1_
1.3.4 Installing and Removing an Extension Card
 Installation
Push the extension card into the extension card slot until you hear a click.
Note: before the installation begin, you need to check if the pin arrangement and appearance are normal. If
there is any bent or missing pin, you need to change to a new card. You should also check the PLC card slot
to make sure everything is ok.
 Removal
Press the tab labeled PUSH to release the extension card, and then remove the extension card.
1 - 11
1.3.5 Installing a Wiring Module

_1 Connect a communication cable to the port on a CPU module, and make sure that the connector of the cable
is properly seated in the port.
 Installation
1. Firmly seat one side of the wiring module first.
2. Press the driver board in the direction indicated by arrow 1, and make sure that the groove is
attached to the DIN rail.
 Removal
1. Push the wiring module in the direction indicated by arrow 1.
2. Pull the wiring module in the direction indicated by arrow 2.
1-12
2
Chapter 2 Digital Input/Output Modules
Table of Contents
2.1 Digital Input/Output Module Specifications....................................... 2-2
2.1.2 Digital Input/Output Module Profiles ................................................. 2-4
2.1.3 Digital Input/Output Module Terminals ........................................... 2-12
2.1 Digital Input/Output Module Specifications

2.1.1 General Specifications
 Electrical specifications for the inputs on digital input/output modules
(The signals passing through the inputs are 24 VDC signals.)
08AM10N 16AM10N 32AM10N 64AM10N 16AP11R 16AP11T 16AP11P
Module name
-A -A -A -A A -A -A
_2 Number of inputs 8 16 32 64 8 8 8
Removable terminal
Connector type MIL connector Removable terminal block
block
Input type Digital input
Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
24 VDC
Input voltage/ current 24 VDC，5 mA 24 VDC，5 mA
3.2 mA
Input impedance 4.7 k Ω 7.5k Ω 4.7 k Ω
OFF→ON >15 VDC
Action level
ON→OFF <5 VDC
Response OFF→ON < 20 us
time ON→OFF < 200 us
Software filter time Setting range: 0 ~ 25 ms; default: 10 ms
Varies according to the filter time; for example when the filter is 1 ms, the
Maximum input
maximum input frequency is 500 Hz, when 2 ms, 250 Hz.
frequency
Note: CPU scan time also affects the maximum input frequency.
Voltage input
Sinking: The inputs are NPN transistors whose collectors are open
Input signal collectors.
Sourcing: The inputs are PNP transistors whose collectors are open
collectors.
Input Isolation 500 VDC
Input display When the optocoupler is driven, the input LED indicator is ON.
Weight 100 g 117 g 100 g 140 g 138 g 120 g 120 g
 Electrical specifications for the outputs on a digital input/output module

Model 08AN01 16AN01 16AP11 08AN01 16AN01 16AP11 08AN01 16AN01 16AP11
Item R-A R-A R-A T-A T-A T-A P-A P-A P-A
Number of outputs 8 16 8 8 16 8 8 16 8
Connector type Removable terminal block
Output type Digital output
Output form Relay-R Transistor-T (sinking) Transistor-P (sourcing)
Voltage/ current 240 VAC/24 VDC 5–30 VDC *2 5–30 VDC *2
<250uA (@V1.00A0)
Leakage current 0uA <10uA
<10uA (@V1.00A1)
Resistance 2A/output, 8A/COM 0.5A/output, 4A/COM 0.5A/output, 4A/COM
Maximum Inductance Life cycle curve*2 12 W (24 VDC) 12 W (24 VDC)
load
20 W (24 VDC)
Bulb 2 W (24 VDC) 2 W (24 VDC)
100 W (230 VAC)
Maximum Resistance 1 Hz 100 Hz 100 Hz
2-2
Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es
Model 08AN01 16AN01 16AP11 08AN01 16AN01 16AP11 08AN01 16AN01 16AP11
Item R-A R-A R-A T-A T-A T-A P-A P-A P-A
output Inductance 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz
frequency*1
Bulb 1 Hz 10 Hz 10 Hz
OFF→ON 10 ms 0.5 ms 0.5 ms
Maximum
Response ON→OFF 10 ms 0.5 ms 0.5 ms
time 2_
Output Isolation 1350 VAC 500 VDC
Weight 120 g 158 g 138 g 100 g 122 g 120 g 100 g 123 g 120 g
Model
32AN02T-A 64AN02T-A
Item
Number of outputs 32 64
Connector type MIL connector
Output type Digital output
Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Output voltage 5–30 VDC
Leadage current <10uA
Resistance 0.1A/output, 3.2A/COM
Maximum
Inductance N/A
load
Bulb N/A
Maximum Resistance 100 Hz

output Inductance N/A
frequency*1 Bulb N/A
Maximum OFF→ON
Response 0.5 ms
ON→OFF
time
Output Isolation 500 VDC
Weight 100 g 142 g
*1: The scan cycle affects the frequency.
*2: The life cycle curve is shown below.
120VAC Resistive
3000
30VDC Inductive(t=7ms)
2000
240VAC Inductive(cosψ = 0.4)
1000
120VAC Inductive(cosψ =0.4)
Operation(X10 )
500
3
300
200
100
30VDC
50 Inductive
(t=40ms )
30
20
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2

Contact Current(A)
2-3
2.1.2 Digital Input/Output Module Profiles

 AS08AM10N-A/AS08AN01P-A/AS08AN01R-A/AS08AN01T-A
28.2 89
08AM 1
7
7
IN
_2
S/S
PWR
S/S
IN
0 0
1
2
98.3
1 2
88
3
2 4
5
3
6
3
4 7
6
4
7
8 5
6 75
25
08AN 08AN 08AN
OUT OUT OUT
C0 C0 C0
PWR PWR PWR
C0 C0 C0
OUT OUT OUT
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1
1 2 1 2 1 2
3 3 3
2 4 2 4 2 4
5 5 5
3 3 3
6 6 6
7 4 7 7
4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
Unit: mm
Number Name Description

1 Model name Model name of the module
Input/output LED If there is an input signal, the input LED indicator is ON.
2
indicator If there is an output signal, the output LED indicator is ON.
Removable terminal The inputs are connected to sensors.
3
block The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
Arrangement of the
4 input/output Arrangement of the terminals
terminals
5 Terminal block clip Secures the terminal block
6 DIN rail clip Secures the DIN rail
External module
7 Connects the modules
port
8 Label Nameplate
2-4
 AS16AM10N-A/AS16AN01P-A/AS16AN01R-A/AS16AN01T-A/AS16AP11P-A/AS16AP11R-A/
AS16AP11T-A
38.2 95
16AM 1
7
7
IN IN
S/S S/S
PWR
S/S S/S
2
2_
IN
0 1 0
98.3
1
88
2 3 2
3
4 5 4
5
6 7
8 9
6
7 3
10 11 8
9
4
12 13 10
11
14 15 12
13
8 14
15 5
6 75
35
16AN 16AN 16AN 16AP 16 AP 16AP
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT
C0 C0 C0 C0 C0 C0 C0 C0 C0
PWR PWR PWR PWR PWR PWR

1 C0 C0 0 1 C0 C0 C0
0
OUT OUT OUT IN IN IN
0 0 1 0 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 3
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 3 4 5 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2
4 5 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
3
4 5 6 7 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 4
6 7 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
5 3 3 3 3
C1 C1 6 7 C1 C1 3 3 6
6 6 6 6
6
7 7 7 7 7
7 8 9 8 9 4 4 4 4 4 4
8 9
OUT OUT OUT
8 0 5 5 0 5 5 0
8 8 10 11 5 5
10 11 10 11
9 1 1 1
9 9
12 13 10 2 6 6 2 6 6 2
12 13 10 12 13 10 6 6
11 3 3
11 11 3
14 15 12 7 7 4 7 4
14 15 12 14 15 12 7 7 4
13 5 5
13 13 5
14 6 6
14 14 6
15 7 7
15 15 7
Unit: mm

Input/Output LED If there is an input signal, the input LED indicator is ON.
2
indicator If there is an output signal, the output LED indicator is ON.
3
Arrangement of the
4 input/output Arrangement of the terminals
terminals
5 Terminal block clip Secures the terminal block
External module
port
8 Label Nameplate
2-5
 AS32AM10N-A
28.2 92
32AM
X0 LED
1
X1 LED
7 2
7
39
3
PWR
IN
0
4
1
_2
98.3
2
88
3
4
5
6
7
5
8
9
10
11
12
8
1
13
14
15
6 75
25
Unit: mm

X0/X1 LED
2 Switches the LED indicators to their represented inputs.
Indicator switch
For the external I/O connecting cables UC-ET010-24B, UC-ET020-24B,
3 ML connector
UC-ET030-24B
Power LED
4 Indicates the power status of the module
indicator
5 Input LED indicator LED indicator is ON during input.
External module
port
8 Label Nameplate
 AS32AN02T-A
28.2 92
32AN
Y0 LED
1
Y1 LED
7 2
7
39
3
PWR
OUT
0
4
1
98.3
2
88
3
4
5
6
7
5
8
9
10
11
12
1
8
13
14
15
6 75
25
Unit: mm
2-6

Y0/Y1 LED
2 Switches the LED indicators to their represented outputs.
indicator switch
For the external I/O connecting cables UC-ET010-24D, UC-ET020-24D,
3 ML connector
UC-ET030-24D
Power LED
indicator
2_
Output LED
5 LED indicator is ON during output.
indicator
External module
port
8 Label Nameplate
 AS64AM10N-A
38.2
92
64AM 1
0 1 0 1
2
8
0 1
3 8
40 2
P WR
4
IN
X1 X2
0
1 5
98.3
2
88
3
4
5
6
7
6
X0 X3 8
9
10
11
12
2 40
9
13
14
15
7 75
35
Unit: mm

LED indicator
switch 1
LED indicator
switch 2
For the external I/O connecting cables UC-ET010-24B, UC-ET020-24B,
4 ML connector
UC-ET030-24B
Power LED
indicator
6 Input LED indicator If there is an input signal, the input LED indicator is ON.
External module
port
9 Label Nameplate
2-7
 AS64AN02T-A
38.2 92
64AN 1
0 1 0 1
0 1
2
8
3 8
40 2
P WR
4
O UT
Y1 Y2
0
1 5
_2
98.3
2
88
3
4
5
6
7
6
Y0 Y3 8
9
10
11
12
2 40
9
13
14
15
7 75
35
Unit: mm
LED indicator
switch 1
LED indicator
switch 2
For the external I/O connecting cables UC-ET010-24D, UC-ET020-24D,
4 ML connector
UC-ET030-24D
Power LED
indicator
Output LED
6 If there is an output signal, the output LED indicator is ON.
indicator
External module
port
9 Label Nameplate
 ML connector, extension cable, and wiring modules
1. Extension Cable UC-ET010-24D (1M) / UC-ET020-24D (2M) / UC-ET030-24D (3M)
Length
19 2 0
#1
3 9 40 2
1 2
1
39 40
#2
1 2 2
21 2 2
500 -
+10m m
Unit: mm

Connects a digital input/output module and an external terminal
1 IDC 40-pin terminal
module.
Connects the external terminal modules UB-10-ID16A/UB-10-
OR16A/UB-10-OR16B
2-8
2. I/O connecting cables UC-ET010-24B (1M) / UC-ET020-24B (2M) / UC-ET030-24B (3M)

Length
39 40 39 40
1 2 1 2
2_
Connects an external terminal module and a wiring module UB-10-
ID32A, and UB-10-OT32A
3. AS32AM10N-A/AS64AM10N-A and the external terminal modules UB-10-ID16A, UB-10-ID32A
 UB-10-ID16A
67.0
4
87.0
3
2
53.6
Unit: mm
 UB-10-ID32A
113
1
87
2
4 53.6
Unit: mm
UB-10-ID16A: 20-pin ML connector Connects the external terminal module and a
1
UB-10-ID32A: 40-pin ML connector wiring module
2 Terminals Input/Output terminals for wiring
3 Clip Hangs the external terminal module on a DIN rail
4 Set screw Fixes the base
2-9
4. AS332T-A/AS64AN02T-A and the external terminal modules UB-10-ID16A, UB-10-OR16A, and UB-
10-OT32A.
 UB-10-ID16A
67.0
_2 6
87.0
7
2
53.6
Unit: mm
 UB-10-OR16A
113
1
3
4
87
5
55.3
7
2
6
Unit: mm
 UB-10-OT32A
113
1
87
2
7 53.6
Unit: mm

UB-10- ID16A /OR16A: 20-
pin ML connector Connects the external terminal module and a wiring
1
UB-10-OT32A: 40-pin ML module
connector
2 Terminals Input/Output terminals for wiring
3 2-pin power input terminal Power input terminal for wiring
4 Output LED indicator LED indicator is ON during output.
5 Relay output Relay output
6 Clip Hangs the external terminal module on a DIN rail
7 Set screw Fixes the base
2-10
 Spring clamp/MIL connector terminal block UB-10-IO32D for AS32AM10N-A/AS32AN02T-A

24 . 35
23. 6
1
2_
101
2 26.9
33.7
Unit: mm

1 Terminal block for output Terminal block
2 40-pin MIL connector Connects the module and the wiring module
2 - 11
2.1.3 Digital Input/Output Module Terminals

AS08AM10N-A AS08AN01P-A
08AM 08AN
_2
IN OUT
C0
PWR PWR
C0
IN OUT
0 0 0 0
1 1
1 2 1 2
3 3
2 4
2 4
5 5
3 3
6 6
4 7 4 7
5 5
6 6
7 7
AS08AN01R-A AS08AN01T-A
08AN 08AN
OUT OUT
C0 C0
PWR PWR
C0 C0
OUT OUT
0 0 0 0
1 1
1 2 1 2
3 3
2 4 2 4
5 5
3 3
6 6
4 7 7
4
5 5
6 6
7 7
2-12
AS16AM10N-A AS16AN01P-A
16AM 16AN
IN IN OUT OUT
C0 C0 2_
PWR PWR
0 1
IN OUT
0 1 0 2 3 0
1 1
2 3 2 4 5 2
3 3
4 5 4 6 7 4
5 5
6 7 C1 C1
6 6
7 7
8 9 8 9
8 10 11
8
10 11
9 9
12 13 10 12 13 10
11 11
14 15 12 14 15 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
AS16AN01R-A AS16AN01T-A
16AN 16AN
OUT OUT OUT OUT
C0 C0 C0 C0
PWR PWR
C0 C0 0 1
OUT OUT
0 1 0 2 3 0
1 1
2 3 2 4 5 2
3 3
4 5 6 7 4
4
5 5
6 7 C1 C1
6 6
7 7
8 9 8 9
8 10 11 8
10 11
9 9
12 13 10 12 13 10
11 11
14 15 12 14 15 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
2-13
AS16AP11P-A AS16AP11R-A
16AP 16AP
IN OUT IN OUT
_2 C0 C0
PWR PWR
C0 C0
IN IN
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1
1 1 2 1 1 2
3 3
2 2 2 2 4
4
5 5
3 3 3 3
6 6
7 7
4 4 4 4
OUT OUT
0 5 5 0
5 5
1 1
2 6 6 2
6 6
3 3
7 7 7 7 4
4
5 5
6
6
7
7
AS16AP11T-A AS32AM10N-A
- -
S/S S/S
32AM 1.15 1.14
16AP X0 LED
X1 LED
1.13 1.12
1.11 1.10
1.9 1.8
IN OUT
39 1.7 1.6
C0
PWR
PWR
1.5 1.4
C0
IN
IN
0 1.3 1.2
0 0 0 1
1 2 1.1 1.0
1 1 2
3
3
4
- -
2 2 4
5
5
6
S/S S/S
3 3
6
7
7 0.15 0.14
4 4
OUT
0
8 0.13 0.12
5 5 9
6
1
2
10 0.11 0.10
6 11
7
3
1
12 0.9 0.8
4
13
5
14 0.7 0.6
6
15
7 0.5 0.4
0.3 0.2
0.1 0.0
2-14
AS32AN02T-A AS64AM10N-A
- - - - 2.0 2.1
C0 C0 S/S0 S/S0 2.2 2.3
32AN 1.15 1.14 64AM 1.15 1.14 2.4 2.5
Y0 LED 0 1 01
Y1 LED 1.13 1.12 0 1 1.13 1.12 2.6 2.7
1.11 1.10 1.11 1.10 2.8 2.9
1.9 1.8 1.9 1.8 2.10 2.11
2_
40 2
39
1.7 1.6 PWR 1.7 1.6 2.12 2.13
PWR
1.5 1.4 IN 1.5 1.4 2.14 2.15
OUT 0
0
1
1.3 1.2 X1 X2
1 1.3 1.2 S/S S/S
2
2 1.1 1.0 3 1.1 1.0 - -
3 4
4 - - 5 - - 3.0 3.1
5 6
6 C0 C0 7 S/S0 S/S0 3.2 3.3
7
0.15 0.14 X0 X3 8 0.15 0.14 3.4 3.5
8 9
9
0.13 0.12 10 0.13 0.12 3.6 3.7
11
10
11
0.11 0.10 12 0.11 0.10 3.8 3.9
2 40
1
12 0.9 0.8 13
14
0.9 0.8 3.10 3.11
13
14 0.7 0.6 15
0.7 0.6 3.12 3.13
15
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 3.14 3.15
0.3 0.2 0.3 0.2 S/S1 S/S1
0.1 0.0 0.1 0.0 - -
AS64AN02T-A
- - 2.0 2.1
C0 C0 2.2 2.3
64AN 1.15 1.14 2.4 2.5
0 1 01
0 1 1.13 1.12 2.6 2.7

1.11 1.10 2.8 2.9
1.9 1.8 2.10 2.11
40 2
PWR 1.7 1.6 2.12 2.13

OUT 1.5 1.4 2.14 2.15
0
Y1 Y2
1 1.3 1.2 C1 C1
2
3 1.1 1.0 - -
4
5 - - 3.0 3.1
6
7 C0 C0 3.2 3.3
Y0 Y3 8 0.15 0.14 3.4 3.5
9
10 0.13 0.12 3.6 3.7
11
12 0.11 0.10 3.8 3.9
2 40
13
14
0.9 0.8 3.10 3.11
15
0.7 0.6 3.12 3.13
0.5 0.4 3.14 3.15
0.3 0.2 C1 C1
0.1 0.0 - -
2-15
 ML connector and the wiring module
1. AS32AM10N-A/AS64AM10N-A
 The wiring module: UB-10-ID16A
_2 TB1
TB2
#1
#2
AS32AM10N-A/ AS64AM10N-A
TB1 X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 S/S -
#2
TB2 X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 S/S -
 The wiring module: UB-10-ID32A
AS series terminals:
Upper
X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 X1.0 X1.2 X1.4 X1.6 X1.8 X1.10 X1.12 X1.14 S/S S/S
row
Lower
X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 X1.1 X1.3 X1.5 X1.7 X1.9 X1.11 X1.13 X1.15 S/S S/S
row
2-16
2. AS32AN02T-A/AS64AN02T-A and the wiring modules:
 UB-10-ID16A
TB1
TB2 2_
#1
#2
AS332T-A
TB1 Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 C0 -
#1
TB2 Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 C0 -
 UB-10-OT32A
Upper
Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 Y1.0 Y1.2 Y1.4 Y1.6 Y1.8 Y1.10 Y1.12 Y1.14  
row
Lower
Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 Y1.1 Y1.3 Y1.5 Y1.7 Y1.9 Y1.11 Y1.13 Y1.15 C0 C0
row
 UB-10-OR16A
Terminals:
GND +24
V
C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 C1 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 C2 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 C3 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17
GND +24V
C0 Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2 Y0.3 C1 Y0.4 Y0.5 Y0.6 Y0.7 C2 Y0.8 Y0.9 Y0.10 Y0.11 C3 Y0.12 Y0.13 Y0.14 Y0.15
2-17
3. AS32AM10N-A/AS32AN02T-A and the wiring modules:
 UB-10-IO32D
_2
2-18
2_
2-19
3
Chapter 3 Analog Input Module
AS04/08AD
Table of Contents
3.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.2 Profile........................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................... 3-6
3.2.4 AS04AD Control Register ................................................................ 3-6
3.2.5 AS08AD Control Registers ............................................................. 3-11
3.2.6 Functions .................................................................................... 3-17
3.2.7 Wiring ........................................................................................ 3-20
3.2.8 LED Indicators ............................................................................. 3-24
3.3.1 Initial Setting .............................................................................. 3-24
3.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module................................................... 3-27
3.3.3 Online Mode ................................................................................ 3-28
3.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................. 3-29
3.3.5 Parameters ................................................................................. 3-30
3.4.1 Initial Setting .............................................................................. 3-34
3.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module................................................... 3-37
3.4.3 Online Mode ................................................................................ 3-38
3.4.4 Parameters ................................................................................. 3-39
3.5.1 Error Codes ................................................................................. 3-41
3.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ............................................................ 3-42
A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l
3.1 Overview
This chapter describes the specifications for analog-to-digital modules, their operation, and their programming.
In this chapter, “module” refers to the analog-to-digital modules AS04AD-A, AS08AD-B, and AS08AD-C.
3.1.1 Characteristics
(1) Select a module based on its practical application.
AS04AD-A: Has four channels. A channel can receive either voltage or current input.
AS08AD-B: Has eight channels. A channel can receive voltage input.

_3
AS08AD-C: Has eight channels. A channel can receive current input.
(2) High-speed conversion
Analog signals are converted to digital signals at a rate of 25 ms per channel.
(3) High accuracy
Conversion accuracy: The error range for both voltage input and current input is ±0.2% at ambient
temperature of 25° C. The number of voltage/current inputs that are averaged
is 100.
(4) Use the utility software to configure the module.
The HWCONFIG utility software is built into ISPSoft. You can set modes and parameters directly in
HWCONFIG without spending time writing programs to set registers to manage functions.
3-2
Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A
3.2 Specifications and Functions

3.2.1 Specifications
 Electrical specifications
Module Name AS04AD-A AS08AD-B AS08AD-C
Number of Inputs 4 8 8
Analog-to-Digital
Voltage input/Current input Voltage input Current input
Conversion
Supply Voltage 24 VDC (20.4 VDC–28.8 VDC) (-15% to +20%) 3_

Connector Type Removable terminal block
Conversion Time 2ms/channel
An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/
optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another.
Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500 VDC

Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500 VDC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VDC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500 VDC
Weight 145g
 Functional specifications
Analog-to-Digital
Voltage Input
Conversion
Rated Input Range -10 V ~ +10 V 0 V ~ 10 V ±5 V 0V~5V 1V~5V
Rated Conversion K-32000 K0 K-32000 K0 K0

~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Range K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000
-10.12V -0.12V -5.06V -0.06V 0.95V
Hardware Input Limit*1 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
10.12V 10.12V 5.06V 5.06V 5.05V
K-32384 K-384 K-32384 K-384 K-384
Conversion Limit*2 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384
Error Rate Room Temperature: ±0.2% ; Full Temperature Range: ±0.5%
Hardware Resolution 16 bits
Input Impedance 2MΩ
Absolute Input
±15 V
Range*3
3-3
*1: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the
input signal is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.
*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the digital conversion limit and a
conversion limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (-10 V to +10 V), when the input
signal is 10.15 V, exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The
module uses the upper limit value (32387) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.
*3: If an input signal exceeds the absolute range, it might damage the channel.
_3
Analog-to-Digital
Current Input
Conversion
Rated Input Range ±20 mA 0 mA–20 mA 4 mA–20 mA
Rated Conversion K-32000 K0 K0

~ ~ ~
Range K+2000 K32000 K32000
Hardware Input
-20.24 mA ~ 20.24 mA -0.24 mA ~ 20.24 mA 3.81 mA ~ 20.19 mA
Limit*1
K-32384 K-384 K-384
Conversion Limit*2 ~ ~ ~
K32384 K32384 K32384
Input Impedance 250Ω
Absolute Input
±32 mA
Range*3
*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the digital conversion limit and a
conversion limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (4 mA to 20 mA), when the input
signal is 0 mA, exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The
module uses the upper limit value (-384) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.
3-4
3.2.2 Profile
 AS04AD-A
38.2 95
04AD 1
7
7
V 1+ V 2+
P WR
I1 + I2 +
V I1- V I2- E RR 2
98.3
A D
88
V 3+ V 4+
I3 + I4 +
V I4-
3
V I3-
8 S LD S LD
AG 2 4V
4
3_
0V
9 5
6 75
35
Unit: mm
1 Model Name Model name of the module
Status of the power supply
POWER LED Indicator ON: the power is on.
OFF: the power is off.
Error status of the module
ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2 ERROR LED Indicator
OFF: the module is operating normally.
Blinking: A minor error exists in the module.
Analog-to-digital conversion status

Analog to Digital
Blinking: conversion is in process.
Conversion Indicator
OFF: conversion has stopped.
Removable Terminal Inputs are connected to sensors.

3
Block Outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
Arrangement of the
4 Arrangement of the terminals
Input/Output Terminals
5 Terminal Block Clip For removing the terminal block
6 DIN Rail Clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail
7 Module Connecting Set Connects the modules
8 Ground Clip
9 Label Nameplate
3-5
3.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals

AS04AD-A AS08AD-B AS08AD-C
04AD 08AD 08AD
V 1+ V 2+ V1+ V2+ I1+ I2+

P WR PWR PWR
I1 + I2 + V1- V2- I1- I2-
V I2- E RR ERR
_3
V I1- V3+ V4+ ERR I3+ I4+
A D A D A D
V 3+ V 4+ V3- V4- I3- I4-
I3 + I4 + V5+ V6+ I5+ I6+
V I3- V I4- V5- V6- I5- I6-
S LD S LD V7+ V8+ I7+ I8+
V7- V8- I7- I8-
AG 2 4V AG 24V AG 24V
0V 0V 0V
3.2.4 AS04AD Control Register

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in
the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after
power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.
Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.
CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults
0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating point format
0: closed
1 Channel 1 mode setup
1: -10 V to +10 V
Channel 2 mode setup 2: 0 V–10 V

2
3: -5 V to +5 V
R/W 1
Channel 3 mode setup 4: 0 V–5 V
3
5: 1 V–5 V
Channel 4 mode setup 6: 0 mA–20 mA

4
7: 4 mA–20 mA
3-6
8: -20 mA to +20 mA
5 Channel 1 offset
6 Channel 2 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
7 Channel 3 offset
8 Channel 4 offset
9 Channel 1 gain
3_
10 Channel 2 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
11 Channel 3 gain
12 Channel 4 gain
Channel 1 average
13
times
Channel 2 average
14
times
Range: 1–100 R/W 10
Channel 3 average
15
times
Channel 4 average
16
times
Channel 1 filter
17
average percentage
Range: 0–3
Channel 2 filter
18 Unit: ±10%
average percentage
1: ±10% R/W 1
Channel 3 filter
19 2: ±20%
average percentage
3: ±30%
Channel 4 filter
20
average percentage
0: 2 ms
Channel sampling 1: 4 ms
cycle 2: 10 ms
21 R/W 0
(sampling/integration 3: 15 ms
time) 4: 20 ms
5: 30 ms
3-7
6: 40 ms
7: 50 ms
8: 60 ms
9: 70 ms
10: 80 ms
11: 90 ms
12: 100 ms
_3 0: open channel alarm
1: close channel alarm
bit0: channel 1
bit1: channel 2
bit2: channel 3
bit3: channel 4
22 Channel Alarm Setup R/W 0
0: warning
1: alarm
bit8: error in the power supply
bit9: error in the module hardware
bit10: error in calibration
23 The minimum scale

When the format is set to integer in HWCONFIG, -10.0
24 range for channel 1
the scale range is invalid.
25 The minimum scale For analog-digital modules, it is much more -10.0
26 range for channel 2 convenient if the system can convert digital values
27 The minimum scale to floating-point values for earier understanding.
-10.0
28 range for channel 3 Here you can set the minimum and maximum scale
29 The minimum scale ranges of corresponding floating-point values for
R -10.0
30 range for channel 4 channels.
31 The maximum scale For example, if the scale range for an analog to
10.0
32 range for channel 1 digital input channel is ± 10.0 V, it indicates the
33 The maximum scale maximum value is +10.0 V and the minimum value
10.0
34 range for channel 2 is -10.0 V.
35 The maximum scale If the scale range for an analog to digital input
10.0
36 range for channel 3 channel is 4 mA ~ 20 mA. It indicates the maximum
3-8
37 value is 20 mA and the minimum value is 4 mA.
Note: You can use PLC instruction DSCLP

The maximum scale
(API0217) and set SM685 to ON to use floating- 10.0
38 range for channel 4
point operations when a conversion range needs to
edit.
Instructions for peak values
16#0101: record the peak value again for channel
1
3_
16#010F: record the peak values again for
channels 1–4
201 Instruction Set W 0
16#0201: enable recording for channel 1
16#020F: enable recording for channels 1–4
16#0211: disable recording for channel 1
16#021F: disable recording for channels 1–4
16#0502: restore default settings
The maximum peak

210 0
value for channel 1
The maximum peak

211 Integer format; the maximum peak value for analog 0
value for channel 2 R
inputs
The maximum peak
212 0
value for channel 3
213 The maximum peak 0
3-9
value for channel 4
The minimum peak

214 0
value for channel 1
The minimum peak

215 0
value for channel 2 Integer format; the minimum peak value for analog
R
The minimum peak inputs
216 0
value for channel 3
_3 The minimum peak

217 0
value for channel 4
The time to record for

222 1
channel 1

223 Unit: 10 ms 1
channel 2
Range: 1–100 R/W
224 Time to record the digital value for the channel 1
channel 3

225 1
channel 4
The number of records

240 0
for channel 1

241 0
for channel 2
Range: 0–500, display the current records R
242 0
for channel 3

243 0
for channel 4
4000~
Records for channel 1 500 records for channel 1 R --
4499
4500~ Records for channel 2 500 records for channel 2 R --
4999
5499
5999
3-10
3.2.5 AS08AD Control Registers

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
3_
AS08AD-B
0: closed
1: -10 V to +10 V
3 Channel 3 mode setup 2: 0 V–10 V
3: -5 V to +5 V
4 Channel 4 mode setup 4: 0 V–5 V
5: 1 V–5 V R/W 1

AS08AD-C
6 Channel 6 mode setup 0: closed
1: -20 mA to +20 mA
2: 0 mA–20 mA
3: 4 mA–20 mA
9 Channel 1 offset
10 Channel 2 offset
11 Channel 3 offset
12 Channel 4 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
13 Channel 5 offset
14 Channel 6 offset
15 Channel 7 offset
16 Channel 8 offset
3 - 11
17 Channel 1 gain
18 Channel 2 gain
19 Channel 3 gain
20 Channel 4 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
21 Channel 5 gain
22 Channel 6 gain
23 Channel 7 gain
_3
24 Channel 8 gain
25 Channel 1 average times

Range: 1–100 R/W 10
Channel 1 filter average

33
percentage

34
percentage

35
percentage Range: 0–3
Channel 4 filter average Unit: ±10%

36
percentage 1: ±10% R/W 1
Channel 5 filter average 2: ±20%

37
percentage 3: ±30%

38
percentage

39
percentage
40 Channel 8 filter average
3-12
percentage
0: 2 ms
1: 4 ms
2: 10 ms
3: 15 ms
4: 20 ms
Channel Sampling Cycle 5: 30 ms
41 (Sampling/Integration 6: 40 ms R/W 0 3_
Time) 7: 50 ms
8: 60 ms
9: 70 ms
10: 80 ms
11: 90 ms
12: 100 ms
0: open channel alarm
bit0: channel 1
bit1: channel 2
bit2: channel 3
bit3: channel 4
bit4: channel 5
bit5: channel 6
42 Channel Alarm Setup R/W 0
bit6: channel 7
bit7: channel 8
0: warning
1: alarm
43 The minimum scale range When the format is set to integer in
44 for channel 1 HWCONFIG, the scale range is invalid. R -10.0
45 The minimum scale range For analog-digital modules, it is much more
3-13
46 for channel 2 convenient if the system can convert digital
47 The minimum scale range values to floating-point values for earier
for channel 3 understanding. Here you can set the minimum

48
and maximum scale ranges of corresponding
49 The minimum scale range
floating-point values for channels.
50 for channel 4
For example, if the scale range for an analog
51 The minimum scale range to digital input channel is ±10.0 V, it indicates
52 for channel 5 the maximum value is +10.0 V and the
_3
53 The minimum scale range minimum value is -10.0 V.
54 for channel 6 If the scale range for an analog to digital input
55 channel is 4 mA ~ 20 mA. It indicates the

The minimum scale range
maximum value is 20 mA and the minimum
56 for channel 7
value is 4 mA.
58 for channel 8
Note: You can use PLC instruction DSCLP
59 The maximum scale range
(API0217) and set SM685 to ON to use
60 for channel 1
floating-point operations when a conversion
61 The maximum scale range range needs to edit.
62 for channel 2
64 for channel 3
66 for channel 4
R 10.0
68 for channel 5
70 for channel 6
72 for channel 7
74 for channel 8
3-14
16#0101: record the peak value again for
channel 1
channel 2
channel 3
16#0108: record the peak value again for 3_

channel 4
channels 1-4
The maximum peak value

210 0
for channel 1

211 0
for channel 2

212 0
for channel 3 Integer format; the maximum peak value for
R
The maximum peak value analog inputs
213 0
for channel 4

214 0
for channel 5

215 0
for channel 6
3-15

216 0
for channel 7

217 0
for channel 8
The minimum peak value

218 0
for channel 1

219 0
_3 for channel 2

220 0
for channel 3

221 0
for channel 4 Integer format; the minimum peak value for
R
The minimum peak value analog inputs
222 0
for channel 5

223 0
for channel 6

224 0
for channel 7

225 0
for channel 8

222 1
channel 1
The time to record for Unit: 10 ms

223 1
channel 2 Range: 1–100
R
The time to record for Time to record the digital value for the
224 1
channel 3 channels

225 1
channel 4
3-16
3.2.6 Functions
Item Function Description
Enable/Disable a 1. Enable or disable a channel.

1
Channel 2. If a channel is disabled, the total conversion time decreases.
2 Calibration Calibrate a linear curve.
3 Average Conversion values are averaged and filtered.
Disconnection Disconnection detection only operates when the analog range is 4 mA–
4
Detection 20 mA or 1 V–5 V.
3_
If an input signal exceeds the range of inputs that the hardware can
Channel Detect and
5 receive, the module produces an alarm or a warning. You can disable
Alarm
this function.
The Limit Detections

6 Save the maximum/minimum values for channels.
for Channels
Records for
Channels
7 Save the analog curves for channels
(Applicable for
AS04AD)
8 Scale Range When the format is floating-point, you can set the scale range.
1. Enable/Disable a channel
An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 2 ms per channel. The total conversion time is
2 ms X (the number of channels). If a channel is not used, you can disable it to decrease the total
conversion time.
2. Calibration
To make a curve meet specific needs, calibrate the curve by changing the offset and the gain. The
calibration range depends on the range of inputs that the hardware can receive. The formula is:
Example:
A channel receives voltage inputs between -10.0 V to +10.0 V. The gain is 1000, and the offset is 0. The
corresponding value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V is -32000 to +32000. If you change the offset to -
100, the calibrated value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V becomes -31900 to +32100.
3-17
Original signals
1 0V S igna ls aft er t he ca libration
-32 000 -31900
3200 0 32100
Digita l v alue (X)
-10V
Voltag e (Y)
Analog s ig nal
_3
3. Average
You can set the average value between 1–100. It is a steady value obtained from the sum of the recorded
values. If the recorded values include an acute pulse due to unavoidable external factors, however, you
may observe violent changes in the average value. Use the filtering function to exclude acute pulses from
the sum-up and equalization, so that the computed average value is not affected by the acute recorded
values. Set the filter percentage to the range 0–3, where the unit is 10%. If you set the filter range to 0, the
system sums up all the recorded values and divides them to obtain the average value, but if you set the
filter range to 1, for example, the system excludes the bottom 10% and top 10% of the values and
averages only the remaining values to obtain the average value. For instantance, set the average value to
100 and set the filter percentage to 3. When there are 100 pieces of data collected, the system arranges
the collected data according to their values from large to small and then excludes the bottom 30% and top
30% of the values (60 pieces of data) and averages only the remaining values (40 pieces of data) to
obtain the average value.

Quantity
Range for filter percentage
Present measured value
4. Disconnection detection
Disconnection detection only operates when the analog range is 4–20 mA or 1–5 V. If a module that can
receive inputs between 4–20 mA or from 1–5 V is disconnected, the input signal exceeds the range of
allowable inputs, so the module produces an alarm or a warning.
3-18
5. Channel detection
If an input signal exceeds the allowable range of inputs, an error message appears. You can disable this
function so that the module does not produce an alarm or a warning when the input signal exceeds the
input range.
6. Limit detections for channels
This function saves the maximum and minimum values for channels so that you can determine the peak to
peak values.
Valu e o f the chan nel

3_
Maximum valu e
Mini mu m va lue
Time
7. Records for channels (applicable for AS04AD)
Record the input values of the cyclic sampling for each channel. The system saves up to 500 data
points and the recording time is 10 ms.
500 records o f d ata
Ti me
Instru cti on for recordi ng Recordin g e nds
8. Scale range
You can set the scale range when the format is floating-point. The analog output mode of a channel has
a corresponding digital range. Digital values correspond to analog outputs sent by the module. For
example, if the analog range is -10 V to +10 V, the digital range is -10.0 to +10.0, the HSP scale is 10.0,
and the LSP scale is -10.0. The digital values -10.0 to +10.0 correspond to the analog values -10 V to
+10 V, as the example below shows.
3-19
Analog value
10 V
Rated output range
-10 V
Digital value
-10.0 10.0
_3 Scale range
3.2.7 Wiring
 Precautions
To ensure the analog-to-digital module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise.
Before you install the cables, follow the precautions below.
(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the AC cable and the input signal cables that are connected to the
module must be separate cables.
(2) Do not install the cable near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load that is
not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable
connected to a load which is not a PLC.
(3) Ground shielded cables and hermetically sealed cables separately.
(4) Terminals with insulation sleeves cannot be arranged as a terminal block, so you should cover the
terminals with insulation tubes.
(5) Use single-core cables or twin-core cables in a diameter of 24 AWG–22 AWG with pin-type connectors
smaller than 1 mm. Use only copper conducting wires that can resist temperatures above 60° C-75° C.
< 1m m 8-10m m 24-22AWG
(6) Notes on two-wire, three-wire, and four-wire connections:
 Two-wire connection/three-wire connection (passive transducer): connect the transducer and
the analog input module to the same power circuit.
 Four-wire connection (active transducer): the transducer uses an independent power supply so
do not connect it to the same power circuit as the analog input module.
(7) Note: use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and use wire resistance of less than 100 ohm.
3-20
 AS04AD-A External wiring
AG
*6
4-wir e: v ol tage inp ut
CHX
-10 V~ + 10 V Shi eld ed cabl e *1 1M
+ V I+
+ 2 4V 250 CH1
- *3 I1 +
0V 1M
VI 1-
*4
FE
*6 AG
4-wir e: c urr ent inp ut CHX
-20 mA ~ +2 0 mA Shi eld ed c abl e *1 1M
V 2+
+ *2 25 0 CH2
+ 24 V I2 +
- 1M
0V V I2 -
*4
2-wi re: cu rrent i np ut

FE 3_
4 mA ~ +2 0m A
*6 AG
+ 2 4V CHX
Shi eld ed c abl e *1
+ 1M
V 3+
- *2 25 0 CH3
I3 +
1M
0V V I3 -
*4
FE
3-wi re: vo ltag e inpu t
-1 0 V~ + 10 V Shi eld ed c abl e *1 *6 AG
+ 2 4V CH X
+ 1M
V4 +
25 0 CH4
0V - I 4+
1M
*4 V I4 -
FE
3-wi re: cur rent i npu t

-2 0m A~ + 20 m A *6 AG
Shi eld ed c abl e *1 CHX
+ 24 V 1M
+ *2 V 1+
25 0 CH1
I1 +
0V -
1M
V I1 -
*4
FE
*5
+ 15 V
0V D C /D C
24 VD C AG
24 V C on ve rt e r
-15 V
*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.
*2. If the module is connected to a current signal, the terminals Vn and In+ (n=1–4) must be short-circuited.
*3. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor
with a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.
*4. Connect the shielded cable to the terminal FE.
*5. Connect the terminal to the ground terminal.
*6. Every channel can operate with the wiring presented above.
3-21
 AS08AD-B External wiring
4 -w ire vo lt ag e inp u t AG
-10 V~ + 10 V Sh ield ed c ab le* 1 *5
CHX 1M
+ 2 4V +
V 1+
- *2 1M
0V V1 -
*3
FE
3 - wire v olt ag e in pu t
-1 0 V~ + 10 V S hie ld ed ca b le* 1 *5 AG
_3 + 2 4V +
CH X
1M
V2 +
0V -
1M
V 2-
*3
FE
*4
+ 1 5V
0V D C / DC
2 4 VD C C on ve rte r AG
2 4V
-1 5V
with a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.
3-22
 AS08AD-C External wiring
4 -w ire cu rren t in pu t AG
*4
-2 0m A~ + 2 0m A Sh ield ed cab le* 1
CHX
1M
+ 2 4V +
I1 +
- 2 50 1M
0V I1 -
*2
FE
2- w ire curre nt in pu t
4m A~ + 20 m A
+ 24 V
Sh ield ed cab le* 1 *4 AG
+
CHX
1M
-
I2 +
250 1M
3_
0V I2 -
*2
FE
3 -w ire cu rren t inp ut

-20 mA ~ +2 0 mA Sh ield ed cab le* 1
*4 AG
+2 4 V + CH X
1M
I 3+
0V - 25 0 1M
I3 -
*2
FE
*3
+ 1 5V
0V D C /D C
2 4 VD C C on ve rt e r AG
2 4V
-1 5V
3-23
3.2.8 LED Indicators
Operating status of the module
1 RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.
OFF: the module is not running.
ERROR LED ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2
Indicator OFF: the module is operating normally.
_3
Blink: a minor error exists in the module.
Analog to Digital Analog-to-digital conversion status
3 Conversion Blinking: conversion is in process.
Indicator OFF: conversion has stopped.
3.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

The following example uses the AS04AD-A module.
3.3.1 Initial Setting

(1) Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.
3-24
(2) Select a module and drag it to the working area.
3_
(3) Double-click the module in the working area to open the Device Setting page.
3-25
_3
(4) Choose a parameter, set the values, and click OK.
3-26
(5) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note that you cannot download the
parameters while the CPU module is running.
3_
3.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.
3-27
(2) Double-click the module to open the Device Setting page. The versions of both the firmware and the
hardware are displayed.
_3
3.3.3 Online Mode

(1) Click Online Mode on the toolbar.
3-28
(2) Right-click the module and click Module Status.
(3) View the module status.
3_
3.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File

(1) Click Export in the Device Settings dialog box to save the current parameters as a CSV file (.csv).
3-29
(2) Click Import in the Device Settings dialog box and select a CSV file to import saved parameters.
_3
3.3.5 Parameters
(1) The input formats of the channels
3-30
(2) The CH1–CH4 (channel 1–channel 4) mode settings
3_
(3) The CH1-CH4 calibration settings
3-31
(4) The average filter settings
_3
(5) The sampling time settings
3-32
(6) The channel detection settings
3_
3-33
3.4 DIADesigner+ (Hardware Configuration)

The following example uses AS04AD-A.

(1) Start DIADesigner+, click New Project, and then Project+Device to create a new project.
_3
(2) Add modules in:
➀ Double-click Hardware Configuration
➁ Select the + section and drag and drop the module that you want to add from the Product List to the +
section.
or ➂ Right-click Delta_Localbus Master to see the context meun and then double-click Add Device to
add devices manually or double-click Scan for Devices.
3-34
(3) Select modules:
➀ Double-click the module name in the Hardware Configuration area.
or ➁ Double-click the module name shown in the node.
3_
(4) Module parameter setting page:
3-35
(5) After setting is complete, select the module and click Login on the tool bar to download the settings to the
modules.
_3
3-36

(1) Select the module and click the Information tab to see the module information.
(2) Select the module and click Login on the tool bar to go to Online Mode. You can find the Module Revision 3_
from the Parameters tab.
3-37
3.4.3 Online Mode

(1) Select the module and click Login on the tool bar to go to Online Mode. You can monitor all configuration
parameters. Vaules in the column of Prepared Value are configurable online. After editing the values in
the Prepared Value column, click Write Parameter to confirm the change.
_3
(2) You can monitor the values, status, error codes in each channel from the I/O Mapping tab.
(3) You can monitor the current status and error codes from the Status tab.
3-38
3.4.4 Parameters
(1) You can set up the value format to Integer or Floating for Channel 1 to 4.
(2) You can set up the values for Channel 1 to 4.

3_
(3) You can set up the calibrations for for Channel 1 to 4.
(4) You can set up the average filtering for Channel 1 to 4.
3-39
(5) You can set up the sampling time.
_3 (6) You can set up the channel detect and alarm settings.
3-40
3.5 Troubleshooting
3.5.1 Error Codes
Error A  D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code Indicator Indicator
16#1605 Hardware failure OFF ON
16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF ON
16#1608 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF ON
16#1801 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking 3_

16#1802 Hardware failure OFF Blinking
16#1804 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF Blinking
The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the range of inputs

16#1808
that the hardware can receive.
The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#1809
the hardware can receive.

16#180A

16#180B
the hardware can receive. Run: blinking
Blinking
The signal received by channel 5 exceeds the range of inputs that Stop: OFF
16#180C

16#180D

16#180E

16#180F
Blinking once
or twice and
after 2
- When power-on, the module is not detected by CPU module. OFF
seconds, it
blinks
repeatedly
3-41
3.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure
Description Procedure
Ensure the external 24 V power supply to the module is

The external voltage is abnormal.
functioning normally.
Hardware failure Return the module to the factory for repair.
Internal error
Contact the factory.
The factory calibration is abnormal.
The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the

_3 Check the signal received by channel 1
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

Check the signal received by channel 2.






When power-on, the module is not detected by Check if the connection between module and CPU
CPU module. module is working. If not, connect again.
3-42
4
Chapter 4 Analog Output Module AS04DA
Table of Contents
4.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.1 Characteristics ........................................................................... 4-2
4.2.1 Specifications ............................................................................. 4-3
4.2.2 Profile ....................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ........................................................... 4-6
4.2.4 Control Registers ........................................................................ 4-6
4.2.5 Functions ................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.6 Wiring ..................................................................................... 4-12
4.2.7 LED Indicators .......................................................................... 4-14
4.3.1 Initial Setting ........................................................................... 4-14
4.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module ............................................... 4-17
4.3.3 Online Mode ............................................................................. 4-18
4.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File .......................................... 4-19
4.3.5 Parameters .............................................................................. 4-20
4.4.1 Initial Setting ........................................................................... 4-23
4.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module ............................................... 4-26
4.4.3 Online Mode ............................................................................. 4-27
4.4.4 Parameters .............................................................................. 4-28
4.5.1 Error Codes.............................................................................. 4-30
4.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ......................................................... 4-30
4.1 Overview
An analog output module receives four 12-bit blocks of digital data from a CPU module. The module converts
the digital data into analog signals (voltage or current).
AS04DA-A: Has four channels. A channel can send either voltage or current output.
Digital signals are converted to analog signals at a rate of 2 ms per channel.
(3) High accuracy
_4 Conversion accuracy: The error range for both voltage output and current output is ±0.2% at ambient
temperature of 25° C.
4-2
Ch a pt er 4 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

Module Name AS04DA-A
Number of Outputs 4
Digital-to-Analog
Voltage input/Current input
Conversion
Supply Voltage 24 VDC (20.4 VDC–28.8 VDC) (-15% to +20%)
Conversion Time 2 ms/channel

optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another. 4_
Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500 VDC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500 VDC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500 VDC
Weight 145 g
Digital-to-Analog
Voltage Output
Conversion
Rated Output Range ±10 V 0 V~10 V ±5 V 0 V~5 V 1 V~5 V

K-32000 K-32000 K0 K0
Conversion Range ~ K0~K32000 ~ ~ ~
K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000
Hardware Output Range -10.1V~10.1V -0.1V~10.1V -5.05V~5.05V -0.05V~5.05V 0.95V~5.05V
Error Rate
±0.2%
(Room Temperature)
Error Rate (Full

±0. 5%
Temperature Range)
Linearity error
±0.05%
(Room Temperature)
Linearity error (Full

±0.05%
Temperature Range)
4-3
Digital-to-Analog
Voltage Output
Conversion
Output Impedance ≧1 kΩ ≧500 Ω
Digital-to-Analog Conversion Current Output
Rated Output Range 0 mA–20 mA 4 mA–20 mA

K0
~
Conversion Range
K32000
Hardware Output Range -0.2 mA to +20.2 mA 3.8 mA–20.2 mA
Error Rate
±0.2%
(Room Temperature)
_4 Error Rate
±0.5%
(Full Temperature Range)
Linearity Error (Room

±0.03%
Temperature)
Linearity error (Full

±0.03%
Temperature Range)
Output Impedance ≦550 Ω
4-4
4.2.2 Profile
38.2 95
04DA 1
7
7
VO1 VO2
P WR
IO1 IO2
AG AG E RR 2
98.3
D A
88
SLD SLD
VO3 VO4
3
IO3 IO4
8 AG AG
SLD SLD
4
24V
0V
9 5
6 75
35
unit: mm

4_
Status of the power supply
POWER LED Indicator ON: the power is on.
OFF: the power is off.

Blinking: a minor error exists in the module.
Digital-to-Analog conversion status

Digital-to-Analog
conversion Indicator
Removable Terminal
3 Outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
Block
Arrangement of the
5 Terminal Block Clip For removing the terminal block
8 Ground Clip
9 Label Nameplate
4-5
AS04DA-A
04DA
VO1 VO2
P WR
IO1 IO2
AG AG E RR
D A
SLD SLD
VO3 VO4
IO3 IO4
AG AG
SLD SLD
24V
_4 0V
4.2.4 Control Registers

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating-point format
0: closed
1 Channel 1 mode setup R/W
1: -10 V to +10 V (default)
2: 0 V–10 V
3: -5 V to +5 V
1
4: 0 V–5 V
5: 1 V–5 V
6: 0 mA–20 mA
7: 4 mA–20 mA
5 Channel 1 offset Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
4-6
6 Channel 2 offset
7 Channel 3 offset
8 Channel 4 offset
9 Channel 1 gain
10 Channel 2 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
11 Channel 3 gain
12 Channel 4 gain
Retaining an output
13
sent by channel 1
Retaining an output 0: when the PLC stops, the value of the analog output
14
sent by channel 2 is reset to 0.
R/W 0
4_
Retaining an output 1: when the PLC stops, the value of the analog output
15
sent by channel 3 is retained.
Retaining an output
16
sent by channel 4
Refreshing the time for

17 an output sent by 0
channel 1

Range: 10–3200 (100 ms–32000 ms)
Unit: 10 ms
channel 2
Any value less than 10 is processed as 0. Any value R/W
larger than 3200 is processed as 3200.
Set the value to 0 to disable this function.
channel 3

channel 4
21 When the format is set to integer in HWCONFIG, the R
The minimum scale
-10.0
range for channel 1
22 scale range is invalid. R
23 The minimum scale For analog-digital modules, it is much more convenient R

-10.0
24 range for channel 2 R
if the system can convert digital values to floating-point
25 The minimum scale values for earier understanding. Here you can set the R
-10.0
26 range for channel 3 minimum and maximum scale ranges of corresponding R
27 The minimum scale floating-point values for channels. R -10.0
4-7
28 range for channel 4 For example, if the scale range for an analog to digital R
29 The maximum scale input channel is ±10.0 V, it indicates the maximum R

10.0
30 range for channel 1 value is +10.0 V and the minimum value is -10.0 V. R
31 The maximum scale If the scale range for an analog to digital input channel R
10.0
32 range for channel 2 is 4 mA ~ 20 mA. It indicates the maximum value is 20 R
mA and the minimum value is 4 mA.
33 The maximum scale R
10.0
34 range for channel 3 Note: You can use PLC instruction DSCLP (API0217) R
and set SM685 to ON to use floating-point operations
35 R
The maximum scale
when a conversion range needs to edit. 10.0
range for channel 4
36 R
0: warning
1: alarm
_4
37 Channel alarm setup bit0: error in the power supply R/W 0
4.2.5 Functions

1
When a module stops running, the system can retain the signal sent by the
3 Retain an Output
module.
Refresh Time for an Refresh the analog output value according to the value of the fixed slope.
4
Output
5 Scale Range You can set the scale range when the format is floating-point.
4-8
1. Enable/Disable a Channel
An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 2 ms per channel. The total conversion time is
2 ms X (the number of channels). If a channel is not used, you can disable it to decrease the total
conversion time.
2. Calibration
Example:
4_
corresponding value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V is -32000 to +32000. If you change the offset to -
100, the calibrated value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V becomes -31900 to +32100.
Original signals
-32 000 -31900
3200 0 32100
Digita l v alue (X)
-10V
Voltag e (Y)
Analog s ig nal
4-9
3. Retain an Output
When a module stops running, the system can retain the signal sent by the module.
The output is retained:
Input si gnal
Output signal
_4 Module s tops runni ng Tim e
The output is not retained:
Anal og si gnal
Output signal
Modul e stops r unning Tim e
4-10
4. Refresh time for an Output
Set the refresh time for an output and the system updates the value of the slope (m) accordingly.
Anal og si gnal
Max imum output
Mi ni mum output Time
4_
When the analog output signal changes, the system updates the value of the analog output according to the
value set in the slope, as shown in the image below.
Analog si gnal
Time
4 - 11
5. Scale Range
You can set the scale range when the format is floating-point. The analog output mode of a channel has a
corresponding digital range. Digital values correspond to analog outputs sent by the module. For example, if
the analog range is -10 V to +10 V, the digital range is -10.0 to +10.0, the HSP scale is 10.0, and the LSP
scale is -10.0. The digital values -10.0 to +10.0 correspond to the analog values -10 V to +10 V, as the
example below shows.
Analog value
10 V
Rated output range
_4 -10 V
Digital value
-10.0 10.0
Scale range
4.2.6 Wiring
 Precautions
To ensure the digital-to-analog module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise.
(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the AC cable and the output signal cables that are connected to the
AS04DA-A must be separate cables.
(2) Do not install or bound the cable to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a
load that is not a PLC.
(5) Connect 24 to 22 AWG (1 mm) wires to the input/output terminals. The plastic jackets that are
removed from the cables should be 8 mm to 10 mm long. The specifications for the terminals and the
wiring of the terminals are shown below. Use only copper leads that can resist temperatures above
60° C /75° C.
< 1mm 8-10mm 24-22AWG

(6) Note: use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and use wire resistance of less than 100
ohm.
4-12
 External wiring
Voltage output
- 10V~+1 0V *4
CHX
VO1 CH1
*2
IO1
AC m otor driv e, Shielded c able* 1 AG
AG
recorder, SL D
proportioning v alv e
Current output *4
CHX
0 mA ~20 mA
VO4 CH4
IO4
AG
AG
AC motor driv e, Shielded cable*1 SLD
recorder,
proporti oni ng v al ve *3
FE
+15 V 4_
0V DC/DC
24VDC AG
2 4V C on ve rte r
-15V
having a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.
*3. Connect the SLD to FE, and connect both the FE and the terminal to the ground terminal.
4-13

Digital-to-analog conversion status

Digital to Analog
3 Blinking: conversion is in process.
_4 OFF: conversion has stopped.

4-14
4_
4-15
_4
(4) Choose a parameter, set the values, and click OK.
4-16
(5) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note you cannot download the parameters
cannot be downloaded.
4_

4-17
_4
4.3.3 Online Mode

4-18
(2) Right-click the module and click on Module Status.
4_

4-19
(2) Click Import in the Device Settings dialog box and select a CSV file to import save parameters.
_4
4.3.5 Parameters
(1) The output formats of the channels
4-20
(2) The CH1–CH4 (channel 1–channel 4) mode settings
4_
(3) The CH1–CH4 calibration settings
4-21
(4) The output settings
_4
(5) The alarm settings
4-22

The following example uses AS04DA-A.
4_
(2) Add modules in:

section.
4-23
(3) Select modules:

_4
4-24
modules.
4_
4-25
(2) Select the module and click Login on the tool bar to go to Online Mode. You can find the Module Revision
_4
4-26
4.4.3 Online Mode
4_
(2) You can monitor the values, status, error codes in each channel from the I/O Mapping tab. You can also
set a new value in the colum of Prepared Value and press Ctrol+F7 on the keyboard to write the new
values in.
4-27
4.4.4 Parameters
_4
4-28
(6) You can set up the channel detect and alarm settings.
4_
4-29
4.5 Troubleshooting
4.5.1 Error Codes
Error D  A LED ERROR LED

Description
16#1801 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking
_4 Blinking once
or twice and
after 2
seconds, it
blinks
repeatedly

Internal error
4-30
5
Chapter 5 Analog Input/Output Module
AS06XA
Table of Contents
5.1 Overview ....................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.1 Characteristics ........................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Specifications and Functions ......................................................... 5-3
5.2.1 Specifications ............................................................................ 5-3
5.2.2 Profile ...................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ........................................................... 5-7
5.2.4 Control Registers ....................................................................... 5-8
5.2.5 Functions .................................................................................5-13
5.2.6 Wiring .....................................................................................5-20
5.2.7 LED Indicators ..........................................................................5-22
5.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ................................................................. 5-23
5.3.1 Initial Setting ...........................................................................5-23
5.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module ...............................................5-26
5.3.3 Online Mode .............................................................................5-27
5.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ..........................................5-28
5.3.5 Parameters ..............................................................................5-29
5.4 DIADesigner+ (Hardware Configuration) .................................... 5-34
5.4.1 Initial Setting ...........................................................................5-34
5.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module ...............................................5-37
5.4.3 Online Mode .............................................................................5-38
5.4.4 Parameters ..............................................................................5-39
5.5 Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 5-41
5.5.1 Error Codes ..............................................................................5-41
5.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure .........................................................5-41
5.1 Overview
This chapter describes the specifications for the analog input/output module, its operation, and its
programming. On the analog input/output module, four channels receive analog signals (voltage or current),
and converts those signals into 16-bit digital signals. In addition, the analog input/output module receives two
blocks of 16-bit digital data from a CPU module, and converts the digital data into analog signals (voltage or
current). The analog input/output module sends the analog signals by two channels
(1) Use the AS06XA-A analog input/output module, based on its practical application.
CH1–CH4: A channel can receive either voltage or current inputs.
CH5–CH6: A channel can send either voltage or current outputs.
The conversion rate is 2 ms per channel.
(3) High accuracy

_5
Conversion accuracy: At ambient temperature of 25° C.
Input: The error range for both voltage and current input is ±0.2%.
Output: The error range for both voltage and current output is ±0.02%.
5-2
Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

Module Name AS06XA-A
Number of Analog 4 inputs

Inputs/Outputs 2 outputs
Analog-to-Digital
Voltage input/Current input/Voltage output/Current output
Conversion
Supply Voltage 24 VDC (20.4–28.8 VDC) (-15% to +20%)
Conversion Time 2ms/channel

optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another.
Isolation between a digital circuit and the ground: 500 VDC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and the ground: 500 VDC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VDC 5_
Isolation between the 24 VDC and the ground: 500 VDC
Weight 145 g
 Functional specifications for the analog-to-digital conversion
Analog-to-Digital
Voltage Input
Conversion
Rated Input Range -10 V ~ +10 V 0 V ~ 10 V ±5 V 0V~5V 1V~5V

K-32000 K0 K-32000 K0 K0
Rated Conversion Range ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000
-10.12V -0.12V -5.06V -0.06V 0.95V
Hardware Input Limit*1 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
10.12V 10.12V 5.06V 5.06V 5.05V
K-32384 K-384 K-32384 K-384 K-384
Conversion Limit*2 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384
Input Impedance 2MΩ
Absolute Input Range*3 ±15 V
5-3
*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the conversion limit and a conversion
limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (-10 V to +10 V), when the input signal is 10.15 V,
exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The module uses the upper
limit value (32384) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.
Analog-to-Digital
Current Input
Conversion
Rated Input Range ±20 mA 0 mA–20 mA 4 mA–20 mA
Rated Conversion K-32000 K0 K0

~ ~ ~
Range K+2000 K32000 K32000
Hardware Input
_5 Limit*1
-20.24 mA ~ 20.24 mA -0.24 mA ~ 20.24 mA 3.81 mA ~ 20.19 mA
K-32384 K-384 K-384

Conversion Limit*2 ~ ~ ~
K32384 K32384 K32384
Input Impedance 250Ω
Absolute Input
±32 mA
Range*3
*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the conversion limit and a conversion
limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (4 mA to 20 mA), when the input signal is 0 mA,
exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The module uses the upper
limit value (-384) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.
5-4
 Functional specifications for the digital-to-analog conversion
Digital-to-Analog
Voltage Output
Conversion
Rated Output Range ±10 V 0 ~ 10 V ±5 V 0~5V 1~5V

K-32000 K0 K-32000 K0 K0
Conversion Range ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000
-10.1 V -0.1 V -5.05 V -0.05 V 0.95
Hardware Output Range ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
+10.1 V 10.1 V +5.05 V +5.05 V 5.05 V
Error Rate
±0.2%
(Room Temperature)
Error Range
±0.5%
(Full temperature range)
Linearity Error
±0.05%
(Room Temperature)
Linearity Error
±0.05% 5_
Permissible load
≧1kΩ ≧500Ω
impedance
Digital-to-Analog
Current Output
Conversion
Rated Output Range 0–20 mA 4–20 mA

K0 K0
~ ~
Conversion Range
K32000 K32000
Hardware Output Range -0.2 mA to 20.2 mA 3.8–20.2 mA
Error Range
±0.2%
(Room Temperature)
Error Range
±0.5%
Linearity Error
±0.03%
(Room Temperature)
Linearity Error ±0.10%
5-5
Permissible Load
≦550 Ω
Impedance
5.2.2 Profile
38.2 95
1
7
7
2
98.3
88
8 3
4
9
5
6 75
35
_5 Unit: mm
RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

Conversion status
Analog-to-Digital
Inputs are connected to transducers.

3 Removable Terminal Block
Outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
Arrangement of the
5-6
5 Clip For removing the terminal block
8 Ground Clip
9 Label Nameplate

AS06XA-A
06X A
V1+ V2+
P WR
5_
I1+ I2+
VI1- VI2- E RR
A D
V3+ V4+
I3+ I4+
VI3- VI4 -
VO1 VO2
IO1 IO2
AG 24V
0V
5-7

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
0: closed
1 Input channel 1 mode setup
1: -10 V to +10 V (default)
2: 0–10 V
3: -5 to +5 V
R/W 1
4: 0–5 V
5: 1–5 V
6: 0–20 mA
_5 4 Input channel 4 mode setup 7: 4–20 mA
8: -20 mA to +20 mA
5 Input channel 1 offset

Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
9 Input channel 1 gain

Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
Input channel 1 average

13
times

14
times
Range: 1–100 R/W 10
15
times

16
times
17 Input channel 1 filter R/W 1
5-8
average percentage
Input channel 2 filter Range: 0–3

18
average percentage Unit: ±10%
Input channel 3 filter 1: ±10%
19
average percentage 2: ±20%
Input channel 4 filter 3: ±30%

20
average percentage
0: 2 ms
1: 4 ms
2: 10 ms
3: 15 ms
4: 20 ms
Input channel sampling 5: 30 ms

21 cycle 6: 40 ms R/W 0
(sampling/integration time)
7: 50 ms 5_
8: 60 ms
9: 70 ms
10: 80 ms
11: 90 ms
12: 100 ms
bit0: channel 1
bit1: channel 2
bit2: channel 3
bit3: channel 4
22 Input channel alarm setup R/W 0
0: warning
1: alarm
5-9
0: closed
Output channel 1 mode 1: -10 V to +10 V (default)
23
setup
2: 0–10 V
3: -5 V to +5 V R/W
1
4: 0–5 V
Output channel 2 mode 5: 1–5 V
24
setup 6: 0–20 mA
7: 4–20 mA
25 Output channel 1 offset

Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
26 Output channel 2 offset
27 Output channel 1 gain

Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
28 Output channel 2 gain
Retain the output sent by 0: When the PLC stops, the value of the
29
channel 1 analog output is reset to 0.
_5 R/W 0
Retain the output sent by 1: When the PLC stops, the value of the
30
channel 2 analog output is retained.
Refresh the time for Range: 10–3200 (100 ms–32000 ms)

31 R/W 0
output sent by channel 1 Unit: 10 ms
Any value less than 10 is read as 0. Any value

Refreshing the time for an
32 larger than 3200 is read as 3200. R/W 0
output sent by channel 2
Set the value to 0 to disable this function.

When the format is set to integer in -10.0
34 for input channel 1
HWCONFIG, the scale range is invalid.
35 The minimum scale range For analog-digital modules, it is much more
-10.0
36 for input channel 2 convenient if the system can convert digital
37 The minimum scale range values to floating-point values for earier
-10.0
38 for input channel 3 understanding. Here you can set the minimum
R
39 The minimum scale range and maximum scale ranges of corresponding
-10.0
40 for input channel 4 floating-point values for channels.
41 The minimum scale range For example, if the scale range for an analog
-10.0
42 for output channel 1 to digital input channel is ±10.0 V, it indicates
43 the maximum value is +10.0 V and the

The minimum scale range
minimum value is -10.0 V. -10.0
44 for output channel 2
5-10
45 The maximum scale range If the scale range for an analog to digital input
10.0
46 for input channel 1 channel is 4 mA ~ 20 mA. It indicates the
47 The maximum scale range maximum value is 20 mA and the minimum

10.0
48 for input channel 2 value is 4 mA.
49 The maximum scale range Note: You can use PLC instruction DSCLP
10.0
for input channel 3 (API0217) and set SM685 to ON to use
50
floating-point operations when a conversion
range needs to edit. 10.0
52 for input channel 4

10.0

10.0
channel 1
5_
channel 2
channel 3
channel 4
channels 1–4
5 - 11

210
for channel 1

211
for channel 2 Integer format; the maximum peak value for
R -
analog inputs
212
for channel 3

213
for channel 4

214
for channel 1

215
for channel 2 Integer format; the minimum peak value for
R -
The minimum peak value analog inputs
216
for channel 3

_5 217
for channel 4

222
channel 1

223 Unit: 10 ms
channel 2
Range: 1–100 R/W 1
The time to record for Time to record the digital value for the
224
channel 3 channels

225
channel 4
The number of records for

240
channel 1

241
channel 2
Range: 0–500, display the current records R 0
242
channel 3

243
channel 4
4000
Records for channel 1 500 records for channel 1
~4499
R -
4500
~4999
5-12

5000
~5499
5500
~5999
5.2.5 Functions
Set modes of operation and parameters with HWCONFIG utility software built into ISPSoft.
 Analog input

1
Disconnection Disconnection detection only operates when the analog range is 4–20
4
Detection mA or 1–5 V. 5_
Channel Detect and
Alarm
this function.
Limit Detections for

6 Save the maximum/minimum values for channels
Channels
Records for
7 Save the analog curves for channels.
Channels
8 Scale Range When the format is floating-point, you can set the scale range.
An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 2 ms per channel. The total conversion time
is 2 ms X (the number of channels). If a channel is not used, you can disable it to decrease the total
conversion time.
2. Calibration
calibration range depends on the range of inputs which can be received by the hardware. The formula is:
5-13
Example:
corresponding value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V is -32000 to +32000. If you change the offset to
-100, the calibrated value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V becomes -31900 to +32100. When the
input voltage is 0 V, the digital value becomes -100. When the input voltage is 10.0 V, the digital value
becomes 32100.
Gain = 1000, Offset = -100
Signals after the calibration

10
Original signals
(X2, Y2)
(10V, 32100)
-10V
10V Voltage (X)
(X1, Y1) Input analog v alue
(0V, 100)
-10
_5
(Y)
Digital value
3. Average
values. If the recorded values include an acute pulse due to unavoidable external factors, however, you may
observe violent changes in the average value. Use the filtering function to exclude acute pulses from the
sum-up and equalization, so the computed average value is not affected by the acute recorded values. Set
the filter percentage to the range 0–3, where the unit is 10%. If you set the filter range to 0, the system sums
up all the recorded values and divides them to obtain the average value, but if you set the filter range to 1, for
example, the system excludes the bottom 10% and the top 10% of the values and averages only the
remaining values to get the average value. For instantance, set the average value to 100 and set the filter
percentage to 3. When there are 100 pieces of data collected, the system arranges the collected data
according to their values from large to small and then excludes the bottom 30% and top 30% of the values
(60 pieces of data) and averages only the remaining values (40 pieces of data) to obtain the average value.
5-14
Quantity
4. Disconnection detection
Disconnection detection only operates when the analog range is 4–20 mA or 1–5 V. If a module which can
receive inputs between 4–20 mA or between 1–5 V is disconnected, the input signal exceeds the range of
allowable inputs, so the module produces an alarm or a warning.
5. Channel Detection
If an input signal exceeds the allowable range of inputs, an error message appears. You can disable this 5_
input range.
peak values.
Maximum valu e
Mini mu m va lue
Time
5-15
7. Records for Channels
points and the recording time is 10 ms.
Ti me
8. Scale range
When the format is floating-point, you can set the scale range. The analog output mode of a channel
has a corresponding digital range. Digital values correspond to analog outputs sent by the module. For
_5
Analog value
Rated output range
-10 V
Digital value
-10.0 10.0
Scale range
5-16
 Analog Output

1
When a module stops running, the system retains the signal sent by the
3 Retain an Output
module.
Refresh Time for an Refresh the analog output value according to the value of the fixed slope.
4
Output
5 Scale Range You can set the scale range when the format is floating-point.
An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 2 ms per channel. The total conversion time
is 2 ms X (the number of channels). If a channel is not used, you can disable it to decrease the total
conversion time.
2. Calibration 5_
To make a curve meet specific needs, calibrate the curve by changing the offset and the gain. The calibration
range depends on the range of inputs which can be received by the hardware. The formula is:
Example:
corresponding value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V is -32000 to +32000. If you change the offset to
200 and the gain to 1000, the calibrated value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V is -31800 to +32200.
Original signals
-32 000 -31800

3200 0 32200
Digita l v alue (X)
-10V
Voltag e (Y)
Analog s ig nal
5-17
3. Retain an Output
When a module stops running, the system retains the signal sent by the module.
The output is not retained:
Analog signal
Output signal
Time
4. Refresh Time for an Output

_5
Set the refresh time for an output and the system updates the value of the slope (m) accordingly.
Anal og si gnal
Max imum output
Mi ni mum output Time
5-18
When the analog output signal changes, the system updates the value of the analog output according to
the value set in the slope, as shown in the image below.
Analog si gnal
Time
*The output conversion time and the input channel sampling cycle are the same.
5. Scale Range
You can set the scale range when the format is floating-point. The analog output mode of a channel has
a corresponding digital range. Digital values correspond to analog outputs sent by the module. For
5_
Analog value
10 V
Rated output range
-10 V
Digital value
-10.0 10.0
Scale range
5-19
5.2.6 Wiring
 Precautions
AS06XA-A must be separate cables.
(2) Do not install the cable near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load that
is not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a
cable connected to a load which is not a PLC.
(5) Use single-core cables or twin-core cables with a diameter of 24–22 AWG and with pin-type
_5 connectors smaller than 1 mm. Only use copper conducting wires which can withstand temperatures
of 60° C /75° C or higher.
< 1m m 8-10m m 24-22AWG
ohm.
 Four-wire connection (active transducer): the transducer uses an independent power supply, so
5-20
 External wiring
(1) AS06XA-A
AG
4-wire: vo lt ag e inp ut *8
-10 V~ +1 0V
Sh ield ed cabl e *1 C HX -I
1M
+ V1 +
+2 4V 25 0 CH 1
- *3 I1+
0V 1M
VI1 -
*6
FE
*8 AG
4-wire: cu rrent i np ut C HX -I
-20 mA~ + 20 mA Sh ield ed cabl e *1 1M
V 2+
+ *2 25 0 CH2
+ 24 V I2 +
- 1M
0V VI 2-
*6
2-wi re: cur rent in put FE
4 mA ~+ 20 mA
*8 AG
+ 24V Sh ield ed cabl e *1 CH X-I
+ 1M
V 3+
- *2
25 0 CH3
I3 +
1M
0V VI 3-
*6
FE
3-wir e: vol tage in put
-10 V~ +1 0V Sh ield ed cabl e *1 *8 AG
+2 4V C HX -I
5_
+ 1M
V4 +
2 50 C H4
0V - I 4+
1M
*6 V I4 -
FE
3-wire: cu rrent i np ut
-2 0m A~ +2 0m A *8 AG
Sh ield ed cabl e *1 C HX -I
+ 2 4V 1M
+ *2 V 1+
2 50 C H1
I1 +
0V - 1M
V I1 -
*6
FE
AC motor dr ive,
rec order, Vol tage o utput
-10 V~+ 1 0V *8
proportioning v alv e C HX-O
VO1 C H5
*5
IO1
AG
Sh ield ed cabl e *4 * 6 AG
FE
AC motor dr ive, *8
rec order, Current output CH X-O
proportioning v alv e 0m A~2 0m A
VO2 CH6
IO2
AG
AG
Sh ield ed cabl e *4 * 6
FE
*7
+1 5V
0V D C /D C
24 VD C AG
24 V C o nv ert er
-15 V
having a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.
5-21
*4. Connect the shielded cable to the terminal FE and to the ground terminal.
*6. The wording “CHX-I” indicates that you can use those five wiring methods for every input channel. The
wording “CHX-O” indicates that you can use those two wiring methods for every output channel.

2

_5 Analog-to-Digital Conversion status
5-22

5_
5-23
_5
5-24
(4) Choose the parameter, set the values, and click OK.
parameters while the CPU module is running. 5_
5-25

_5
5-26
5.3.3 Online Mode

5_
5-27

_5
5-28
5.3.5 Parameters
(1) The input modes of the channels
(2) Input CH1–CH4 (channel 1–channel 4) mode settings 5_
5-29
(3) Input CH1–CH4 calibration
(4) Input average filter
_5
5-30
(5) Input sampling time
(6) Input channel detection and alarm settings
5_
5-31
(7) Output CH1-CH2 mode settings
(8) Output CH1-2 calibration
_5
5-32
(9) Output Settings
5_
5-33

The following example uses AS06XA-A.
_5
(2) Add modules in:

➁ Select the + section and drag and drop the module that you want to add from the Product List to the
+ section.
5-34
(3) Select modules:

(4) Module parameter setting page: 5_
5-35
(5) After setting is complete, select the module and click Login on the tool bar to download the settings to
the modules.
_5
5-36
(2) Select the module and click Login on the tool bar to go to Online Mode. You can find the Module
Revision from the Parameters tab.
5_
5-37
5.4.3 Online Mode
(1) Select the module and click Login on the tool bar to go to Online Mode. You can monitor all
configuration parameters. Vaules in the column of Prepared Value are configurable online. After editing
the values in the Prepared Value column, click Write Parameter to confirm the change.
_5
(2) You can monitor the values, status, error codes in each channel from the I/O Mapping tab. You can also
set a new value in the colum of Prepared Value and press Ctrol+F7 on the keyboard to write the new
values in.
5-38
5.4.4 Parameters
5_
5-39
_5
(7) You can set up the output channel mode for Channel 1 and 2.
(8) You can set up the calibrations for output Channel 1 and 2.
(9) You can set up the output settings for output Channel 1 and 2.
5-40
5.5 Troubleshooting
5.5.1 Error Codes
Error A↔ D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code indicator indicator

16#1808

16#1809
Blinking
The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the range of inputs that Stop: OFF 5_
16#180A

16#180B
Blinking once
or twice and
after 2
seconds, it
blinks
repeatedly

Internal error
5-41

Check the signal received by channel 1



_5
5-42
6
Chapter 6 Temperature Measurement
Module AS04/06RTD
Table of Contents
6.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 6-2
6.2 Specifications and Functions ...................................................................6-3
6.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.2 Profile ........................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ................................................................ 6-5
6.2.4 AS04RTD Control Registers .............................................................. 6-6
6.2.5 AS06RTD Control Registers ............................................................ 6-10
6.2.6 Functions..................................................................................... 6-15
6.2.7 Control Mode ............................................................................... 6-18
6.2.8 Wiring ......................................................................................... 6-18
6.2.9 LED Indicators .............................................................................. 6-20
6.3. HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 6-21
6.3.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................... 6-21
6.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module .................................................... 6-24
6.3.3 Online Mode ................................................................................. 6-25
6.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File .............................................. 6-26
6.3.5 Parameters .................................................................................. 6-27
6.4 DIADesigner+ (Hardware Configuration) ......................................... 6-30
6.4.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................... 6-30
6.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module .................................................... 6-32
6.4.3 Online Mode ................................................................................. 6-33
6.4.4 Parameters .................................................................................. 6-34
6.5 Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 6-36
6.5.1 Error Codes.................................................................................. 6-36
6.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ............................................................. 6-37
6.5.3 State of the Connection ................................................................. 6-38
6.1 Overview
This section describes the specifications for temperature measurement modules, their operation, and their
programming. The AS04/06RTD is a temperature measurement module that converts the temperatures
received from four/six thermocouples into digital signals. You can select either Celsius or Fahrenheit as the
unit of measurement.
(1) Select a sensor based on its practical application.
Pt100/Ni100/Pt1000/Ni1000/JPt100/LG-Ni1000/Cu50/Cu100/0–300 Ω/0–3000 Ω sensor
Two-wire/Three-wire configuration: 200 ms/channel
(3) High accuracy
Conversion accuracy: The error range of the input is ±0.1% at ambient temperature of 25° ±5° C.)
(4) Disconnection detection
When a sensor is disconnected, the AS04RTD produces an alarm or a warning.
_6 (5) PID control
An object’s temperature can be maintained through PID control actions.
6-2
Ch ap te r 6 Te mper a tu re Me asur eme n t Mod ul e AS0 4/0 6RTD

Module AS04RTD-A AS06RTD-A
Number of Analog
4 6
Inputs
2-Wire & 3-Wire Pt100/Ni100/Pt1000/Ni1000/JPt100/LG-Ni1000/Cu50/Cu100/0–
300 Ω/0–3000 Ω
Pt100: DIN 43760-1980 JIS C1604-1989; 100 Ω 3850 PPM/°C
Pt1000: DIN EN60751; 1 kΩ 3850 PPM/°C

Applicable Sensor
Ni100/Ni1000: DIN 43760
JPt100: JIS C1604-1989
LG-Ni1000
Cu50/Cu100
Pt100/Ni100/Pt1000/Ni1000/JPt100
25° C/77° F: The allowed error range is ±0.1% of full scale.

6_
-20° C to 60° C/-4° F to 140° F: The allowed error range is ±0.5% of full scale.
Overall Accuracy
LG-Ni1000; 25° C/77° F: The allowed error range is ±0.1% of full scale.
Cu50; 25° C/77° F: The allowed error range is ±4% of full scale.
Cu100; 25° C/77° F: The allowed error range is ±2% of full scale.
Conversion Time Two-wire/Three-wire configuration: 200 ms/channel
optocoupler, and the analog channels are isolated from one another by
optocouplers.
Isolation Isolation between a digital circuit and the ground: 500 VDC
Isolation between an analog circuit and the digital circuit: 500 VDC
Weight 115 g 125 g
6-3
Analog-to-Digital
Centigrade (°C) Fahrenheit (°F) Input Impedance
Conversion
Pt100 : -292° F to +1,472° F

Pt100 : -180° C to +800° C Ni100：-112° F to +338° F
Ni100 : -80° C to +170° C
Pt1000：-292° F to +1,472° F
Pt1000 : -180° C to +800° C
Ni1000 : -80° C to +170° C Ni1000：-112° F to +338° F 0–300 Ω
Rated Input Range*1
JPt100 : -180° C to +500° C JPt100：-292° F to +932° F 0–3000 Ω
LG-Ni1000 : -50° C to +180° C LG-Ni1000：-58° F to +356° F
Cu50 : -50° C to +150° C
Cu50：-58° F to +302° F
Cu100 : -50° C to +150° C
Cu100：-58° F to +302° F
Average function Range: 1-100
Self-diagnosis Disconnection detection
*1 If the measured temperature exceeds the upper limit, it only shows the maximum value. If the measured
temperature is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.
6.2.2 Profile
38.2 95
04RT D 1
7 7
_6 2
98.3
88
3
8
4
9
5
6 75
35
Unit: mm
2 OFF: the module is not running.
ERROR LED Error status of the module
Indicator ON: a serious error exists in the module.
6-4
Analog-to-Digital Conversion status
Conversion Blinking: conversion is in process.
Removable The inputs are connected to transducers.

3
Terminal Block The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
Arrangement of the
4 Input/Output Arrangement of the terminals
Yerminals
Module Connecting Connects the modules

7
Set
8 Ground Clip

6_
AS04RTD-A AS06RTD-A
0 4R T D 06RTD
L1+ L1- L1+ L1-

PWR P WR
S LD I 1- L2+ L2-
L2+ L2- ERR SLD I12 - E RR

A D A D
S LD I 2- L3+ L3-
L3+ L3- L4+ L4-
S LD I 3- I 56- I34-
L4+ L4- L5+ L5-
S LD I 4- L6+ L6-
24V SLD 24V
0V 0V
6-5
6.2.4 AS04RTD Control Registers

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
0: closed
1 Channel 1 mode setup 1：0–300 Ω (default)
2：0–3000 Ω
3：Pt100
4：JPt100
5：Pt1000 R/W 1
6：Ni100
7：Ni1000
8：LG-Ni1000
4 Channel 4 mode setup 9：Cu50
10：Cu100
_6
5 Channel 1 offset
6 Channel 2 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
7 Channel 3 offset
8 Channel 4 offset
9 Channel 1 gain
10 Channel 2 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
11 Channel 3 gain
12 Channel 4 gain

Range: 1–100 R/W 10
17 Channel 1 filter average percentage Range: 0–3

R/W 1
18 Channel 2 filter average percentage Unit: ±10%
6-6
19 Channel 3 filter average percentage
20 Channel 4 filter average percentage
0: Fahrenheit
21 Units of temperature R/W 0
1: Celsius
bit0: channel 1
bit1: channel 2
bit2: channel 3
bit3: channel 4
22 Channel alarm setup R/W 0
0: warning
1: alarm
16#0101: record the peak value
again for channel 1 6_

again for channel 2
again for channel 3
again for channel 4
201 Instruction set 16#010F: record the peak values W 0
again for channels 1–4
16#0201: enable recording for
channel 1
channel 2
channel 3
6-7
channel 4
16#020F: enable recording for
channels 1–4
16#0211: disable recording for
channel 1
channel 2
channel 3
channel 4
16#021F: disable recording for
channels 1–4
210 The maximum peak value for channel 1 -
211 The maximum peak value for channel 2 Integer format; the maximum -
R
212 The maximum peak value for channel 3 peak value for analog inputs -
213 The maximum peak value for channel 4 -

_6 214 The minimum peak value for channel 1 -
215 The minimum peak value for channel 2 Integer format; the minimum peak -
value for analog inputs R

216 The minimum peak value for channel 3 -
217 The minimum peak value for channel 4 -
222 The time to record for channel 1 Unit: 10 ms 1
223 The time to record for channel 2 Range: 1–100 1

R/W
224 The time to record for channel 3 The time to record the digital 1
225 The time to record for channel 4 value for the channels 1
240 The number of records for channel 1 0
241 The number of records for channel 2 Range: 0–500, display the current 0
R
242 The number of records for channel 3 records 0
243 The number of records for channel 4 0
4000-
4499
4500- Records for channel 2 500 records for channel 2 R --
6-8
4999
5000-
5499
5500-
5999
6_
6-9
6.2.5 AS06RTD Control Registers

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
0: closed
1：0–300 Ω (default)
2 2：0–3000 Ω
Channel 2 mode setup
3：Pt100 1
3 Channel 3 mode setup 4：JPt100
5：Pt1000 R/W
4 Channel 4 mode setup 6：Ni100
7：Ni1000
5 Channel 5 mode setup 8：LG-Ni1000
9：Cu50
10：Cu100
_6
7 Channel 1 offset
8 Channel 2 offset
9 Channel 3 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
10 Channel 4 offset
11 Channel 5 offset
12 Channel 6 offset
13 Channel 1 gain
14 Channel 2 gain
15 Channel 3 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
16 Channel 4 gain
17 Channel 5gain
18 Channel 6 gain

Range: 1–100 R/W 10
6-10

25
percentage

26
percentage

27
R/W 1
28
percentage

29
percentage

30
percentage
0: Fahrenheit
1: Celsius 6_
bit0: channel 1
bit1: channel 2
bit2: channel 3
bit3: channel 4
bit4: channel 5
bit5: channel 6
0: warning
1: alarm
6 - 11
channel 1
channel 2
channel 3
channel 4
16#110: record the peak values again for
channels 5
channels 6
channels 1-6

201 Instruction set W 0
_6 16#0208: enable recording for channel 4
16#0210: enable recording for channels 5
16#0220: enable recording for channels 6
16#023F: enable recording for channels 1-6
16#033F: disable recording for channel1-6
16#0501: restore default settings, clear
setting values in the Flash
16#0502: restore default settings, do not
clear setting values in the Flash
6-12
The maximum peak value for

210 -
channel 1

211 -
channel 2

212 -
channel 3 Integer format; the maximum peak value for
R
The maximum peak value for analog inputs
213 -
channel 4

214 -
channel 5

215 -
channel 6
The minimum peak value for

216 -
channel 1

217 -
channel 2

218 -
channel 3 Integer format; the minimum peak value for
R
219
The minimum peak value for analog inputs
-
6_
channel 4

220 -
channel 5

221 -
channel 6
222 The time to record for channel 1 1
223 The time to record for channel 2 Unit: 100 ms 1
224 The time to record for channel 3 Range: 1–100 1

R/W
225 The time to record for channel 4 The time to record the digital value for the 1
226 The time to record for channel 5 channels 1
227 The time to record for channel 6 1

240 0
channel 1
Range: 0–200, display the current records R
241 0
channel 2
6-13

242 0
channel 3

243 0
channel 4

244 0
channel 5

245 0
channel 6
4000
- Records for channel 1 200 records for channel 1 R -
4199
4500
4699
5000
5199
5500
_6 - Records for channel 4 200 records for channel 4 R -
5699
6000
6199
6500
6699
6-14
6.2.6 Functions
Use the HWCONFIG utility software built into ISPSoft to set modes of operation and parameters.
 Analog input

1
2 Unit of Measurement Select the unit of measurement: Fahrenheit or Celsius.
Disconnection If the channel is open, the module can detect when it is disconnected. If
5
Detection the input is open-circuited, the module produces an alarm or a warning.
Channel Detection
and Alarm
this function.

Channels
Records for 6_
Channels
9 PID Algorithm PID control modes
An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 200 ms per channel. If a channel is not used,
you can disable it to decrease the total conversion time.
2. Unit of Measurement
Select the unit of measurement, Fahrenheit or Celsius, according to your needs.
3. Calibration
 To make a curve meet specific needs, calibrate the curve by changing the offset and the gain. The
(𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 × 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺)
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 = + 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
1000
6-15
Example:
If the gain is 1000 and the offset is 0, the corresponding value for the original signal 0° C to 100° C is 0–1000.
If you change the offset to 100, the calibrated value for the original signal 0° C to 100° C becomes 100–1100.
O
Original signals
100 C Signals af ter the calibration
-320 00
0 100 1000 110 0
D igital v alue (X)
I nput analog value (Y)
4. Average
values. If the recorded values include an acute pulse due to unavoidable external factors, however, you
may observe violent changes in the average value. Use the filtering function to exclude the acute pulses
from the sum-up and equalization, so the computed average value is not affected by the acute recorded
values. Set the filter percentage to the range 0–3, where the unit is 10%. If you set the filter range to 0, the
system sums up all the recorded values and divides them to obtain the average value, but if you set the
_6 filter range to 1, for example, the system excludes the bottom 10% and the top 10% of the values and
averages only the remaining values to obtain the average value.

Quantity
5. Disconnection Detection
If the channel is open, the module can detect when it is disconnected. If the input is open-circuited, the
module produces an alarm or a warning.
6-16
If an input signal exceeds the allowable range of inputs, an error message appears. You can disable this
input range.
7. Limit Detections for Channels
peak values.
Maximum valu e
Mini mu m va lue
Time
8. Records for Channels
points for AS04RTD-A and up to 200 data points for AS06RTD-A and the recording time is 100 ms. The
following uses AS04RTD-A as an example to demonstrate.

6_
Ti me
9. PID control
PID algorithm is available for every channel. With its auto tuning function, parameters such as Kp, Ki, Kd
and more can be calculated and therefore temperature control can be achieved. You can also use
DMPID instruction to calculate relative parameters by entering the parameters in the endpoints of
corresponding instruction image and you can then obtain the output values from the output endpoints.
Note: DMPID instruction is availbe for AS04RTD-A (V1.04 or later), AS06RTD-A (V1.00 or later), AS
Series PLC (V1.06 or later) and AS-SCM (V2.04 or later).
6-17
6.2.7 Control Mode

1. Refer to section 7.2.7 for more details on how to use DMPID instruction.
2. When using PID parameters to set up control registers: PID control registers of AS04RTD-A are
retainable; however PID control registers of AS06RTD-A are not retainable.
6.2.8 Wiring
 Precautions
ASRTD Series must be separate cables.
(2) Do not install the cable near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load
which is not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable,
or a cable connected to a load which is not a PLC.

ohm.
_6
 External wiring
(1) AS04RTD-A
0~ 300Ω, 0~ 3000Ω
N i100 /Ni1000/ Pt 100/ Pt 1000 Ni 10 0 Pt1 00 ,J Pt1
, 00 ,
C u50/C u100/ J Pt 100/ LG -Ni1000 Cu 5 0, C u 1 00 /
Ni 10 0 0, P t1 0 00 ,
C H1 L G -N i 10 00 * 3
L1 +
L 1- ADC
I1-
*2 INA
S hielded cab le * 1 S LD
2 -Wi re AG
C H2
L2+
L2-
I2-
S hielded cab le * 1 AG
3 -Wi re
6-18
*1. Use shielded twisted pair cables for temperature sensors, and keep them away from power cables
and other cables that generate noise.
*2. If using two-wire temperature sensors, Ln- and In- must be short-circuited (where n is between 1–4).
*3. There are two different internal excitation currents. If you are using a Ni100 temperature sensor, a
Pt100 sensor, a JPt100, a Cu50/Cu100, or a 0~300 Ω resistance sensor, the internal excitation
current is 1.5 mA. If you are using a Ni1000 temperature sensor, a Pt1000 temperature sensor, a LG-
Ni1000 sensor, or a 0~3000 Ω resistance sensor, the internal excitation current is 0.2 mA.
Note: When using a three-wire temperature sensor, the cables should be the same length (less than 200
meter) and with a resistor less than 20 ohm.
(2) AS06RTD-A
0~ 300Ω, 0~ 3000Ω
N i100 /Ni1000/ Pt 100/ Pt 1000 Ni 10 0 Pt1 00 ,J Pt1
, 00 ,
C u50/C u100/ J Pt 100/ LG -Ni1000 Cu 5 0, C u 1 00 /
Ni 10 0 0, P t1 0 00 ,
C H1 L G -N i 10 00 * 3
L1 +
L 1- ADC
S LD INA
2 -Wi re S hielde d c able *1
CH2
L2+ 6_
L2 -
I12- *2
3 -Wi re S hielde d c able *1 AG
*1. Use shielded twisted pair cables for temperature sensors and keep them away from power cables and
other cables that generate noise.
*2. Terminal “I12-“ indicates “ I1- & I2-“, terminal “I34-“ indicates “ I3- & I4-“, and terminal “I56-“ indicates
“ I5- & I6-“. If you use two-wire temperature sensors, Ln- and In- must be short-circuited (where n is
between 1–6).
*3. There are two different internal excitation currents. If you are using a Ni100 temperature sensor, a
Pt100 sensor, a JPt100, a Cu50/Cu100, or a 0~300 Ω resistance sensor, the internal excitation
current is 1.0 mA. If you are using a Ni1000 temperature sensor, a Pt1000 temperature sensor, a LG-
Ni1000 sensor, or a 0~3000 Ω resistance sensor, the internal excitation current is 0.2 mA.
Note: When using a three-wire temperature sensor, the cables should be the same length (less than 200
meter) and with a resistor less than 20 ohm.
6-19

2
_6
6-20
6.3. HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

The following users AS04RTD-A as an example to demonstrate.
6_
6-21
_6
6-22
6_
6-23

_6
6-24
6.3.3 Online Mode

6_
6-25

(1) Click Export in the Device Setting dialog box to save the current parameters as a CSV file (.csv).
(2) Click Import in the Device Setting dialog box and select a CSV file to import saved parameters.
_6
6-26
6.3.5 Parameters
(2) Input CH1–CH4 (channel 1–channel 4) mode settings
6_
6-27
(3) Input CH1-CH4 calibration
_6
6-28
(5) Temperature measurement
(6) Input channel detection and alarm settings
6_
6-29

The following example uses AS04DTD-A.

(2) Add modules in:

_6
section.
6-30
(3) Select modules:
6_
6-31
modules.

_6
6-32
6.4.3 Online Mode

6_
6-33
6.4.4 Parameters
_6
6-34
(5) You can set up the temperature measurement units.
6_
6-35
6.5 Troubleshooting
6.5.1 Error Codes

Description

16#1808

16#1809

16#180A
Blinking
16#180B
_6 The signal received by channel 5 exceeds the range of inputs that
16#180C

16#180D
Blinking once
or twice and
after 2
seconds, it
blinks
repeatedly
6-36

Internal error






range of inputs that the hardware can receive. 6_
6-37
6.5.3 State of the Connection
State of connection
Channel value
L+ L- I-
● ● ● Maximum value for the channel
● ● Maximum value for the channel
● Maximum value for the channel
● Maximum value for the channel
● Minimum value for the channel*1
●: Disconnection
*1: for AS06RTD Series: in the modes of 0-300Ω and 0-3000Ω, it cannot detect I- state of connection.
_6
6-38
7
Chapter 7 Temperature Measurement
Module AS04/08TC
Table of Contents
7.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................... 7-3
7.2 Specifications and Functions ............................................................. 7-4

7.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................ 7-4
7.2.2 Profile........................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................... 7-6
7.2.4 AS04TC Control Registers ............................................................... 7-6
7.2.5 AS08TC Control Registers ............................................................. 7-10
7.2.6 Functions .................................................................................... 7-16
7.2.7 Control Mode ............................................................................... 7-19
7.2.8 Wiring ........................................................................................ 7-38
7.2.9 LED Indicators ............................................................................. 7-39

7.3.1 Initial Setting .............................................................................. 7-39
7.3.3 Online Mode ................................................................................ 7-43
7.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................. 7-44
7.3.5 Parameters ................................................................................. 7-45
7.4 DIADesigner+ (Hardware Configuration) ........................................ 7-49

7.4.1 Initial Setting .............................................................................. 7-49
7.4.3 Online Mode ................................................................................ 7-53
7.4.4 Parameters ................................................................................. 7-54

7.5.1 Error Codes ................................................................................. 7-56
7.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ............................................................ 7-57
7-1
7.1 Overview
This chapter describes the specifications for the ASTC-A module, its operation, and its programming. The
AS04TC-A is a temperature measurement module that converts temperatures received from thermocouples
(type J, K, R, S, T, E, N, or B, with ±100 mV voltage inputs) into digital signals. You can select either Celsius
(resolution: 0.1° C) or Fahrenheit (resolution: 0.1° F) as the unit of measurement.
An introduction to thermocouples
A thermocouple uses the Seebeck effect to measure differences in temperature. Generally speaking, a
thermocouple consists of two conductors of different materials that produce a voltage at the point where the
two conductors contact. The voltage produced depends on the difference of temperature between the
junctions with other parts of those conductors, and it ranges from several dozen microvolts to several
thousand microvolts. Because the voltage is so low, it needs to be amplified.
Differential operations are used to eliminate external noise. Thermocouples are more stable than thermistors,
resistance thermometers, and thermal resistors, so thermocouples are widely used in industrial applications.
A thermocouple consists of a circuit having two wires of different metals or metal alloys welded together or
joined at both ends. One of the junctions—normally the cold junction—is maintained at a known reference
temperature, and the other junction is at the temperature to be sensed. A temperature gradient across the
junction of the wires gives rise to an electric potential according to the Seebeck effect. The voltage produced
is proportional to the difference of temperature between the junctions with other parts of those conductors.
The voltage can be derived from the following equation.
T2
V =∫
T1
(Q A − QB )dT
(A)
_7
where QA and QB are the thermopowers (Seebeck coefficient) of the metals A and B, and T1 and T2 are the
temperatures of the two junctions.
Principle of operation
Because QA and QB are almost unrelated to temperature, formula (A) above can be approximated as in
equation (B).
V=α(T2- T1) (B)
7-2
Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C
There are two types of thermocouple thermometers: wrapped thermocouples and bare thermocouples. A
wrapped thermocouple is wrapped in protective metal, and is similar to an electric spoon in appearance.
Wrapped thermocouples are used to measure temperature of liquid, and bare thermocouples are used to
measure temperature of gas.
(1) Select a sensor based on its practical application.
Type J thermocouples, type K thermocouples, type R thermocouples, type S thermocouples, type T

thermocouples, type E thermocouples, or type N thermocouples, with ±100 mV voltage inputs
AS04TC-A: Has four channels. Inputs received by a channel are temperatures.
AS08TC-A: Has eight channels. Inputs received by a channel are temperatures.
A temperature is converted into a digital signal at a speed of 200 ms per channel.
(4) High accuracy
Conversion accuracy: the error range is ±0.5% of the input at ambient temperature of 25° C ±5° C.
(5) Disconnection detection
When a sensor is disconnected, the module produces an alarm or a warning.
(6) PID control 7_

An object’s temperature can be maintained through PID control actions.
The HWCONFIG software is built into ISPSoft. You can set modes and parameters directly in
7-3

Module Name AH04TC-A AH08TC-A
Number of Analog
4 8
Inputs
Type J, type K, type R, type S, type T, type E, type N, and type B

Applicable Sensor
thermocouples; ±100 mV voltage inputs
25° C/77° F: The error range allowed is ±0.5% of full scale.

Overall Accuracy
-20° C to +60° C/-4° F to +140° F: the error range allowed is ±1% of full scale.
Conversion Time 200 ms/channel

optocoupler, and the analog channels are isolated from one another by
optocouplers.
Isolation between a digital circuit and the ground: 500 VDC
Isolation
Isolation between analog channels: 120 VAC
Weight 115g 125g
_7 Analog-to-Digital
Centigrade (°C) Fahrenheit (°F) Voltage Input
Conversion
Type J: -100° C to +1,200° C Type J: -148° F to +2,192° F

Type K: -100° C to +1,350° C Type K: -148° F to +2,462° F
Type R: 0° C to 1,750° C Type R: 32° F to 3,182° F
Type S: 0° C to 1,750° C Type S: 32° F to 3,182° F
Rated Input Range*1 ±100 mV
Type T: -150° C to +400° C Type T: -238° F to +734° F
Type E: -150° C to +980° C Type E: -238° F to +1,796° F
Type N: -150° C to +1,300° C Type N: -238° F to +2,372° F
Type B: 200° C to +1,800° C Type B: 392°F to 3,272°F
Average Function Range: 1-100
Self-Diagnosis Disconnection detection
*1 If the measured temperature exceeds the upper limit, it only shows the maximum value. If the measured
temperature is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.
7-4
7.2.2 Profile
38.2 95
04TC 1
7
7
98.3
88
3
8
4
9 5
6 75
35
Unit: mm

Conversion status
Analog-to-Digital
Conversion Indicator 7_
The inputs are connected to transducers.

3 Removable Terminal Block
The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
Arrangement of the
6 DIN rail clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail
7 Module connecting set Connects the modules
8 Ground clip
7-5

AS04TC-A AS08TC-A
0 4 TC 08 TC
I1 + I1+ I 1-
PWR PWR
SLD I1- I2+ I 2-
I2 + ERR I3+ I 3- ERR

A D A D
SLD I2- I4+ I 4-
I3 + I5+ I 5-
SLD I3- I6+ I 6-
I4 + I7+ I 7-
SLD I4- I8+ I 8-
2 4V SLD 24V
0V 0V
7.2.4 AS04TC Control Registers

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
_7 1 Channel 1 mode setup

0: closed
1: -100 mV to +100 mV
2 Channel 2 mode setup 2: J-Type
3: K-Type
4: R-Type R/W 1
5: S-Type
3 Channel 3 mode setup 6: T-Type
7: E-Type
8: N-Type
9: B-Type
5 Channel 1 offset
6 Channel 2 offset Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
7 Channel 3 offset
7-6
8 Channel 4 offset
9 Channel 1 gain R/W

Range: -32768 to +32767 1000
Channel 1 average
13
times
Channel 2 average
14
times
Range: 1–100 R/W 10
Channel 3 average
15
times
Channel 4 average
16
times

17
percentage

18
R/W 1
19
percentage

20
percentage 7_
0: Fahrenheit
1: Celsius
bit0: channel 1
bit1: channel 2
22 Channel alarm setup bit2: channel 3 R/W 0
bit3: channel 4
0: warning
1: alarm
7-7
bit11: error in CJC temperature
channel 1
channel 2
channel 3
channel 4
channels 1–4
201 16#0201: enable recording for channel 1 W 0

Instruction set

_7
The maximum peak

210 -
value for channel 1
The maximum peak

211 -
value for channel 2 Integer format; the maximum peak value for
R
The maximum peak analog inputs
212 -
value for channel 3
The maximum peak

213 -
value for channel 4
214 The minimum peak Integer format; the minimum peak value for R -
7-8
value for channel 1 analog inputs
The minimum peak

215 -
value for channel 2
The minimum peak

216 -
value for channel 3
The minimum peak

217 -
value for channel 4

222 1
channel 1

223 Unit: 100 ms 1
channel 2
Range: 1–100 R/W
The time to record for The time to record the digital value for the
224 1
channel 3 channels

225 1
channel 4

240 0
for channel 1

241 0
for channel 2
Range: 0-500, display the current records R
242 0
for channel 3

243 0
for channel 4 7_
4000
Records for channel 1 500 records for channel 1 R -
~4499
4500
~4999
5000
~5499
5500
~5999
7-9
7.2.5 AS08TC Control Registers

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
2 Channel 2 mode setup 0: closed R/W

1: -100 mV to +100 mV
2: J-Type
3: K-Type
4: R-Type
1
5: S-Type
6: T-Type
7: E-Type
8: N-Type
7 9: B-Type
Channel 7 mode setup R/W
9 Channel 1 offset
10 Channel 2 offset
11 Channel 3 offset
12 Channel 4 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
13 Channel 5 offset
_7
14 Channel 6 offset
15 Channel 7 offset
16 Channel 8 offset
17 Channel 1 gain
18 Channel 2 gain
19 Channel 3 gain
20 Channel 4 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
21 Channel 5 gain
22 Channel 6 gain
23 Channel 7 gain
24 Channel 8 gain
7-10

Range: 1–100 R/W 10

33 R/W
percentage

34 R/W
percentage

35 R/W
percentage

36 R/W
1
Unit: ±10%
37 R/W
percentage

38 R/W
percentage
39
R/W 7_
percentage

40 R/W
percentage
0: Fahrenheit
1: Celsius
bit0: channel 1
bit1: channel 2
bit2: channel 3
bit3: channel 4
7 - 11
bit4: channel 5
bit5: channel 6
bit6: channel 7
bit7: channel 8
0: warning
1: alarm
bit11: error in CJC temperature
channel 1
channel 2
channel 3
channel 4
channel 5

_7
201 Instruction set channel 6 W 0
channel 7
channel 8
16#01FF: record the peak value again for
channels 1-8
7-12
16#02FF: enable recording for channels 1-8
16#03FF: disable recording for channels 1-8
16#0501: restore default settings, clear setting
values in the Flash
16#0502: restore default settings, do not clear
setting values in the Flash

210 -
for channel 1 7_
211 -
for channel 2

212 -
for channel 3
The maximum peak value Integer format; the maximum peak value for
213 R -
for channel 4 analog inputs

214 -
for channel 5

215 -
for channel 6

216 -
for channel 7
7-13

217 -
for channel 8

218 -
for channel 1

219 -
for channel 2

220 -
for channel 3

221 -
for channel 4
Integer format; the minimum peak value for
R
analog inputs
222 -
for channel 5

223 -
for channel 6

224 -
for channel 7

225 -
for channel 8

226 R/W 1
channel 1

227 R/W 1
channel 2
_7
228 R/W 1
channel 3

229 Unit: 100 ms R/W 1
channel 4
Range: 1–100
The time to record for The time to record the digital value for the
230 R/W 1
channel 5 channels

231 R/W 1
channel 6

232 R/W 1
channel 7

233 R/W 1
channel 8
7-14

240
channel 1

241
channel 2

242
channel 3

243
channel 4
Range: 0-100, display the current records R 0
244
channel 5

245
channel 6

246
channel 7

247
channel 8
4000
~4099
4500
~4599
5000
~5099
5500
~5599
6000
~6099 7_
6500
~6599
7000
~7099
7500
~7599
7-15
7.2.6 Functions

1
2 Unit of Measurement Select the unit of measurement: Fahrenheit or Celsius.
Disconnection If the channel is open, the module can detect when it is disconnected. If
5
Detection the input is open-circuited, the module produces an alarm or a warning.
Channel Detection
and Alarm
this function.

Channels
Records for
Channels
9 PID Algorithm PID control modes
An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 200 ms per channel. If a channel is not used,
_7 you can disable it to decrease the total conversion time.
2. Unit of Measurement
Select the unit of measurement, Fahrenheit or Celsius, according to your needs.
3. Calibration
(𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 × 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺)
𝑂𝑂𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = + 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
1000
7-16
Example:
If the gain is 1000 and the offset is 0, the corresponding value for the original signal 0° C to 100° C is 0–1000.
If you change the offset to 100, the calibrated value for the original signal 0° C to 100° C becomes 100–1100.
Gain = 1000, Offset = 0
O
Original signals
100 C Signals af ter the calibration
-320 00
0 100 1000 110 0
D igital v alue (X)
I nput analog value (Y)
4. Average
values. If the recorded values include an acute pulse due to unavoidable external factors, however, you may
observe violent changes in the average value. Use the filtering function to exclude the acute pulses from the
sum-up and equalization, so the computed average value is not affected by the acute recorded values. Set the
filter percentage to the range of 0–3, where the unit is 10%. If you set the filter range to 0, for example, the
system sums up all the recorded values and divides them to obtain the average value, but if you set the filter
range to 1, the system excludes the bottom 10% and the top 10% of the values and averages only the
remaining values to obtain the average value.
7_
Quantity
5. Disconnection Detection
If the channel is open, the module can detect when it is disconnected. If the input is open-circuited, the
module produces an alarm or a warning.
7-17
If an input signal exceeds the allowable range of inputs that the hardware can receive, an error message
appears and the Error LED blinks. You can disable this function so that the module does not produce an
alarm or warning and the Error LED also does not blink when the input signal exceeds the input range.
7. Limit Detections for Channels
peak values.
Maximum valu e
Mini mu m va lue
Time
8. Records for channels
Record the input values of the cyclic sampling for each channel. For AS04TC-A, the system saves up to
500 data points and the recording time is 10 ms. For example, if the conversion time is 2 ms and 4
channels are open, the recording time is 8 ms x 500 data points = 4 seconds in total. And the system
saves up to 100 data points for AS08TC-A and the recording time is 100 ms. The following uses
AS04TC-A as an example to demonstrate.

_7
Ti me
9. PID control
PID algorithm is available for every channel. With its auto tuning function, parameters such as Kp, Ki, Kd
and more can be calculated and therefore temperature control can be achieved. You can also use
DMPID instruction to calculate relative parameters by entering the parameters in the endpoints of the
corresponding instruction image and then you can then obtain the output values from the output
endpoints. Note: DMPID instruction is available for AS04TC-A (V1.04 or later), AS08TC-A (V1.00 or
later), AS Series PLC (V1.06 or later) and AS-SCM (V2.04 or later).
7-18
7.2.7 Control Mode

You can also use DMPID to execute PID control. The applicable models and FW are AS04TC-A (V1.04 or
later), AS08TC-A (V1.00 or later), AS Series PLC (V1.06 or later) and AS-SCM (V2.04 or later).
API Instruction code Operand Function

PID algorithm for RTD/TC
1417 D MPID As shown in the following table
modules
Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

GROUP   
MODULE   
CH   
UPDATE     
PID_RUN     
SV   
PID_MODE   
PID_MAN     
MOUT_AUTO     
AUTO_DBW   
Kc_Kp  
Ti_Ki  
Td_Kd  
Tf  
PID_EQ     
PID_DE     
PID_DIR     
ERR_DBW 
ALPHA   
BETA   
MOUT  7_
BIAS   
CYCLE   
MV 
PV 
I_MV 
ERROR 
DWORD
STRING
LWORD
LREAL
WORD
BOOL
REAL
Data
UINT
DINT
LINT
TMR
CNT
INT
type
See the explanation below
Pulse instruction 16-Bit instruction 32-Bit instruction

－－ AS
7-19
GROUP ： Group number

MODULE ： Module number
CH ： Channel number
UPDATE ： Update PID parameters
PID_RUN ： Enable the PID algorithm
SV ： Target value (SV)
PID_MODE ： PID control mode
PID_MAN ： PID Auto/Manual mode
MOUT_AUTO ： Manual/Auto output value
AUTO_DBW ： Range within which the auto tuning is not
working
Kc_Kp ： Proportional gain
Ti_Ki ： Integral coefficient (sec. or 1/sec)
Td_Kd ： Derivative coefficient (sec)
Tf ： Derivate-action time constant (sec)
PID_EQ ： PID formula types
PID_DE ： Calculation of the PID derivative error
PID_DIR ： PID forward/reverse direction
ERR_DBW ： Range within which the error value is
counted as 0
ALPHA ： Initial value compensation of integral
calculus (for heating up)
BETA ： Initial value compensation of integral
calculus (for cooling down)
MOUT ： Manual output value
BIAS ： Feed forward output value
CYCLE ： Sampling time
MV ： Output value (MV)
PV ： Present value
I_MV ： Accumulated integral value
ERROR ： Error code
Operand Data type Function Setting range Description
The RTD/TC module group number
that is connected to the right side of
PLC directly or connected to the
_7 remote module that acts as PLC, e.g.
GROUP DWORD/DINT Group number the first connected module group is
group number 1, the second connected
module group is group number 2. Up to
15 module group can be connected
and counted.
The module number that is connected
to the right side of PLC directly or
connected to the remote module that

MODULE DWORD/DINT Module number acts as PLC, e.g. the first connected
module is module number 1, the
second connected module is module
number 2. Up to 32 modules can be
7-20
connected and counted and each type
of modules should be included in the
count.
Channel number for PID algorithm, e.g.
channel 1 is number 1 for PID

CH DWORD/DINT Channel number
algorithm and channel 2 is number 2
for PID algorithm and so forth.
True：Update PID related parameters

in the module, such as
Update PID
UPDATE BOOL PID_RUN~CYCLE.
parameters
False: After updating is complete, it
refreshes to False.
True: use the PID algorithm.

Enabling the PID
PID_RUN BOOL False: reset the output value (MV) to 0,
algorithm
and stop using the PID algorithm.
SV DWORD/DINT Target value -32768~32767 Target value
0: Automatic control
When PID_MAN switches from True
to False, invoke the output value
(MV) in the automatic algorithm.
1: Auto tuning the parameters for the
temperature control. After tuning is 7_

done, the sysem switches to auto
PID_MODE DWORD/DINT PID control mode
control mode (PID_MODE is set to
0) and fill in the appropriate
parameters (Kc_Kp, Ti_Ki, Td_Kd,
Tf, ALPHA and BETA)
Note: when the mode is set to 1, auto
tuning the parameter, you cannot
use numerical value to set up.
True: Manual
Output the MV according to

PID_MAN BOOL PID A/M mode
MOUT. This setting has no effect
when PID_MODE is set to 1.
7-21
False: Automatic
Output the MV according to the
PID algorithm.
True: Automatic
MOUT varies with the MV.

MOUT automatic
MOUT_AUTO BOOL False: Normal
change mode
MOUT does not vary with the
MV.
Used when the
mode is set to auto

Range within
tuning, within the
which the auto
AUTO_DBW DWORD/DINT 0~32000 range of SV ± dead
tuning is not
band, the auto
working
tuning is not
working.
Calculated If the P coefficient is

Range of
proportional less than 0, the
positive single-
coefficient (Kc or Kc_Kp is 0.
Kc_Kp REAL precision
Kp, according to Independently, if
floating-
the settings in Kc_Kp is 0, it is not
point numbers
PID_EQ) controlled by P.
Range of
_7 positive single- If the calculated
Integral coefficient
precision coefficient I is less
(Ti or Ki, according
Ti_Ki REAL floating- than 0, Ti_Ki is 0. If
to the settings in
point numbers Ti_Ki is 0, it is not
PID_EQ)
(unit: Ti = sec; controlled by I.
Ki = 1/sec)
Range of
Derivative If the calculated
positive single-
coefficient (Td or coefficient D is less
precision
Td_Kd REAL Kd, according to than 0, Td_Kd is 0.
floating-
the settings in If Ti_Ki is 0, it is not
point numbers
PID_EQ) controlled by D.
(unit: sec)
7-22
If the derivate-
Range of action time constant
positive single- is less than 0, Tf is
Derivate-action precision 0 and it is not

Tf REAL
time constant floating- controlled by the
point numbers derivate-action time
(unit: sec) constant (derivative
smoothing).
True: dependent formula

PID_EQ BOOL PID formula types
False: independent formula
True: use the variations in the PV to
calculate the control value of the
The calculation of derivative (Derivative of the PV).
PID_DE BOOL the PID derivative False: use the variations in the error (E)
error to calculate the control value of
the derivative (derivative of the
error).
True: reverse action; heating up

PID
(E=SV-PV)
PID_DIR BOOL forward/reverse
False: forward action; cooling down
direction
(E=PV-SV)
The error value (E)
is the difference
7_
between the SV
and the PV. When
the setting value is
Range within 0, the function
which the error disabled; otherwise

ERR_DBW DWORD/DINT -32768~32767
value is counted as the CPU module
0. checks
whether the present
error is less than
the absolute value
of ERR_DBW, and
checks whether the
7-23
present error meets
the cross status
The error value (E)
is the difference
between the SV
and the PV. When
the ERR_DBW
setting value is 0,
the function is
disabled; otherwise
the CPU PLC
checks
whether the present
error is less than
the absolute value
of ERR_DBW, and
checks whether the
present error meets
the cross status
condition. If the
present error is less
than the absolute

value of
_7 ERR_DBW,
and meets the
cross status
condition, the
present error is
counted as 0, and
the PLC applies the
PID algorithm ;
otherwise the
present error is
brought into the PID
algorithm.
7-24
Initial value Initial value
compensation of 0.0~100.0 compensation of

ALPHA DWORD/DINT
integral calculus (unit: 1%) integral calculus (for
(for heating up) heating up)
Initial value Initial value
compensation of 0.0~100.0 compensation of

BETA DWORD/DINT
integral calculus (unit: 1%) integral calculus (for
(for cooling down) cooling down)
When set to PID
Manual
(PID_MAN=True),
0~1000
MOUT DWORD/DINT MV the MV value is
(unit: 0.1%)
outputted as the
value set manually
for MOUNT.
Feed forward output

Feed forward
BIAS DWORD/DINT -32768~32767 value, used for the
output value
PID feed forward.
When the
instruction is
scanned, use the

1~1000
CYCLE DWORD/DINT Sampling time (TS) PID algorithm
(unit: 100 ms)
according to the
7_
sampling time, and
refresh MV.
0.0~100.0
MV REAL MV output value
(unit: 1%)
PV DWORD/DINT/REAL Present value Format is defined in HWCONFIG.
Accumulated integral value is for
Accumulated reference. When the MV is out of the

I_MV REAL
integral value range of 0-100%, the accumulated
integral value in I_MV stops changing.
16#0000：instruction is being executed

Error / status
ERROR DWORD/DINT and is working normally
codes
16#1400：the module you are using
7-25
does not support this instruction.
16#1401：group number or module

number setting error
16#1402：the module you are using

does not respond and communication
time out
16#1403：channel setting error
Note:
1. If the PID parameter exceeds the upper limit, only the maximum value can be written in the module, if the
PID parameter is below the lower limit, only the minimum value can be written in the module.
2. When PID_RUN switches from True to False, it clears the MV output value to 0. If you need to keep the
last MV output value, you can switch the operand EN to False to close this instruction and the MV output
value can be kept.
Example
1. You need to set up the parameters before executing DMPID. Switch the operand EN from False to True to
execute this instruction. If you need to change parameters during execution, you can use the UPDATE
flag to update the parameters (including PID_RUN ~ CYCLE). After the parameters are updated, the
system clears the flag UPDATE.
2. When M0 is ON, the instruction is executed. When M2 is ON, the DMPID starts to process. When M2 is
OFF, MV value is 0. And the value in MV is stored in D16. When M0 is OFF, the instruction is not
_7 executed. And the values in the instruction is not changed.
3. When the mode is set to 1, the system starts to auto tuning the parameters for the temperature control.
After tuning is done, the system switches to auto control mode (PID_MODE is set to 0) and fill in the
appropriate parameters (Kc_Kp, Ti_Ki, Td_Kd, Tf, ALPHA and BETA) to data devices. You can also use
retentive devices to retain PID parameters.
7-26
Use PID parameters 7_

CR#
Operand Function Description Defaults
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8
1: the PID
algorithm is
implemented.
Enable the PID 0: the output value

600 630 660 690 720 750 780 810 PID_RUN 0
algorithm (MV) is reset to
0, and the PID
algorithm is not
implemented.
7-27
CR#
601 631 661 691 721 751 781 811 SV SV Target value 0
0: automatic
control
When PID_MAN
is switched from
1 to 0, the
output value
(MV) is included
in the automatic
algorithm.
1: the parameters
are tuned
PID control automatically for
602 632 662 692 722 752 782 812 PID_MODE 0
mode the temperature
control. When
the tuning is
complete, the
device is
automatically
reset to 0, and
the parameters
_7
Kc_Kp, Ti_Ki,
Td_Kd, and Tf
are set
appropriately.
0: auto; the MV is
output based
on the PID
PID A/M algorithm.

603 633 663 693 723 753 783 813 PID_MAN 0
mode 1: manual; the MV
is output based
on the MOUT.
When
7-28
CR#
PID_MODE is
also set to 1,
this setting is
ineffective.
0: normal; the
MOUT does not

MOUT
vary with the
automatic
604 634 664 694 724 754 784 814 MOUT_AUTO MV. 0
change
1: auto; the MOUT
mode
varies with the
MV.
Range: 0–32000,
Auto tuning used when SV is

605 635 665 695 725 755 785 815 Auto DBWA non-action in the ±dead band 0
zone in auto tuning
mode.
Kc_Kp are
floating-point
numbers. If the P
Calculated
coefficient is less
proportional
606 636 666 696 726 756 786 816
Kc_Kp than 0, the Kc_Kp 3.846
607 637 667 697 727 757 787 817 coefficient
is 0. 7_
(Kc or Kp)
Independently, if
Kc_Kp is 0, it is
not controlled by P.
Ti_Ki are floating-
point numbers. If
Integral the calculated
608 638 668 698 728 758 788 818 coefficient
Ti_Ki coefficient I is less 0.013
609 639 669 699 729 759 789 819
(Ti or Ki) than 0, Ti_Ki is 0.
If Ti_Ki is 0, it is
not controlled by I.
610 640 670 700 730 760 790 820 Derivative Td_Kd are
Td_Kd 190.078
611 641 671 701 731 761 791 821 coefficient floating-point
7-29
CR#
(Td or Kd) numbers. If the
calculated
coefficient D is
less than 0, Td_Kd
is 0. If Ti_Ki is 0, it
is not controlled by
D.
If the derivate-
action time
constant is less
612 642 672 702 732 762 792 822 Derivate-action than 0, Tf is 0 and
Tf 4.941
613 643 673 703 733 763 793 823 time constant it is not controlled
by the derivate-
action time
constant.
0: independent
PID formula formula

614 644 674 704 734 764 794 824 PID_EQ 0
types 1: dependent
formula
0: use the
variations in the
_7 error (E) to
calculate the
control value of
The the derivative
calculation of (derivative of
615 645 675 705 735 765 795 825 PID_DE the PID E). 0
derivative 1: use the

error variations in the
PV to calculate
the control
value of the
derivative
(derivative of
7-30
CR#
PV).
0: heating action
PID forward/
(E=SV-PV)
616 646 676 706 736 766 796 826 PID_DIR reverse 0
1: cooling action
direction
(E=PV-SV）
The error value (E)
is the difference
between the SV
and the PV. When
this setting is 0,
the function is not
enabled. When
this setting is
enabled, the CPU
module checks
whether the
present difference
is less than the

Range within
absolute value of
which the
617 647 677 707 737 767 797 827 ERR_DBW ERR_DBW, and it 0
error value is
checks whether
counted as 0 7_
the present
difference meets
the cross status
condition. If the
present difference
is less than the
absolute value of
ERR_DBW and it
meets the cross
status condition,
the present error is
counted as 0, and
the PID algorithm
7-31
CR#
is implemented.
Otherwise the
present error is
brought into the
PID algorithm
normally.
618 648 678 708 738 768 798 828 α value Integral sum Range: 0–100 31
619 649 679 709 739 769 799 829 β value Integral sum Unit: 0.01 0
When PID_MAN is
set to 1, the MV
value is output as
Manual this manual MOUT
620 650 680 710 740 770 800 830 MOUT output value value, between 0
(MOUT) MV_MAX and
MV_MIN.
Range: 0–1000
(0%–100%)
Feedforward
Feedforward output value, used

621 651 681 711 741 771 801 831 BIAS 0
output value for the PID
feedforward
_7
A floating-point
Output value number

622 652 682 712 742 772 802 832
MV --
623 653 683 713 743 773 803 833 (MV) Range: 0–100
Unit: %
Floating-point
format.
The accumulated
624 654 684 714 744 774 804 834 Accumulated integral value is
I_MV --
625 655 685 715 745 775 805 835 integral value temporarily stored
for reference.
When the MV is
out of the range
7-32
CR#
0%–100%, the
accumulated
integral value in
I_MV is
unchanged.
When this
instruction is read,
the PID algorithm
is implemented
according to the
sampling time, and
Sampling the MV is
626 656 686 716 746 776 806 836 CYCLE 1
time (TS) refreshed.
If TS is less than 1,
it is read as 1. If TS
is larger than
1,000, it is read as
1,000.
Unit: 100 ms
Note: When using PID parameters to set up control registers: PID control registers of AS04TC-A and RTD-A
are retainable; however PID control registers of AS06RTD-A and AS08TC-A are not retainable.
PID formula: 7_
1. When the PID_MODE is set to 0, the mode is set to auto:
 Independent Formula & Derivative of E（PID_EQ=False & PID_DE=False）

t
dE
MV = K P E + Ki ∫ Edt + K d * + BIAS (E = SV – PV or E = PV – SV)
0
dt
 Independent Formula & Derivative of PV（PID_EQ=False & PID_DE=True）
t
dPV
MV = K P E + Ki ∫ Edt − K d * + BIAS (E = SV – PV)
0
dt
Or
t
dPV (E =PV – SV)
MV = K P E + Ki ∫ Edt + K d * + BIAS
0
dt
7-33
 Dependent Formula & Derivative of E（PID_EQ=True & PID_DE=False）

 1
t
dE 
MV = K c  E + ∫ Edt + Td *  + BIAS (E = SV – PV or E = PV – SV)
 Ti 0 dt 
 Dependent Formula & Derivative of PV（PID_EQ=True & PID_DE=True）

 1
t
dE 
MV = K c  E + ∫ Edt − Td *  + BIAS (E = SV – PV)
 Ti 0 dt 
Or
 1
t
dE 
MV = K c  E + ∫ Edt + Td *  + BIAS (E = PV – SV)
 Ti 0 dt 
2. When you set the PID_MODE to 1, auto tuning mode is enabled. When auto tuning is complete, the value
becomes 0 and switches off the auto tuning mode automatically.
PID Control Block Diagram:
PID Block Diagram (Independent)

PID_D IR
E
+ 1
SV + DEAD BAND
-
PV REVERSE
0
X(-1)
ERR_DBW
Kc_Kp
PID-P
>0 PID_MAN
BIAS
+ 0
<=0 +
0 +
Kc_Kp MV_LIMIT
1
_7
MV
Ti_Ki
PID-I
>0
MV_MAX, MV_MIN
+
<=0 +
0 +
Ti_Ki MOUT_AUTO
+ MOUT
0
Td_Kd MOUT
PID-D PID_MAN
>0 1
0
<=0
0 1
Td_Kd, Tf MOUT
7-34
PID Block Diagram (Dependent)

PID_D IR
E
+ 1
SV + DEAD BAND PID-P
-
REVERSE
PV 0
X(-1)
Kc_Kp
ERR_DBW Kc_Kp
>0
<=0
0
PID_MAN
BIAS
+ 0
+
+
MV_LIMIT
1
Ti_Ki MV
PID-I
>0
MV_MAX, M V_MIN
<=0
0
Ti_Ki MOUT_AUTO
MOUT
0
Td_Kd MOUT PID_MAN
PID-D
>0 1
0
<=0
0 1
Td_Kd, Tf MOUT
ERR_DBW
When the PV (present value) is in the range of ERR_DBW, at the beginning, the present error is brought
into the PID algorithm according to the normal processing, and then the CPU module checks whether the
present error meets the cross status condition: PV (present value) goes beyond the SV (target value).
Once the condition is met, the present error is counted as 0 when applying the PID algorithm. After the PV
(present value) is out of the ERR_DBW range, the present error is brought into the PID algorithm again. If
PID_DE is true, that means it uses the variations in the PV to calculate the control value of the derivative,
and after the cross status condition is met, the PLC treats Δ PV as 0 to apply the PID algorithm. (Δ PV=
current PV – previous PV). In the following example, the present error is brought into the PID algorithm
7_
according to the normal processing in section A ,and the present error or Δ PV is counted as 0 to apply
the PID algorithm in the section B.
7-35
α、β Value
To reduce overshoot, you can use parameters of ALPHA or BETA in the beginning of the PID
operation or while SV (target value) varies to compensate initial value of integral calculus (for
heating up or cooling down). See the images below. Use ALPHA parameter to reduce overshoot while the
temperature is climbing up. Use BETA parameter to reduce overshoot while the temperature is dropping.
0
Tem perature ( C)
Tim e
0
Temperature ( C)
_7
Time
7-36
Formula of the output cycle:
 Output cycle width = MV (%) x output cycle
Execute the general pulse with modulation instruction (GPWM) to set output cycle width and output cycle
sampling time to manage the cycle.
Example:
If the output cycle is 2000 ms, then the output value is 50% after the PID algorithm is implemented.
 Output cycle width = 50% × 2000 ms = 1000 ms
In other words, the GWPM instruction can be set to output cycle width = 1000 and output cycle = 2000.
t =10 0 0 ms
Ou tp u t Y 1 0
T =2 00 0 ms
Note:
1. When tuning the parameters Kc_Kp, Ti_Ki, and Td_Kd (PID_MODE=0), set the Kc_Kp value first, and
then set the Ti_Ki and Td_Kd values to 0. In a controlled environment, you can increase the values of
Ti_Ki (from smaller to bigger) and Td_Kd (from bigger to smaller). When the value of Kc_Kp is 1, the
proportional gain is 100%. That is, the error values increase by a factor of one. When the proportional
gain is less than 100%, the error values decrease. When the proportional gain is greater than 100%, the
error values increase.
7_
2. The parameters which have been automatically tuned are not necessarily suitable for every controlled
environment. You can, therefore, further modify the automatically-tuned parameters, but it is
recommended that you only modify the values of Ti_Ki or Td_Kd.
3. The operand CYCLE is to set the sampling time to use the PID algorithm and refresh MV.
4. When the number of the channel for measurement is changed, the time to refresh the
measured value also changes. For example, the measured value is refreshed every 200 ms
when there is only 1 channel for measurement. The measured value is refreshed every 800 ms
when there are 4 channels for measurement. The Kc_Kp, Ti_Ki, Td_Kd parameters may differ
when the number of channel for measure is different.
7-37
7.2.8 Wiring
 Precautions
ASTC-A Series must be separate cables.
(2) Do not install the cable near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load
which is not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable,
or a cable connected to a load which is not a PLC.

(5) Note1: do not wire empty terminals.

(6) Note2: only use copper conducting wires with a temperature rating of 60/75°C and the length must
be less than 50 m.
(7) Note3: TC modules must run for 30 minutes before they start to take any temperature measurement.
 External wiring
J,K,R,S,T,E,N, B
CH 1
+ I 1+
- I1 -
A DC
SLD INA
_7 Shielded cable* 1
- 1 0 0 mV ~1 0 0m V CH3
+
I3 +
-
I3 - C old - junction
SL D c ompensation
*1. Use shielded twisted pair cables for Type J, type K, type R, type S, type T, type E, type N
and type B thermocouples, and keep them separate from power cables and other cables
which generate noise.
7-38

2

The following uses AS04TC-A as an example to demonstrate.
7_
7-39
_7
7-40
7_
7-41

_7
7-42
7.3.3 Online Mode

7_
7-43

(1) Click Export in the Device Setting dialog box to save the current parameters as a CSV file (.csv).
_7
7-44
(2) Click Import in the Device Setting dialog box, and select a CSV file to import saved parameters.
7.3.5 Parameters
7_
7-45
(2) Input CH1–CH4 (channel 1–channel 4) mode settings
(3) Input CH1-CH4 calibration
_7
7-46
(5) Temperature measurement
7_
7-47
(6) Input channel detect and alarm settings
_7
7-48

The following example uses AS04TC-A.

(2) Add modules in:
section.
7_
7-49
(3) Select modules:
_7
7-50
modules.
7_
7-51

_7
7-52
7.4.3 Online Mode

7_
7-53
7.4.4 Parameters
_7
7-54
(5) You can set up the temperature measurement units Channel 1 to 4.
7_
7-55
7.5 Troubleshooting
7.5.1 Error Codes

Description

16#1808

16#1809

16#180A

16#180B
Blinking
16#180C

16#180D
_7
16#180E

16#180F
Blinking once
or twice and
after 2
seconds, it
blinks
repeatedly
7-56

Internal error








Check the signal received by channel 8. 7_
7-57
MEMO
_7
7-58
8
Chapter 8 Load Cell Module AS02LC
Table of Contents
8.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Specifications .................................................................................... 8-2

8.2.1 Specifications ............................................................................... 8-2
8.2.2 Profile ......................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.4 Control Registers .......................................................................... 8-5
8.2.5 Functions ................................................................................... 8-12
8.2.6 Wiring ....................................................................................... 8-17
8.3 Making Adjustments ........................................................................ 8-19

8.3.1 Steps to adjust points .................................................................. 8-19
8.3.2 Adjustment settings / LC Wizard ................................................... 8-20
8.3.3 Adjustment Settings / Calibrational Commands ............................... 8-24
8.3.4 LED Indicators ............................................................................ 8-27

8.4.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 8-27
8.4.3 Online Mode ............................................................................... 8-31
8.4.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................ 8-32
8.4.5 Parameters ................................................................................ 8-33

8.5.1 Error Codes ................................................................................ 8-35
8-1
8.1 Overview
This chapter describes the specifications for load cell modules, their operation, and their programming. You
can use the AS02LC load cell module with four-wire or six-wire load cells with various eigenvalues, so you
can adjust its response time according to your requirements. In addition, the AS02LC-A can read and write
data via the AS Series PLC units using the FROM/TO instructions. To ensure that the product is correctly
installed and operated, read the manual carefully before use. This manual provides functional specifications,
and it also introduces installation, basic operation, and settings. Refer to load cell related literature for more
details on the principles of operating load cells.
8.2 Specifications
Load Cell Module Voltage Output
Rated Supply Voltage/Power
24 VDC (-15% to +20%)/5 W
Consumption
Minimum/Maximum Voltage 18–31.2 VDC
Maximum Current Consumption 150 mA
Input Signal Range ±40 mVDC
Sensibility +5 VDC +/-10%
Highest Accuracy 0.04 % of full scale
Communication Interface RS-232, RS-485
Applicable Sensor Type 4-wire or 6-wire load cell
Expanding a Temperature
≤ ±50 ppm/K v. E
Coefficient
Reducing a Temperature
≤ ±0.4 μV/K
Coefficient to Zero
Linearity Error ≤0.02%
Response Time 2.5, 10, 16, 20, 50, 60, 100, 200, and 400 ms
Eigenvalue Applicable to a Load
0–1, 0–2, 0–4, 0–6, 0–20, 0–40 and 0–80 mV/V
Cell
Maximum Distance for
100 meters
Connecting a Load Cell
_8 Maximum Output Current 5 VDC x 160 mA
Allowable Load 40–4010 Ω
Common-mode Rejection Ratio
≥100 dB
(CMRR @50/60 Hz)
Dynamic Filter K1–K5
Average Weights K1–K100
Between a digital circuit and the ground: 500 VAC
Isolation Between an analog circuit and the ground: 500 VAC
Between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VAC
8-2
Ch ap te r 8 Lo ad Ce ll Mo du le AS02 LC
8.2.2 Profile
38.2 95
02LC 1
7
7
EX C+ EX C -
SI G+ SI G -
2
CH1
SE N+ SE N-
98.3
88
3
SL D
EX C+ EX C-
SI G+ SI G-
8
CH2
SE N+ SE N-
SL D
4
2 4V
0V
9
5
6 75
35
Unit: mm

2
Conversion Blinking: conversion is in process.
Removable The inputs are connected to transducers.

3
Terminal Block The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
8_
Arrangement of the
4 Input/Output Arrangement of the terminals
Terminals
Module Connecting Connects the modules

7
Set
8 Ground Clip
8-3

AS02LC-A
02LC
EX C+ EX C -
SI G+ SI G -
C H1
SE N+ SE N-
SL D
EX C+ EX C-
SI G+ SI G-
C H2
SE N+ SE N-
SL D
2 4V
0V
_8
8-4

CR# Name Description Att. Default
0: disabled
Display options for 1: gross weight

0 R/W 1
CH1 2: net weight
3: raw data
0: 1 mV/V
1: 2 mV/V
2: 4 mV/V
1 Eigenvalue for CH1 3: 6 mV/V R/W 1
4: 20 mV/V
5: 40 mV/V
6: 80 mV/V
0: 2.5ms
1: 10ms
2: 16ms
3: 20ms
2 Sampling cycle for CH1 4: 50ms R/W 4
5: 60ms
6: 100ms
7: 200ms
8: 400ms
8_
Weight measured times in a
3 Range: K1–K500 R/W 5
stability range for CH1
4 Floating-point format
Stability range for CH1 R/W 10
5 Range: 0–100000
Floating-point format
6 Maximum weight for CH1 R/W 100,000
Maximum measuring weight; when the
8-5
weight measured exceeds the limit, an
7 alarm is triggered. The value should be
greater than 1.
0: no filter (default)
8 Filter mode for CH1 1: maximum filter mode R/W 0
2: average filter mode
Range: 0–8; the bigger the number the

9 Maximum filter for CH1 R/W 1
stronger the filter
Average weight measured Range: 1–100

10 R/W 10
times for CH1 (for FW V1.04: 1–400 is available)
Upper limit of the zero return
Determines the current weight as the zero R/W 10
for CH1
12
point in the upper/lower range; when the
13 lower range is larger than the upper range,

Lower limit of the zero return
the lower range is read as the upper range R/W -10
for CH1
14 and vice versa.
Zero point tracking time for Range: 5–500

15 R/W 10
CH1 Unit: 100 ms
16 Zero point tracking range for Floating-point format

R/W 0
17 CH1 Range: 0–10000; 0: disabled
18 Calibration points for CH1 Range: 2–20 R/W 2
19–58 Calibrated weight for CH1 Calibrated weight of the calibration points R/W -
_8 1–20
0: disabled
1: gross weight
59 Display options for CH2 R/W 1
2: net weight
3: raw data
0：1 mV/V
60 Eigenvalue for CH2 1：2 mV/V R/W 1
2：4 mV/V
8-6
3：6 mV/V
4：20 mV/V
5：40 mV/V
6：80 mV/V
0：2.5 ms
1：10 ms
2：16 ms
3：20 ms
61 Sampling cycle for CH2 4：50 ms R/W 4
5：60 ms
6：100 ms
7：200 ms
8：400 ms
Weight measured times in a

62 Range: K1–K500 R/W 5
stability range for CH2
Stability range for CH2 R/W 10
64 Range: 0–100000
65
Maximum measuring weight; when the
Maximum weight for CH2 weight measured exceeds the limit, an R/W 100,000
alarm is triggered. The value should be

66
greater than 1.
0: no filter (default)
67 Filter mode for CH2 1: maximum filter mode R/W 0
2: average filter mode

8_
Range: 0–8; the bigger the number the
68 Maximum filter for CH2 R/W 1
stronger the filter
Average weight measured Range: 1–100

69 R/W 10
times for CH2 (for FW V1.04: 1–400 is available)
70 Upper limit of the zero return Floating-point format

R/W 10
71 for CH2
Determines the current weight as the zero
72 Lower limit of the zero return point in the upper/lower range; when the
R/W -10
73 for CH2 lower range is larger than the upper range,
8-7
the lower range is read as the upper range
and vice versa.
Zero point tracking time for Range: 5–500

74 R/W 10
CH2 Unit: 100 ms
75 Zero point tracking range for Floating-point format

R/W 0
76 CH2 Range: 0–10000; 0: disabled
77 Calibration points for CH2 Range: 2–20 R/W 2
78–117 Calibrated weight for CH2 Calibrated weight of the calibration points R/W -
1–20
118 Decimal place for CH1 Range: 0–4 R/W 1
119 Decimal place for CH2 Range: 0–4 R/W 1
0: warning
1: alarm
120 Alarm Bit0: error in the power supply R/W 1
Bit1: error in the module hardware
Bit2: error in the driver board
200 State register Refer to the explanation below. R/W -
201 Command set Refer to the explanation below. W 0
210 The maximum peak value for Floating-point format -

R
211 CH1 Maximum peak value for CH1 -
212 The maximum peak value for Floating-point format -

R
213 CH2 Maximum peak value for CH2 -
214 The minimum peak value for Floating-point format -

R
_8 215 CH1 Minimum peak value for CH1 -
216 The minimum peak value for Floating-point format -

R
217 CH2 Minimum peak value for CH2 -
222 The time to record for CH1 Unit: 1 ms 50
Range: 1–100 (1 ms–1 s)

R/W
223 The time to record for CH2 Time to record the digital value for the 50
channels
240 The number of records for CH1 Range: 0–500; display the current records R -
8-8
241 The number of records for CH2 -
604 -
Tare weight measured by CH1 Display the tare weight measured by CH1 R/W
605 -
606 -
Tare weight measured by CH2 Display the tare weight measured by CH2 R/W
607 -
700– Floating-point format

Theoretical calibration for CH1 R/W 0
739 Output voltage unit: mV
740– Floating-point format

Theoretical calibration for CH2 R/W 0
779 Output voltage unit: mV

Records for CH1 R -
–4999 500 records for CH1

Records for CH2 R -
–5999 500 records for CH2
Normal Exchange Area
Explanation
You can view the error code, the channel value, and the state code, as well as the data registers that
correspond to their commands under the Normal Exchange Area tab of the Device Setting dialog box in the
HWCONFIG utility in ISPSoft.
8_
8-9
C R # 2 0 0 : Codes for the state register
Explanation
Bit Code Definition Bit Code Definition
b0 16#0001 Error exists in the power supply. b1 16#0002 Error exists in the module hardware.
b2 16#0004 Error exists in the driver board. b3 16#0008 Calibration disabled
b4 16#0010 Reserved b5 16#0020 Reserved
The weight measured by CH1 The weight measured by CH2
exceeds the maximum weight that exceeds the maximum weight that
b6 16#0040 b7 16#0080
can be measured, or the voltage of can be measured, or the voltage of
SEN is incorrect. SEN is incorrect.
The weight measured by CH1 The weight measured by CH2

b8 16#0100 exceeds the maximum weight that b9 16#0200 exceeds the maximum weight that
can be measured. can be measured.
b10 16#0400 CH1 has been adjusted incorrectly. b11 16#0800 CH2 has been adjusted incorrectly.
b12 16#1000 CH1 is not measuring any weight. b13 16#2000 CH2 is not measuring any weight.
The weight measured by CH1 is in The weight measured by CH2 is in

b14 16#4000 b15 16#8000
the stability range specified. the stability range specified.
Note: The state is determined by the corresponding bit and it is possible to have more than 2 states at the
same time.
C R # 2 0 1 : Command set
Explanation
Input
Description Input value Description
value
_8
Start a new recording of the peak value
0 No action 16#0101
for CH1.
Commands for calibrating the calibration Start a new recording of the peak value
1–20 16#0102
points 1–20 on CH1 for CH2.
Commands for calibrating the calibration Start a new recording of the peak value
21–40 16#010F
points 1–20 on CH2 for CH1 - CH2.
98 Activate the weight calibration. 16#0201 Start a new recording for CH1.
99 Deactivate the weight calibration. 16#0202 Start a new recording for CH2.
8-10
Input
Description Input value Description
value
Subtract the weight on CH1. Use the
subtracted weight as the tare weight

100 16#020F Start a new recording for CH1 - CH2.
and store it in CR604 and CR605
(DWORD).
Restore the tare weight stored in CR604

101 16#0211 Stop recording for CH1.
and CR605 to CH1.
Clear the weight measured by CH1 to
102 zero. You might need to execute this 16#0212 Stop recording for CH2.
command after each power-off.
Subtract the weight on CH2. Use the
subtracted weight as the tare weight

103 16#021F Stop recording for CH1 - CH2.
and store it in CR606 and CR607
(DWORD).
Restore the tare weight stored in CR606

104 16#0301 Start a theoretical calibration for CH1.
and CR607 to CH2.
Clear the weight measured by CH2 to
105 zero. You might need to execute this 16#0302 Start a theoretical calibration for CH2.
command after each power-off.
Start a theoretical calibration for CH1 - Restore default settings and clear
16#030F 16#0501
CH2. settings in Flash.
Restore default settings and settings in

16#0502 16#6000 Read the current settings from Flash
Flash stay intact.
16#6001 Write the current settings into Flash
8_
8 - 11
8.2.5 Functions
1 Measuring net weight Various measuring modes to choose from
When an object is put on a load cell, you can check whether the present
2 Stability check
weight of the object is in a specified stability range.
3 Determining zero point If an object is removed from the load cell, no weight is measured.
Filter out the maximum or minimum weight measured or use an average

4 Filter out weights
weight for a more accurate value.
5 Multi-point adjustment There are as many as 20 points for adjustment
Calibration based on the output value of the sensor instead of the real weight
6 Theoretical calibration
calibration
7 Zero point tracking Zero point tracking
Limit detections for

8 Save the maximum and minimum values for channels.
channels
9 Records for channels Save the analog curves for channels.
1. Measuring net weight
You can choose to measure either the net weight or the gross weight of an object. Net weight is the actual
weight of a product without its package. The weight of a package is the tare weight. Gross weight is the total
weight: net weight plus tare weight.
 Tare weight: the weight of a package
 Net weight: the weight of a product, that is, the actual weight of a product without its package
 Gross weight: the total weight, that is, the net weight of a product plus the tare weight of its package
_8
 Gross weight=Net weight+Tare weight
Example: a product weighs 10 kg, and the carton in which the product is packed weighs 0.2 kg. The
gross weight is 10.2 kg.
Net weight = 10 kg
Tare weight = 0.2 kg
Gross weight = 10.2 kg
8-12
2. Checking stability
When an object is placed on a load cell, you can check whether the present weight of the object is in a
specified stability range.
 If the weight measured is in the specified stability range, the corresponding bit is set to 1.
 If the weight measured exceeds the specified stability range, the corresponding bit is set to 0 until the
number of objects weighed in the stability range reaches the setting.
Example: the measurement time set is 10 ms, the number of weights measured in a stability range is 10, and
the stability range is 1000 g. If a variation exceeds 1000 g, the corresponding bit is set to 0. If the variations
within 100 ms (10×10 ms) are within 1000 g, the corresponding bit is set to 1. You should determine whether
the present weight measured is in the stability range before you perform control actions.
△ : Va ri a ti on s in a ve ra g e we ig h ts
t
t: Me a su r em en t tim e se t by use rs
k
k: Sta b il i ty ra ng e se t by use r s
m <k
< kk △< k
m: Num be r o f we i gh ts me a su re d i n <kk
△<
△<
a sta bi l ity ra n g e >k
△> k
A ve r ag e we i gh t >k
△> k
>k
△> k
△> k
>k
△> k
>k
△> k
△
△> k
>k
T ime
B it in th e sta b il it y ran g e t m
b it
3. Determining zero point
If an object is removed from the load cell, the corresponding bit is set to 1, and you can perform the next 8_
control action. If a weight measured is in the specified zero range, the corresponding bit is also set to 1.
No o b je ct
Ch 1
L oa d ce ll
CH 2
8-13
Average weight
Zero range
Time
Zero weight
4. Filtering out weights
There are two ways to filter out weights.
 Filtering out the maximum/minimum weight measured: If there is a maximum weight or a minimum
weight, you can filter out the maximum weight or the minimum weight. The larger the value, the more
weights are filtered out. Range: K0–K8
 Averaging weights: The values recorded are averaged so that a steady value is obtained. There may be
peak values due to unavoidable external factors, and the average value obtained may change
accordingly. A maximum of 100 values can be averaged.
5. Making multi-point adjustments
Make adjustments to get the weight measured by a cell to correspond to the digital value displayed by the
load cell module. Generally, two points are adjusted. After a system is set up, put no load on the scale. The
weight measured is 0 grams when there is no load. Then place an object of a given weight on the scale, and
set a digital value corresponding to the weight. At that point, two points have been adjusted. For example, if
you have a load cell sensor which can measure a maximum weight of 10 kg, and if 1 kg corresponds to
K1000, the curve is like the one shown below.
Weight
10 kg
_8
Point
1 kg
Digital value
K0 K1000 K10000 (LSB)
Adjusting two points
8-14
In addition to this two-point adjustment, the load cell also supports adjustments of up to 20 points. A
characteristic curve is shown below.
Weight
Point 5
10 kg
Point 3
Point 4
Point 1
1 kg
Point 2
Digital value
K0 K1000 K10000 (LSB)
Adjusting multiple points
6. Determining theoretical calibration
Theoretical calibration is determined according to the sensor specification in order to input the voltage values
corresponding to various weights. The registers for storing the voltage values are CR#700–739 for CH1 and
CR#740–779 for CH2. After entering the voltage values into the registers, you can use the command set
16#301–302 to execute the calibration.
Example: the sensor specification is 10 kg and its eigenvalue is 2 mV/V. When the sensor is loaded with a 10
kg weight, the output is 10 mV. The theoretical calibration steps are:
Step 1: set the eigenvalue.
Step 2: set the 2-point adjustment; when the sensor is loaded with a 1 kg weight, set the value to 1000.
8_
Step 3: set the voltage calibration for the zero point to 0 (0 mV) in the CR#700/701 registers, and to 1.0 (1
mV) in the CR702/703 registers.
Step 4: enable the calibration function and enter 98 into the command set CR#201.
8-15
Step 5: enter 16#0301 into the command set CR#201 to execute a theoretical calibration for channels 1.
Step 6: do not put any load on the sensor and enter 16#102 into the command set CR#201 to reset the value
to 0 for CH1.
Step 7: disable the calibration function to prevent inappropriate changes. To complete the theoretical
calibration, enter 99 into the command set CR#201. Put a 1 kg weight on the sensor and the load cell should
show 1000.
Weight
Point
D igita l v alue
2 -point a djustme nt
Step 8: write 16#6001 in CR#201 to disable the calibration function to write the current settings into Flash and
have the settings in the latched area.
7. Zero point tracking
Zero point tracking refers to resetting the current value to 0. You can reset the value to 0 within a certain
duration or at a certain weight. This is especially useful when the sensor is no longer as accurate as it was
before.
Save the maximum and minimum values for channels so you can determine the peak to peak values.
_8
Maximum valu e
Mini mu m va lue
Time
8-16
9. Recording channels
Record the input values of the cyclic sampling for each channel. The system saves up to 500 data points and
the recording time is 10 ms.
Ti me
8.2.6 Wiring
 External wiring
EX C+ A+5V
EX C- AGND
F our -wir e
SIG+
SIG-
CH 1
SE N+
SE N-
EX C+ A+5V
Six- wire EX C- AGND
SIG+
SIG-
CH 2
SE N+
SE N-
Connected to
on a power supply m odule *1 A+5V
System 0V DC/DC
ground 24V conver ter
AGND 8_
T hir d gr ound
( Im pedance: Less than 100 )
8-17
 Multiple load cells connected in parallel are connected to a single load cell module.
Lo ad c ell
Lo ad c ell
Lo ad c ell
CH1
Lo ad c ell
Lo ad c ell
CH2
Lo ad c ell
Lo ad c ell
Loa d ce ll
Note 1: Please connect on the power supply module and on the load cell module to a system
ground, and then ground the system ground or connect the system ground to a distribution box.
Note 2: If multiple load cells are connected in parallel, the total impedance should be greater than 40 Ω.
_8
8-18
8.3 Making Adjustments

Make adjustments to get the weight measured by a cell to correspond to the digital value displayed by the
load cell module. You can make adjustments by following the commands below or by setting up the
theoretical calibration (refer to section 8.2.5 for more details).
8.3.1 Steps to adjust points
En tering adjust ment
Sett ing th e to tal numb er of

points which need to be
adjust ed
No weight
Writing an adjus tmen t en abled

ins truc tion
YES
Writing an ad ju st ment enabled A djust ing th e nex t point
ins truc tion
NO
Writing an ad ju stme nt dis abled

ins truc tion
The adjust ment is c omplet e.
8_
8-19
8.3.2 Adjustment settings / LC Wizard

Step 1: set the eigenvalue in the HWCONFIG utility in ISPSoft.
Step 2: set the number of adjustments and their corresponding values. The example below shows a 2-point
adjustment in which point 1 = 0 and point 2 = 1000, corresponding to 1 kg.
_8
8-20
Step 3: after the configuration is complete, download the parameters to the module.
Step 4: right click the module and then click on LC Wizard to open the LC Wizard.
8_
8-21
Step 5: make sure the channel and the adjusted points displayed are the same as you have set.
Step 6: put no load on the load cell (adjustment point 1) and click Next to proceed.
_8
8-22
Step 7: Put a load on the load cell (adjustment point 2). For multi-point adjustment, repeat this step. This
example uses a 1 kg weight.
Step 8: the calibration is complete.
A characteristic curve is shown below.
Weig ht 8_
1 0 kg
Po int
1 kg
Dig ita l val ue

0 1 000 1 000 0
Ad ju sti ng two p oi nts
8-23
8.3.3 Adjustment Settings / Calibrational Commands

Step 1: set the eigenvalue in the HWCONFIG utility in ISPSoft.
Step 2: set the number of adjustments and their corresponding values. The example below shows a 2-point
adjustment where point 1 = 0 and point 2 = 1000, corresponding to 1 kg.
_8
8-24
Step 3: after the configuration is complete, download the parameters to the module.
Step 4: verify that the corresponding address the command is D28007 in the Normal Exchange Area.
8_
8-25
Step 5: enter the command for activating the weight calibration 98 into D28007.
Step 6: put no load on the load cell (adjustment point 1) and enter 1 into D28007. 1 represents CH1 and 2
represents CH2.
Step 7: put a load on the load cell (adjustment point 2). For multi-point adjustment, repeat this step. This
example uses a 1 kg weight.
Step 8: to complete the adjustment, enter the command for deactivating the weight calibration 99 into
D28007.
A characteristic curve is shown below.
_8 Weig ht
1 0 kg
Po int
1 kg
Dig ita l val ue

0 1 000 1 000 0
Ad ju sti ng two p oi nts
8-26

2

8_
8-27
_8
8-28
parameters while the CPU module is running.)
8_
8-29

_8
8-30
8.4.3 Online Mode

8_
8-31

_8
8-32
8.4.5 Parameters
(1) Settings for CH1
(2) Adjustment for CH1
8_
8-33
(3) Settings for CH2
(4) Adjustment for CH2
_8
8-34
(5) Alarm settings
8.5 Troubleshooting
8.5.1 Error Codes

Description
16#1807 The driver board is abnormal. OFF Blinking
The weight measured by CH1 exceeds the maximum weight that

16#1808
can be measured, or the voltage of SEN is incorrect.
8_
16#1809
can be measured.
16#180A CH1 is adjusted incorrectly. Run: blinking

Blinking
The weight measured by CH2 exceeds the maximum weight that Stop: OFF
16#180B
can be measured, or the voltage of SEN is incorrect.

16#180C
can be measured.
16#180D CH2 is adjusted incorrectly.
8-35

Description
Blinking once
or twice and
after 2
seconds, it
blinks
repeatedly
The external voltage is abnormal. Ensure the power supply is functioning correctly.
The driver board is abnormal. Return the module to the factory for repair.
The weight measured by CH1 exceeds the
maximum weight that can be measured, or the Check the signal received by CH1 and its wiring.
voltage of SEN is incorrect.
The weight measured by CH1 exceeds the Check the parameters of the related weight values for
maximum weight that can be measured. CH1.
Check the adjusted weight value and the adjustment

CH1 is adjusted incorrectly.
steps for CH1.
The weight measured by CH2 exceeds the
maximum weight that can be measured, or the Check the signal received by CH2 and its wiring.
voltage of SEN is incorrect.
The weight measured by CH2 exceeds the Check the parameters of the related weight values for
_8 maximum weight that can be measured. CH2.
Check the adjusted weight value and the adjustment

CH2 is adjusted incorrectly.
steps for CH2.
8-36
9
Chapter 9 Serial Communication Module
AS00SCM
Table of Contents
9.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 9-2
9.2 Specification, Function and Wiring ...................................................... 9-3
9.2.1 The functional specifications ................................................................ 9-3
9.2.2 Dimensions and Profile ....................................................................... 9-4
9.2.3 Knob Functions .................................................................................. 9-5
9.2.4 Wiring .............................................................................................. 9-7
9.3 COM mode ........................................................................................... 9-9
9.3.1 Modbus ............................................................................................ 9-9
9.3.2 UD Link .......................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.3 CANopen Mode ................................................................................ 9-14
9.4 RTU Mode .......................................................................................... 9-16
9.4.1 CANopen Mode (AS-FCOPM) .............................................................. 9-16
9.4.2 EtherNet/IP Mode ............................................................................ 9-22
9.4.3 Remote Module Setting ..................................................................... 9-35
9.5 Normal Exchange Area ...................................................................... 9-37
9.6 Application ........................................................................................ 9-39
9.6.1 Modbus .......................................................................................... 9-39
9.6.2 UD Link .......................................................................................... 9-49
9.6.3 Remote IO Application (AS-FCOPM) .................................................... 9-65
9.6.4 Remote IO Application (AS-FEN02) ..................................................... 9-72
9.6.5 Remote IO Application (Multiple AS-FEN02) ......................................... 9-74
9.7 Error Codes ....................................................................................... 9-75
9.7.1 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM-A as a Communication Module ...... 9-76
9.7.2 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM-A as a Remote Module ................. 9-77
9.1 Introduction
Thank you for using the AS00SCM-A, a serial communication module. To ensure that your AS00SCM-A is installed
and operated correctly, read this manual carefully before using the module.
The AS00SCM-A is a serial communication module, supporting AS series communication extension modules as well
as the remote modules (RTU) and the following communication cards:
 Serial communication cards: AS-F232, AS-F422, and AS-F485 support Modbus and UD Link (user-defined
format).
 CANopen communication card AS-FCOPM supports CANopen DS301.
 Ethernet communication card AS-FEN02 supports EtherNet/IP Adapter.
 Ethernet communication card AS-FPEN02 supports PROFINET. Refer to Chapter 10 of AS Module Manual for
more information.
COM.
AS00SCMVe RTU
(serial communication
rsion (remote module mode)
extension module mode)
and
AS Remote
its CANopen CANopen
MODBUS Communication, EtherNet/IP PROFINET
supporting DS301 DS301
UD Link Delta Special Driver Adapter Device
functions (Slave) (Slave)
& AS Remote Mode
AS-
AS-F232 AF-FEN02
FPFN02
Card AS-F485 AS-FCOPM AS-FCOPM (V1.02 or
(V2.00 or
AS-F422 later)
later
Card Slot Card 1 / Card 2 Card 2 Card 2
V1.00 V - - - - -
V2.00 V V V - - -
V2.02 V V V V V -
V2.06 V V V V V V
When AS00SCM-A is used as a remote module, its right side supports AS Series IO modules.
 For firmware version V2.06 or later: when AS00SCM-A works with AS-FCOPM and acts as a remote module,
its right side supports AS04SIL-A. Refer to Chapter 13 of AS Module Manual for more information.
 For firmware version V2.06 or later: when AS00SCM-A works with AS-FPFN02 and acts as a remote module,
its right side supports all AS Series module types, except AS02LC-A.
When AS00SCM-A acts as a serial communication extension module, it should work with AS PLC CPU for
_9 configuration. Use ISPSoft to configure AS00SCM-A. You can download ISPSoft V3.09 or later versions from Delta’s
official website. If you use UD Link, configure it through SCMSoft, which is embedded in DCISoft. Download DCISoft
V1.20 or later from Delta’s official website. You can set up the EtherNet/IP via EIP Builder. Download EIP Builder
V1.07 or later from Delta’s official website.
9-2
Ch ap te r 9 Ser ia l C om mu nic a ti on Mod ul e AS00 SC M
9.2 Specification, Function and Wiring

9.2.1 The functional specifications
 RS-485/RS-422 communication interface
Item Specifications
Connector type 5- pin European-style terminal block, spring-clip connector
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 76800 115200 and
Transmission speed
230400 bps
Stop bit: 1 bit and 2 bits
Communication
Parity bit: none, an odd parity bit, and an even parity bit
format
Data bit: 7 bits and 8 bits
Communication Modbus ASCII/RTU
protocol UD Link
 CANopen communication interface
Item Specifications
Connector type RJ45*2
Transmission speed 10k, 20k, 50k, 125k, 250k, 500k, and 1000k bps
Communication AS remote mode (RTU mode)
protocol CANopen (firmware V2.00 or later)
 Ethernet communication interface
Item Specifications
Connector type RJ45*2
Transmission speed 10M, 100Mbps
Communication
EtherNet/IP (firmware V2.02 or later), PROFINET (firmware V2.06 or later)
protocol
 Electrical specifications
Item Specifications
Supply voltage 24 VDC
Electric energy
0.6 W
consumption
Weight Approximately 169 g
9_
9-3
9.2.2 Dimensions and Profile
SCM
1 PO WER
7 ER RO R
7
2 CA RD 1
CA RD 2
98 .3
ID 1
88
3
FOR M AT 1
4
8
ID 2
9
F OR MA T 2
5 C OM . RTU
6 75
10 56
Unit: mm

RUN LED Indicator (blue) ON: the module is running.
OFF: the module has low voltage or no power.
ON: there is a hardware error.
ERROR LED Indicator (red) OFF: the module is operating normally.
2
Blink: an error has occurred or occurs on the module; refer to section
9.7 for more information.
Function card 1 Indicator Blink: data is being transmitted to function card 1.
(orange) OFF: there is no data transmission to function card 1.
Function card 2 Indicator Blink: data is being transmitted to function card 2.
(orange) OFF: there is no data transmission to function card 2.
Knob for the Node ID and
3 2 sets, one for function card 1 and the other for function card 2
Format
Function Card 1 Slot COM Mode: for AS-F232, AS-F422, AS-F485
4 COM Mode: for AS-F232, AS-F422, AS-F485, AS-FCOPM
Function Card 2 Slot
RTU Mode: for AS-FCOPM, AS-FEN02, AS-FPFN02
COM Mode: serial communication extension mode
5 Knob for the Work Mode
RTU Mode: remote module mode
8 Ground Clip
9 Label Nameplate
_9 10 RTU Power Input Supplies power to the RTU module for RTU Mode only
9-4
9.2.3 Knob Functions

 Restore default settings: for all communication cards and work mode, you can cut the device power off and
turn the knobs to the position F, and resupply the power. The AS00SCM-A module restores back to default
setting once it is resupplied with power. This act does NOT affect the communication cards. Cut the power off
again and turn the knobs to set the new values and then resupply the power. After that the ASSCCM00-A is set
with new settings.
 Modbus communication (AS-F232/AS-F422/AS-F485): can be installed in Card 1 and Card 2 (in COM mode
only).
1. Use the knob to set the node ID1 and ID2; its setting range is 0x01–0x0F. You can use ISPSoft
(HWCONFIG) to set up the node ID, if the knob is turned to 0. Follow the descriptions shown on the
HWCONFIG for node ID setting range.
ID Setup (AS-F232/AS-F422/AS-F485) COM. RTU
ID1/ID2 Node ID Setup ID1/ID2 Node ID Setup

0 Use ISPSoft (HWCONFIG) 1-F Manual Setting
2. Modbus communication (AS-F232/AS-F422/AS-F485): can be installed in Card 1 and Card 2 (in COM
mode only). Use the Format Knob to set the communication mode. You can use ISPSoft (HWCONFIG) to set up
the communication mode, when the Format Knob is turned to 0. If you need to set the communication mode to
UD Link, you need to turn the Format Knob to 0. Refer to section 9.3.2 for more details.
Modbus (AS-F232/AS-F422/AS-F485) in COM mode

COM. RTU
Baud Baud
Format 1/ Data Stop ASCII/ Format 1/ Data Stop ASCII/
rate Parity rate Parity
Format 2 (bits) (bits) RTU Format 2 (bits) (bits) RTU
(bps) (bps)
0 Software setting 8 38400 8 None 2 RTU
1 9600 7 Even 1 ASCII 9 38400 8 None 1 RTU
2 9600 8 Even 1 RTU A 38400 7 Even 1 ASCII
3 9600 7 None 2 ASCII B 57600 8 None 1 ASCII
4 9600 8 None 1 RTU C 76800 8 None 1 RTU
5 19200 7 Even 1 ASCII D 115200 7 None 1 ASCII
6 19200 8 None 1 RTU E 115200 8 Even 1 RTU
7 19200 8 Odd 2 RTU F 115200 7 None 2 ASCII
 CANopen (AS-FCOPM): can only be installed in Card 2 for COM mode or RTU mode.
1. COM Mode (SCM mode): use the knob to set the node ID and its setting range is 0x01–0x0F. You can use
ISPSoft (HWCONFIG) to set up the node ID, when the knob is turned to 0. Follow the descriptions shown on
the HWCONFIG for node ID setting range. Thee setting varies according to different CANopen communication
mode; refer to section 9.4.1 for more details.
9_
ID Setup (AS-FCOPM in COM mode) COM. RTU
ID2 Node ID Setup ID2 Node ID Setup

0 Use ISPSoft (HWCONFIG) 1-F Manual Setting
9-5
2. COM and RTU Mode:
Refer to the following table and use FORMAT 2 knob to set up the communication. You can NOT use ISPSoft
(HWCONFIG) to set up the communication mode in this format.
CANopen (AS-FCOPM) in COM Mode and RTU Mode
FORMAT 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-F
Bit rates (bps) 10K 20K 50K 125K 250K 500K 1000K NA
Distance (m) 5000 2500 1000 500 250 100 25 NA
 EtherNet/IP (AS-FEN02): can only be installed in Card 2 for RTU mode.
When using the communication card AS-FEN02, you need to set ID1 and FORMAT1 to 0. The IP address can be
edited through knobs.
IP Address Setup (AS-FEN02) in RTU Mode

ID1 0
Format 1 0
ID2 0 F x161
Other combination
Format 2 0 F x160
IP Address Use ISPSoft IP Address
DHCP
Setup (HWCONFIG) 192.168.1.x，x=1~FE（1~254）
The parameters of AS-FEN02 are stored in AS300 PLC or AS00SCM-A. Thus you need to use the knobs to set up
the IP address for AS-FEN02 or use COMMGR or IP Setup tool to scan and check for the IP address of AS-FEN02.
Refer to section 9.4.2 for more information.
1. When both knobs ID2 and FORMAT 2 are set to 0, IP address is set through EIP Builder (ISPSoft ->
HWCONFIG).
 Open EIP Builder and add AS00SCM (RTU) + AS-FEN02 to your network. Double-click HWCONFIG to
set up.
 Open EIP Builder and select IP Setting Tool from the Tool on the tool bar to scan for the device IP
address for setup.
2. When both ID2 and FORMAT 2 are set to F, IP setting mode is in DHCP mode. After setting is complete, you
need to turn the power OFF and then ON to make sure the modules are sending DHCP requests. Check the
sticker on the AS-FEN02 communication card for the MAC address. After that open EIP Builder and select IP
Manager from the Tool on the tool bar and click Start the Server to set up the correspondences between MAC
address and IP address.
3. When either ID2 or FORMAT 2 is NOT 0 or F, IP address is set by knobs ID2 and FORMAT 2. Hexadecimal
format is used and ID2 corresponds to x161 and FORMAT 2 to x160. The possible IP address is 192.168.1.x,
x=1~FE (1~254).
_9
 PROFINET (AS-FPFN02): You can use the knob to restore back to default settings.
9-6
9.2.4 Wiring
9.2.4.1 AS00SCM-A Power Wiring

 COM mode: Serial communication extension mode
Turn the work mode to COM. Install the module on the right hand side of the AS Series CPU. To avoid problems, do
not use an external power supply for AS00SCM-A.
 RTU mode: Remote module mode
Turn the work mode to RTU. This module is equipped with an independent DC power connecter.
To ensure the serial communication module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise. Before
you install cables, follow the precautions below.
(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the DC cable and other power cables that are connected to the AS00SCM-
A must be separate cables. An independent power supply is recommended for the AS00SCM-A.
SCM AS Series IO
D C Power Supply
24VD C
Min 1.5A
0V 2 4V
Ground
Ground
24V
DC Power Supply
24VD C
0V
Ground
Ground
24V
DC Power Supply Ot her
24V D C devices
0V
Ground
(2) The 24 VDC cable should be twisted pair, and the shorter end should be connected to the module.
(3) The cable (110 VAC, 220 VAC, and 24 VDC) must not be installed near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable,
or a cable connected to a load that is not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a 9_
high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load that is not a PLC. All the cables should be wired at least
100 mm apart.
(4) Ground the power supply using a 14 AWG wire.
(5) Connect 20–14 AWG (1 mm) wires to the input/output terminals. Use only copper leads that can resist
temperatures above 60° C /75° C.
9-7
9.2.4.2 AS00SCM-A Communication Interface

 COM mode: Serial communication extension mode
This module comes with two function card slots, supporting AS-F232, AS-F422, and AS-F485 communication cards.
The Card 2 slot also supports the AS-FCOPM communication card (firmware V2.00 or later). Refer to Chapter 10 for
more information on wiring the cards.
 RTU mode: Remote module mode
The Card 2 slot supports the AS-FCOPM communication card (firmware V2.00 or later), AS-FEN02 (firmware V2.02
or later) and AS-FPFN02 (firmware V2.06 or later). Refer to Chapter 10 for more information on wiring the cards.
_9
9-8
9.3 COM mode

This section introduces communication modes of AS00SCM-A module (firmware V2.00) when the communication
protocol is Modbus, UD Link or CANopen.
9.3.1 Modbus
The AS00SCM-A supports standard communication protocols such as Modbus RS232, RS422, and RS485. Once
you create a data exchange table, you can exchange data with slave modules.
 You can set up communication format and node ID via HWCONFIG. Refer to section 9.2.3 for more details.
 When AS00SCM-A acts as scanner/master, you can create a data exchange table and exchange data with
slave modules. To initialize Modbus communication: Open ISPSoft. -> HWCONFIG -> Set up the node ID and
communication format. -> Create a data exchange table. -> Select a Mode (Program Control, PLC Run, or
Always Enable). -> Download HWCONFIG. -> Enable data exchange. Refer to section 9.3 in AS Series
Operation Manual for more details.
 When you use HWCONFIG to scan the modules, the data exchange table of AS00SCM-A can NOT be copied
back to HWCONIG. If you need the data exchange table of AS00SCM-A, you can use Upload on the tool bar
to send the data exchange table of AS00SCM-A back to HWCONFIG.
 When AS00SCM acts as adapter/slave, it provides a communication channel for AS series PLC to read and
write.
Supporting function codes and addresses are shown below.

Function Code Attribute Supporting addresses
16#0000~16#0063
0x03 16#0100~16#0163
Read
0x04 16#0200~16#0263
16#0300~16#0363
0x06 16#0000~16#0063
Write
0x10 16#0200~16#0263
16#0000~16#0063
16#0100~16#0163
Read
16#0200~16#0263
0x17
16#0300~16#0363
16#0000~16#0063
Write
16#0200~16#0263
Addresses and corresponding registers for function card 1 / 2

Funciton cards Address for data Address for data
Length (character) Length (character)
to be written to be read
Function card 1 16#0000 100 16#0100 100
Function card 2 16#0200 100 16#0300 100
9_
 Corresponding data registers can be obtained when AS series PLC uses AS00SCM-A for communication and
via HWCONFIG to set up. Refer to section 9.6.1 for more details.
9-9
9.3.2 UD Link
The UD Link provides communications with devices that communicate via RS232, RS422 or RS485. You can edit a
packet according to its communication format to send and receive packets. This section introduces the use of UD
Link communications in COM mode. Make sure the knob of SCM module is turned to 0 before operation. SCMSoft is
embedded in DCISoft. Go to www.deltaww.com to download DCISoft V1.19 or later. And after that you can use
SCMSoft in ISPSoft.
The steps for creating a UD Link protocol communication are:
 In HWCONFIG
Set up the function card. -> Set the communication protocol to UD Link. -> Set up the communication format and
baud rate. -> Download to HWCONFIG. -> Use data length 8 byte as the communication format, 8E1, 8N1, 8O2 and
so forth to ensure a complete transmission. After setting, right-click the module to open SCMSoft in HWCONFIG.
 In SCMSoft
Upload the module parameters to UD Link. -> Right-click Group List to create a group list. -> Double-click the Group
List 1 to set up the slot number on the editing window on the right -> Right-click the created group list on the node to
create groups for data mapping. -> Define the Group ID and Group Name on the editing window on the right.
The slot number in the group list is the actual placement order of AS00SCM-A on the right-side of the PLC. For
example, the slot number 2 in the group list corresponds to the second module on the right-side of the PLC. Once the
group list is assigned to a certain slot, the CARD 1 and CARD 2 of its corresponding module can trigger the group list
of the selected slot. You need to create a new group list for different module that needs to use UD Link.
After the group list is created, you can edit packets for transmission.
Edit TX and RX packets. -> Create commands. -> Download parameters to UD Link. -> Download in groups and
once a group number is trigger, the function card starts to send and receive packets according to the comment order.
_9
9-10
9.3.2.1 TX Packets and RX Packets

You can create several TX and RX packets in a group. A packet includes messages, an address, a length, and a
checksum.
 Packet Name: enter the packet name.
 Packet View: shows the packet contents.
 Packet Segment Edit: adjust the sequence of segments and add or delete segments.
No.: the segment number. You can create no more than 64 segments.
Class: the segment class. The available classes are Message, Address, Length, and Checksum.
Format: the data format of the segment. The available data formats are Hex (hexadecimal), ASCII, and Code.
Segment View: the contents of the segment
 Message: a message may be either Constant or Variable. Messages can be applied to a header segment, a start
bit segment, an end bit segment, and a data segment. There can be several messages in a packet.
 Address: an address may be either Constant or Variable. There can be only one address segment in a packet.
 Length: enter the length of a packet. There can be only one length segment in a packet.
Class: 1 byte or 2 byes
Format: select a format for the length, Hex or ASCII 9_

Value: enter a value for the length according to the format; unit: byte
 Checksum: edit the checksum. There can be only one checksum segment in a packet.
Class: select a Class.

Format: select the Format for the checksum.
Initial value: set the initial value for the checksum.
9 - 11
Reverse: the high byte of a one-word checksum is calculated, and the high byte (word) and low byte (byte) of the
checksum are reversed.
 Constant: enter a constant.
Format: Select Hex, ASCII, or Code in the Format box. If you select Code, the data is a control code.
Value: enter a constant .
 Variable: a variable data to read or write. Specify either an internal register in AH10SCM-A or a register in a CPU
module.
 Format: select the format for the data.
Null: data is not processed.
Hex: ASCII data is converted into hexadecimal data. ASCII data that cannot be converted into hexadecimal data is
converted into 0.
ASCII: Hexadecimal data is converted into ASCII data. Hexadecimal data that cannot be converted into ASCII
data is converted into 0.
_9  Reverse: the high byte of a one-word checksum which is calculated, and the low byte of the checksum are
reversed.
 Variable Property:
Function: for a TX packet, select Read R() for the Function. For an RX packet, select Read R(), Write W(), or *
for the Function.
Mapping Register: select a register in the PLC.
9-12
 Length Property:
Function: Select Read R ( ) for a variable. And then you can select its corresponding register. The value here is the
length. Select Constant and then you can define the data length. You can also select to determine the length (*)
automatically. The data length can be specified between the packet interval (around 4 character time length).
For a TX packet, you can select the variable and the constant length. For a RX packet, you can select a variable,
constant and determine the length (*) automatically.
9.3.2.2 Command
After creating several TX and RX packets, create commands to select packets to be sent and packets to be received.
Also create a sequence to execute the commands.
 Command No.: every command has a number. The Command Number indicates the execution order. You can
also use this Command Number to appoint a certain packet for transmission when using Goto function.
 Command Type: select Send, Receive, or Send & Receive for the Command Type. Once the type Send is
selected, when the packet is sent, the transmission is considered successful. Once the type Send & Receive is
selected, AS00SCM-A checks if the received data met the definition of RX packet. When they are matched, the
transmission is considered successful.
 Send Packet: select a packet to send.
 Receive Packet: select a packet to receive.
 Success: specify the action to follow the successful execution of the command: Next, Goto, or End.
 Next: the next command is executed based on Command Number. If the command that is being executed
is command 1, the next command that will be executed is command 2.
 Goto: specify a later command to be executed based on its Command Number.

9_
 End: end the sequence of commands.
 Fail: specify the action to follow the failure of the command: Next, Goto, or Abort.
 Next: the next command is executed based on Command Number. If the command that is being
executed is command 1, the next command that will be executed is command 2.
 Goto: specify a later command to be executed based on its Command Number.
9-13
 Abort: end the sequence of commands.
 Retry: set the number of times the command will be retried after a failure.
 Repeat: set the number of times the command will be repeated after successful execution.
 Send Wait: set an interval in milliseconds for the sequence to wait between commands. The default is 0
milliseconds, which causes the next command to be executed immediately after a reply is received.
 Timeout: set the amount of time in milliseconds for the system to wait for the command to be executed before
the system reports a communication timeout. The default is 50 milliseconds. When it is set to 0, there
is no timeout message and the module is at the status of waiting to receive.
9.3.3 CANopen Mode

The installed on the right side of AS Series PLC CPU, AS00SCM-A (firmware V2.00 or later) can be connected to an
AS-FCOPM module through the Card 2 slot. It can then be used as a slave for other modules in the CANopen
network environment.
9.3.3.1 Features
When using the AS00SCM-A as a slave module, it has the following features:
 Complies with CANopen DS301 V4.02
 Supports NMT Slave
 Error-controlled; supports Heartbeat and Node-Guarding Protocols
 Supports PDO; up to 8 TxPDO and 8 RxPDO can be configured for every slave.
 Supports SDO:
Server: 1
User: 0
Supports SDO (expedited SDO) transmission mode
 Supports Emergency Protocol
_9
9-14
9.3.3.2 Corresponding Input / Output Device Range

When the AS00SCM-A module acts as a CANopen slave, the CPU PLC assigns the input/output device ranges
according to the placement of the AS00SCM-A. The corresponding input/output device ranges from the right hand
side of the CPU PLC are shown in the example below from the HWCONFIG utility. The red box below is the data
exchange section for AS00SCM-A, when the AS00SCM-A acting as a CANopen slave.
9_
9-15
9.4 RTU Mode

9.4.1 CANopen Mode (AS-FCOPM)
When the function card AS-FCOPM works with an AS series PLC, it supports three kinds of RTU modes, including AS
Remote Communication, CANopen DS301 Mode and Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode. Use the knob
FORMAT 1 to turn among three RTU modes.
A. RTU Communication Mode Setup Knob “FORMAT 1”
FORMAT1 Description
0 AS Remote Communication
4 CANopen DS301
8 Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode
B. Node ID Setup Knob “ID1/ID2”
 ID1: 0 (recommended)
 ID2: 0 (the knob is no function; set up through ISPSoft); see the table below for the knob setting
range.
RTU mode ID2 setting range

1~F
AS Remote Communication
(by the number of slaves)
1~F
Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode
(by the number of slaves)
1~F
CANopen DS301 (if the knob is at 0, the setting range is set by
HWCONFIG)
C. RTU Communication Speed Setup Knob “FORMAT 2”
Use the knob for setting. You cannot use ISPSoft (HWCONFIG) to set up the communication mode in this
format.
FORMAT2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-F
Byte (bps) 10K 20K 50K 125K 250K 500K 1000K NA
Distance (m) 5000 2500 1000 500 250 100 25 NA
_9
9-16
9.4.1.1 AS Remote Communication Mode

 Double-click the AS Series PLC, then in Device Setting click Function Card 2 Setting and set the function card
2 to AS-FCOPM, set to working mode to AS Remote Communication Mode, enter the number of the AS remote
module and set up the baud rate. After the setting is done, download the parameters.
Turn the FORMAT1 knob to 0 and it is in AS Remote Communication Mode. In AS Remote Communication mode, an
AS series CPU PLC can connect to as many as 15 AS00SCM-A modules, as long as they are all in RTU mode. The
RTU station number should be set from 1 to 15 in numerical order. RTU mode and baud rate cannot be set via
ISPSoft (HWCONFIG). Use the knob ID2 to set up Node ID and use the knob FORMAT2 to set up the baud rate.
(The baud rate should be the same as the PLC’s baud rate.)
9_
9-17
Steps for a quick setup

1. Set up the PLC: AS Remote Communication mode, number of the device: 1; baud rate: 1000kbps;
download the parameters.
2. Set up AS00SCM-A; set the ID1 knob to 0 and FORMAT1 to 0; ID2 knob to 1 and FORMAT2 to 7.
3. Supply power to AS00SCM-A and connect AS00SCM-A to the PLC with a CANopen cable.
4. Resupply power to the PLC and the indicator of CARD2 should keep blinking. That indicates
AS00SCM-A and the PLC are connected. The PLC error indicator should be blinking too, since the
setting is not done yet.
5. Use HWCONFIG to scan the connected devices to see if AS00SCM-A is connected.
6. Download the parameters and check if the PLC error indicator has stopped blinking. Then the setting
of one RTU device is complete.
_9
9-18
9.4.1.2 Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode

 Double-click the AS Series PLC, then in Device Setting click Function Card 2 Setting and set the function
card 2 to AS-FCOPM, set to working mode to Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode and enter the number of
the AS remote module and set up the baud rate. After the setting is done, download the parameters.
Turn the FORMAT1 knob to 8, and it is in Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode. In this mode, an AS series
CPU PLC can connect to as many as 7 AS00SCM-A modules, as long as they are all in RTU mode. The RTU
station number should be set from 9 to 15 in numerical order. RTU mode and baud rate cannot be set via
ISPSoft (HWCONFIG). Use the knob ID2 to set up Node ID and use the knob FORMAT2 to set up the baud
rate. (The baud rate should be the same as the PLC’s baud rate.)
9_
9-19

1. Set up the PLC: Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Modem mode, number of the device: 1; baud rate:
1000kbps; download the parameters.
2. Set up AS00SCM-A; set the ID1 knob to 0 and FORMAT1 to 8; ID2 knob to 9 and FORMAT2 to 7.
3. Supply power to AS00SCM-A and connect AS00SCM-A to the PLC with a CANopen cable.
4. Resupply power to the PLC and the indicator of CARD2 should keep blinking. That indicates
AS00SCM-A and the PLC are connected. The PLC error indicator should be blinking too, since the
setting is not done yet.
5. Use HWCONFIG to scan the connected devices to see if AS00SCM-A is connected.
6. Download the parameters and check if the PLC error indicator has stopped blinking. Then the setting
of one RTU device is complete.
_9
9-20
9.4.1.3 CANopen DS301 Mode

 This mode supports AS Series PLC acts as the CPU and the 3rd party CANopen DS301 devices (non-AS series
devices and non-Delta PLC). When using Delta PLC as the CPU, you need to use CANopen Builder to set up.
 Before using a 3rd party PLC, use AS Series PLC as the CPU and select the AS Remote Communication Mode.
 Before connecting to CANopen DS301, turn the AS00SCM-A FORMAT1 knob to 4, and the adjustable range for
station knob ID2 becomes 0x1h~0xFh. This mode is used to communicate with a Master PLC from other brand.
See the detail in section 9.6.3. when the PDO data is mapped, AS00SCM-A can control the IO modules from its
right side.
 Double-click the AS Series PLC, then in Device Setting click Function Card 2 Setting and set the function card
2 to AS-FCOPM, set to working mode to CANopen DS301.

1. Set up the PLC: in AS Remote Communication Mode, connect AS series PLC to AS00SCM-A, refer
to section 9.4.1.1 for more details.
2. Use AS series PLC to scan the I/O modules installed on the right-side of AS00SCM-A and download the
parameters.
3. If using HWCONFIG to set up the node ID, you can use COM mode to connect AS00SCM-A to the right-side of
AS series PLC directly and no I/O module behind it. Use AS series PLC’s HWCONFIG to scan and add
AS00SCM-A in and then double-click the module to set up its node ID and then download the parameters. After
that, knob ID2 to 0.
4. Install the I/O module to the right side of AS00SCM-A and turn the working mode to RTU.
5. Turn FORMAT1 to 4 and use the CANopen cable to connect to the PLC, and then supply power to AS series
PLC.
6. Follow master’s CANopen setting method to install the slaves.
Refer to section 9.6.3 PDO examples, if you are using AH10COPM-5A as the CPU.
9_
9-21
9.4.2 EtherNet/IP Mode

AS-FEN02 can be installed on AS00SCM-A (firmware V2.02 or later). However AS00SCM-A can only be used in RTU
mode. You can use Delta PLC or the 3rd party EtherNet/IP device to control the right-side modules of the AS00SCM-
A. Refer to section 10.2.7 for more details on the operations of AS-FEN02 installed on AS Series PLC.
9.4.2.1 LED Indicators

 AS00SCM-A acting as a remote module
LED Indicator Description

CARD 1 LED indicator Orange light blinking: when AS-FEN02 sends data to AS00SCM-A
CARD 2 LED indicator Orange light blinking: when AS00SCM-A sends data to AS-FEN02
Indicates if there is any error on the module
OFF: the module is operating normally
Error LED indicator (red)
Blinking: an error has occurred or occurs on the module; refer to section
9.7 for more information.
 AS-FEN02 installed on AS00SCM-A
LED Indicator Description

Indicates the status of the communication card
Green light ON: the operation is normal
Green light Blinking: the setting is not complete
MS indicator
Red light ON: internal communication failure, NOT being able to recover
Red light Blinking: internal communication timeout
OFF: no power
Indicates the status of Ethernet connection
Green light ON: a CIP connection is established
Green light Blinking: a CIP connection is not established
Red light ON: duplicated IP address, after fixing this issue, resupply the
NS indicator
power
Red light Blinking: communication timeout / CIP connection is established
after power-on / IP address change
OFF: no power / network cable is not connected
LINK indicator X1/X2 Green light ON: a network connection is established
OFF: a network connection is not established
Indicates the status of Ethernet communication
ACT indicator X1/X2 Orange BLINKING: data transmission
OFF: no data transmission
_9
9-22
9.4.2.2 IP Setting Tool

AS-FEN02 can be installed on AS00SCM-A (firmware V2.02 or later) so that AS00SCM-A can act as a remote
module. When the knob is set to 0, the IP address is 192.168.1.3 by default. If there are more than one AS00SCM-A
in the system, you need to set up the IP addresses for them. Three methods for you to set up the IP addresses for
AS-FEN02 installed on AS00SCM-A.
 Using knobs: Highly suggested. You can use ID2 and FORMAT2 knobs to set up the IP address.
Hexadecimal format is used and ID2 corresponds to x161 and FORMAT 2 to x160. The possible IP address is
192.168.1.x, x=1~FE (1~254).
 Using EIP Builder: You can use IP Setting Tool in EIP Builder to set up the IP address. But first you need to
check the sticker on the AS-FEN02 communication card for the MAC address.
 Open EIP Builder and add AS00SCM (RTU) + AS-FEN02 to your network. Make sure all four knobs on
the AS00SCM-A (remote module) are turned to 0. And then use Ethernet to connect with your computer.
 Select IP Setting Tool from the Tool on the tool bar to scan for the device for IP address setup.
 Select the adapter type and click Broadcast Search and then you can edit the parameters. After the
editing is complete, select the device you’d like to download and then click Download.
 Using IP Setting Tool, you can also edit the devices in different network segments. For example, the IP
address of the device by default is 192.168.1.3 but the IP address of the computer is 192.168.10.5. You
can use IP Setting Tool to edit the device IP address. This tool uses MAC address to recognize the
identities of different devices and thus the IP duplication is allowed. It is very useful when you need to 9_
edit the IP addresses of multiple devices at the same time, as long as you know the MAC address of
each device.
 Using IP Setting Tool to change the IP setting mode to DHCP. And after that you can go to IP Manager
to set up the correspondences between the specific MAC address and specific IP address. Follow the
steps below for DHCP setup.
9-23
 Using DHCP: Besides using IP Setting Tool to set the IP setting mode to DHCP mode, you can also use knob to
set the mode to DHCP.
 When both ID1 and FORMAT 1 are set to 0 and both ID2 and FORMAT 2 are set to F, IP setting mode is
in DHCP mode. And then use Ethernet to connect with your computer.
 Open EIP Builder and select IP Manager from the Tool on the tool bar.
 Click Stop the Server and then select a suitable Network Interface. Click Start the Server to complete
the setting. After that, you need to turn the power OFF and then ON so that the devices will send DHCP
requests to the computer.
 Check the device in the DHCP request form to assign the IP address to its corresponding MAC address.
You can also export the corresponding table. After the assignment is complete, you can see the result in
the status section.
_9
 After IP setting is complete, you can decide whether to disable DHCP function or not. If the system is in
the absence of a DHCP server (or use IP Setting Tool only for once), it is suggested to use IP Setting
Tool to change the IP setting mode to static mode. If the system includes a DHCP server, it is suggested
to keep the IP setting mode in DHCP mode. Whenever the power of the remote module is OFF, the
system clears all the IP parameters and sends DHCP request out whenever the power of the remote
module is ON to make sure the DHCP server is working.
9-24
9.4.2.3 Connecting to Delta PLC Scanner through EIP Builder

Through EIP Builder, an AS Series PLC (when acting as a scanner) can create an EtherNet/IP connection to
AS00SCM-A (when installed) on AS-FEN02. Below shows an example of AS Series PLC acting as a scanner to
create an EIP connection.
1. An AS Series PLC, AS-FEN02 and a computer can be connected together through an Ethernet knob. Configure
the parameters in HWCONFIG and right-click the CPU to open EIP Builder.
2. Scan the network to add AS-FEN02 (AS RTU) in EIP Builder. Drag the red block and drag it to the same network
(Network_0) as the AS Series PLC does. Double-click AS-FEN02 to open HWCONFIG and set the parameters
for AS-FEN02.
9_
9-25
3. If the PLC is not connected to any module, you can drag and drop AS-FEN02 (AS RTU) from the Product List on
the right to add it into the Network View.
_9
9-26
4. After the settings are complete, click the Downloader icon and then select the parameters that you’d like to
download. Parameters include:
 RTU parameters: all the parameters set in the previous step
 Data Exchange: data mapped from the RTU right-side modules of AS00SCM-A to the PLC
5. While downloading, the connection of PLC and RTU is off. After the downloading is complete, the connection will
be re-established. Refer to section 9.4.3 for more details on the connection establishment of AS00SCM-A RTU
modules.
9_
9-27
9.4.2.4 Connecting to 3rd Party PLC Scanner through EIP Builder

Through EIP Builder, a 3rd party PLC (when acting as a scanner) can create an EtherNet/IP connection to AS00SCM-
A (when AS-FEN02 is installed). Use the 3rd party PLC to connect to the computer and open EIP Builder to edit the
right side modules of AS00SCM-A.
 Editing via EIP Builder:
1. You can manually or scan the network to add the AS00SCM(RTU) + AS-FEN02 to the network. Click
the remote module to open HWCONFIG to scan and download the parameters of the right side
modules of AS00SCM-A.
_9
9-28
2. Write down the information in Normal Exchange Area. This is the working order for the 3rd party device to
perform the data exchange. Use AS04DA-A as an example, the first input value is the error code. (all of the
module error codes are the input values; the exchange direction is from remote module inputs to scanner) the 1st
value is the value in channel 1; the 2nd value is the value in channel 2 and so forth. The unit is REAL.
 The following example uses Rockwell software Studio 5000. Before you begin, you need to go to
www.deltaww.com to download EDS file.
1. Use EDS Hardware Installation Tool to install the EDS file of ASCPU (AS-FEN02).
9_
9-29
_9
9-30
2. Right-click Ethernet to see the context menu and click New Module to add a new device in.
9_
9-31
3. Click Change in the section of Module Definition under the General tab to change the data length (see the
image above). You can see the default data size as shown below. Here only shows the data exchange area
of AS00SCM. You can find more information on the data size of the right-side modules in the following steps.
4. Digital modules: the data size of every digital modules is incremented in RTU IO Owner. You can refer to
the following table for the data size of each module; the unit is INT. When converting INT value to SINT
value, the INT value needs to multiply 2 and add the sum to the value to make it a SINT value. Use
AS16AP11P-A as an example, if the INT value is 1 and to convert it to SINT value, the INT value 1
multiplies 2 is 2. Add the sum 2 to the value to make it a SINT value. The input data size is 62 (60+ (1*2)),
the output data is 42 (40+(1*2)).
I/O Data Length (Unit: INT)

Digital I/O Module ASRTU-FEN02 → EtherNet/IP Scanner EtherNet/IP Scanner → ASRTU-FEN02
(Input) (Output)
AS08AM10N-A 1 0
AS08AN01T-A 0 1
AS08AN01P-A 0 1
AS08AN01R-A 0 1
AS16AM10N-A 1 0
AS16AP11T-A 1 1
AS16AP11P-A 1 1
AS16AP11R-A 1 1
AS16AN01T-A 0 1
AS16AN01P-A 0 1
AS16AN01R-A 0 1
AS32AM10N-A 2 0
AS32AN02T-A 0 2
AS64AM10N-A 4 0
_9 AS64AN02T-A 0 4
9-32
5. Analog module: Refer to the following table to enter the corresponding instances in the fields. The following
example shows AS04AD-A is installed in I/O 2. And according to the table below, you need to enter the
value 105 in the field of input and 104 in the field of output in the Remote Data section. As for the data
size, enter 10 for the input and 0 for the output. The unit is REAL.
I/O 1 I/O 2 I/O 3 I/O 4 I/O 5 I/O 6 I/O 7 I/O 8
Input 103 105 107 109 111 113 115 117

Output 102 104 106 108 110 112 114 116
I/O Data Size (Unit: REAL)

Analog I/O Module ASRTU-FEN02 → EtherNet/IP Scanner EtherNet/IP Scanner → ASRTU-FEN02
(Input) (Output)
AS04AD-A 10 0
AS08AD-B 10 0
AS08AD-C 10 0
AS04DA-A 1 9
AS06XA-A 5 5
AS04RTD-A 10 0
AS06RTD-A 10 0
AS04TC-A 10 0
AS08TC-A 10 0
9_
9-33
6. After the setting is complete, you can see the data exchange area of the remote module in Controller Tag.
The first module on the right side can start data mapping from the 41st byte (Data[40]). See the image
below. ASRTU: bit0~bit7 of O1.Data[40] are mapping to Y0~Y7 of AS16AP11P-A and 13.Data is to AS04AD-
A and so forth.
_9
9-34
9.4.3 Remote Module Setting

1. Double-click AS00SCM-A -> AS remote module in Device Setting and click AS Serial Remote Module. To set up
the remote module in RTU mode, set the function card type 2 to AS-FCOPM, AS-FEN02 or AS-FPFN02:
For the following four situations, you can either stop I/O module (all I/O modules stop running) or keep I/O module
running (all I/O modules keep the same state).
1) When a Master connection is lost
 I/O modules stop running: all I/O modules stop running
 I/O modules keep the same state: all modules keep running
2) When a Scanner has reconnected after the connection lost
 I/O modules stop running: all I/O modules stop running
3) When an alarm occurs in an I/O module
 I/O modules stop running: all I/O modules stop running (after resupply power to resume running)
4) When an I/O connection is lost
 I/O modules stop running: all I/O modules stop running (after resupply power to resume running)
Analog Output Module

Digital & Analog Digital Output
Procedure Settings (RTU) (I/O Module Settings)
Input Modules Modules
Clear Keep 9_
No change to
I/O module stops Output value
Master Output value = 0 the output
running Cannot update data =0
connection value
on the master
lost
I/O module keeps
No change to the output value
the same state
9-35
Master has No change to

I/O module stops Output value
reconnected Output value = 0 the output
running Keep updating data =0
after value
on the master
connection
I/O module keeps
lost. Output value = output value of the master
the same state
No change to
I/O module stops No change to the Output value
Output value = 0 the output
Alarm in I/O running output value =0
value
module
Other functional
(Ex. module
I/O module keeps modules: keep Other functional modules:
is broken)
the same state updating data on the output value = output value of the master
master
No change to
I/O module stops No change to the Output value
I/O Output value = 0 the output
running output value =0
connection value
lost Other functional
(Ex. unstable I/O module keeps modules: keep Other functional modules:
connection) the same state updating data on the output value = output value of the master
master
 Module configurations: refer to Section 9.1.2 in the AS Series Operation Manual.
 Module setups: refer to other chapters in the AS Series Module Manual.
_9
9-36
9.5 Normal Exchange Area

1) COM mode
In the examples above, note that the Normal Exchange Area shows the corresponding data registers of the
module and the PLC.
 Module Status: 0 = stop, 1 = run
 Error Code: refer to Section 9.7 for more information.
 Card 1 & Card 2 Data Exchange State: occupies 4 data registers (32-bit data); each bit 1–32 represents the
state of the corresponding data point 1–32 to be exchanged: 0 = none/fail, 1 = success. 9_
 Card 1 & Card 2 Data Exchange Mode Control: set the data register to 0: none, 1: once, 2: always.
 Card 1 & Card 2 Data Exchange Trigger: occupies 4 data registers; each bit 1–32 represents the state of the
corresponding data point 1–32 to be exchanged: 0 = no trigger, 1 = trigger.
 Card 1 & Card 2 UD Link Group ID Trigger: set the group ID to be triggered.
9-37
2) RTU Mode: (AS Series PLC acting as a Scanner)
 RTU Error Code: refer to Section 9.7 for more information.
 I/O Module Error Code: refer to the I/O module manual for more information.
 RTU Operation Status: 0 = communication module stop, 1 = communication module run
3) RTU Mode: (AH Series PLC acting as a Scanner)
 RTU State: 0 = communication module is working fine, 1 = communication module is NOT working fine.
_9  RTU Error Code: refer to Section 9.7 for more information.
 Power State:０= power error, 1 = power normal
 I/O Module State: each I/O module uses 1 bit to show its status (0 = normal , 1 = not running normally)
 I/O Module Error Code: refer to the I/O module manual for more information.
 RTU Operation State: 0 = communication module stop, 1 = communication module run
9-38
9.6 Application
9.6.1 Modbus
This section introduces how to use the Modbus protocol to connect the AS00SCM-A to other Delta industrial products
such as human-machine interfaces, temperature controllers, programmable logic controllers, AC motor drives, and
servo motors.
9.6.1.1 Modbus Slave ─ Connection to Delta Products

The following table shows the slave station supports the following function codes and their corresponding addresses.
Function Code Attribute Addresses Supported

16#0000–16#0063
0x03 16#0100–16#0163
Read
0x04 16#0200–16#0263
16#0300–16#0363
0x06 16#0000–16#0063
Write
0x10 16#0200–16#0263
16#0000–16#0063
16#0100–16#0163
Read
16#0200–16#0263
0x17
16#0300–16#0363
16#0000–16#0063
Write
16#0200–16#0263
The structures:
Example of a slave structure: HMI (master station)  AS-F485 + AS00SCM-A COM1 (slave station)
Device from Register in Device into Register in

Slave Communication
Product which data is the CPU which data is the CPU
ID protocol
read module written module
HMI 5 9600, RTU, 8, E, 1 16#0100 D26100 16#0000 D26000
9_
9-39
If the AS00SCM-A functions as a Modbus slave, you need to set a slave ID and baud rate.
1) Drag to add AS00SCM-A in the system configuration area. Make sure the knob of AS00SCM-A is turned to COM
mode and no power connected to it.
2) Click the I/O Scan button to make the system read the module’s current configuration. The PLC assigns the input
and output device ranges.
_9
Device from which Register in the Device into which Register in the
Function card
data is read CPU module data is written CPU module
Function card 1 16#0000 D26000 16#0100 D26100
Function card 2 16#0200 D26200 16#0300 D26300
9-40
3) Double-click the SCM module to open the configuration settings.
4) Set the communication protocol values for COM1 using the HMI settings.
5) Click the Download button to download the parameters to the AS00SCM-A.
9_
NOTE: Double-click the module to open the Device Setting dialog box to configure the parameters.
9-41
9.6.1.2 Modbus Master ─ Connection to Delta Products

This section introduces how to use COM2 to connect the AS00SCM-A to other Delta industrial products such as
programmable logic controllers, AC motor drives, and servo motors.
The structures:
Example of a master structure: AS-F485 + AS00SCM-A COM2 (master station)  VFD, ASDA, and DVP series PLC

Slave Communication
ID protocol
16#2000 D26300-
VFD 10 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 16#2103 D26200
16#2001 D26301
ASDA 11 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 16#0101 D26210 16#0101 D26310
D26220- D26320-
PLC 12 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 D100-D109 D200-D204
D26229 D26324
If the AS00SCM-A is functioning as a Modbus master, you need to set a slave ID and baud rate.
_9
9-42
2) Double-click COM2 Setting and set the Function Card Type to AS-F485.
3) Click the I/O Scan button to make the system read the module’s current configuration. The PLC assigns the input
and output device ranges.
9_
9-43
5) Set the communication protocol values for COM2:
_9
9-44
6) Set up the data exchange table: select Data Exchange – COM2 and click Add to create a new Data Exchange
Setup table.
7) In the Data Exchange Setup table double-click an item to edit its settings.
 Select Standard Modbus Device as the Remote Device Type, enter the parameters, and check Enable.

Slave Communication
ID protocol
read module written module 9_
16#2000 D26300-
VFD 10 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 16#2103 D26200
16#2001 D26301
9-45
 Select Standard Modbus Device as the Remote Device Type, enter the ASDA parameters, and check
Enable.

Slave Communication
ID protocol
ASDA 11 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 16#0101 D26210 16#0101 D26310
 Select PLC devices as the Remote Device Type, enter the PLC parameters, and check Enable.

Slave Communication
_9 ID protocol
D26220- D26320-
PLC 12 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 D100-D109 D200-D204
D26229 D26324
9-46
8) Select Always Enable in the Mode.
NOTE: If the Data Exchange Mode Control is set by the program, you can check and control the register address
on the Normal Exchange Area page. The following example shows when writing “2: always” to D28021, it
indicates Card 2 is always the one to perform data mapping.
9_
9-47
9) Download the parameters to the AS00SCM-A.
If you set Mode to Always Enable, the data exchange begins immediately after downloading the parameters.
If you set Mode to Program Control, the program starts the data exchange after downloading the parameters.
_9
9-48
9.6.2 UD Link
This section introduces how to use a non-Modbus RS485 communication port on the AS00SCM-A to connect to other
industrial products.
AS00 SCM COM1

Mas ter Slav e
RS 485 9600, 7, E, 1
Communication with a slave
Packet to Send Packet to Receive

Description
() ()
POS, xxx, yyy POS, ACT xxx and yyy are coordinates (0–999)
9_
9-49
3) Select AS-F485 as the Function Card Type for COM1.
_9
9-50
4) Select UD Link as the Protocol, set the Baud Rate and Format, and click OK.
5) Right-click the AS00SCM-A and click Communication Software and then click SCMSoft.
9_
9-51
6) Right-click Group List and then click Create Group List to create a group list.
7) You can find a created Group List1. Double-click it to open an editing window to edit the Group List Name and
the Slot.
Give the group list a Name (this example uses “Slave_Simulation”) and select 1 (COM1) as the Slot number.
_9
9-52
8) Right-click Slave_Simulation and click Create Group List to create a group list for the Slave_Simulation group.
9) You can find a created Group List1. Double-click it to open an editing window to edit the Group List Name and
the Slot.
Create a group and name it “Master Send”.
9_
9-53
10) Right-click TX Packet and click TX Packet to create a TX Packet1.
_9
9-54
11) Double-click TX Packet1 to open the Packet Edit form.
12) Give the Packet a Name (This example uses “TX POS Send”)
9_
9-55
13) Edit the TX packet, “POS, xxx, yyy” (The example below uses POS, 123, 123)
14) Click Constant in the Message area.
Enter “POS” in the Value area. Click OK and verify the packet contents in the Packet View.
_9
9-56
15) [xxx] is a variable, so click Variable in the Message area to edit it. Use ISPSoft to get the value from data
registers D26100–D26101. The example below uses D26100: 16#3132 and D26101: 16#3300 and the value is
123.
16) Enter the data register that contains the value you want to find. The example below uses D26100 and the value
returned is 3. Use ISPSoft to get the value from data registers D26100–D26199.
9_
9-57
Click OK and verify the values (”POS,”+（R（D Register [26100], 3））in the Packet View.
17) [，]: Use Address Constant to enter this Value and set the Format to ASCII.
18) [yyy] is a variable, so click Variable in the Message area to edit it. Use ISPSoft to get the value from data
registers D26102–D26103. The example below uses D26102: 16#3132 and D26103: 16#3300 and the value is
123.
_9
9-58
19) Enter the data register that contains the value you want to find. The example below uses D26102 and the value
returned is 3. Use ISPSoft to get the value from the data registers D26100–D26199.
20) Edit the packet: Create a packet and name it “RX Result”. Double-click it to open the editing window.
9_
9-59
Enter the sending packet into the D26000 register of the AS300 CPU. “*” indicates that the length is not
specified.
The packet should look like the example below.
21) Create a command: Right-click Master Send and click the Create Command.
_9
9-60
22) Double-click the new command on the list to open the Command Edit window.
23) Set Send Packet to “TX POS Send” and set Recv Packet (received contents) to “RX Result”.
9_
9-61
24) Make sure the Group is in slot 1 (COM1).
25) Click the Download button to download the parameters to the AS00SCM.
_9
9-62
26) Set up the devices for the UD Link Group ID Trigger in HWCONFIG. Once you create the AS00SCM-A module,
the system automatically assigns the corresponding addresses.
27) Double-click AS00SCM-A to open the Device Setting page. Verify that the Card 1 UD Link Group ID Trigger is set
to D28030. Use ISPSoft to enter 1 into register D28030 to start the data exchange.
9_
9-63
28) Use the monitor function in ISPSoft to verify that the transmission is working correctly.
29) In SCMSoft, right-click the item COM PORT History on the left and click the option “Upload COM History Data” to
see the transmission history of COM1 and COM2 respectively. Under the item COM1 and COM2, you can view
recent transmission history; however the shown recent history cannot be deleted or saved.
30) Select Tools -> Return to Default to clear the previous settings and have all the settings back to defaults. After
this, turn the power off and on again.
_9
9-64
9.6.3 Remote IO Application (AS-FCOPM)

This example shows other series PLC, AH10COPM-5A, as a CANopen Master that controls four IO modules on the
right side of AS00SCM-A that acts as a CANopen Slave. (You can use this method to connect to a 3rd party PLC.)
Device Function
Scan and download AS00SCM-A (RTU mode),
AS300
right side module configurations
AS00SCM-A + AS-FCOPM CANopen Slave
AHCPU530-EN + AH10COPM-5A CANopen Master
AS16AN10R-A 16 Digital outputs
AS16AM01N-A 16 Digital inputs
AS04DA-A 4 Analog channels for output
AS04AD-A 4 Analog channels for input
Step 1
Use AS300 to connect to AS00SCM-A through AS Remote Communication (RTU mode) and then use HWCONFIG to
scan and download the parameters. If the Card 2 LED is blinking normally, with no error messages, and no need to
download the PLC programs, the device power can be turned off. Refer to Section 9.4.1.1 for reference.
9_
9-65
Step 2
Turn the Format 1 of AS00SCM-A to 4 (using CANopen DS301 mode) and turn Format 2 to 7 (setting the bit rate to
1000kbps) and then turn the power off and on again. After that wiring AH10COPM-5A and set the node ID to 2 and
set the bit rate to 1000kbps. Use ISPSoft (V3.04 or later) and HWCONFIG to scan and download the parameters to
AH500. Right click AH10COPM-5A and open Intelligent Module Configuration (CANopen Builder) from the menu.
_9
9-66
Step 3
Use CANopen Builder to scan the network. You should find Node ID 1 and its name to be AS00SCM-A RTU.
If not, check if you follow the first two steps right. And repeat the previous steps. Recommended to set the value in
cycle period to 50 ms to ensure a more complete module functions. Double click the module to open the Node
Configuration window and set up the PDO manually. RPDO is for DO/AO and TPDO is for DI/AI and error codes of
RTU/IO.
Step 4
Here uses a first right side digital output module (16 points) as an example.
1. Since it is the first one, here it corresponds to Receive PDO1 (index: 1400), indicating RTU receives data from
Master through CANopen communication. (If this is an input module, it sends data to Master through CANopen
communication.) Double click to add it in the table. Double click the table to open the PDO setting window.
2. Since it is the first one, here it corresponds to Rx_Module 1. It is a 16-point digital output module so that only
the object of one word Rx_Module1_EDO0 (Index: 2000) should be selected. Click the arrow to add it into the
data mapping parameter table and you have set up a PDO for the first module. If t is a 32-point digital output
module, objects of 2 words Rx_Module1_EDO0 and Rx_Module1_EDO1 should be selected in numerical
order.
9_
9-67
3. Follow the previous steps to set up more modules.
Mapping
Device Function PDO PDO Mapping
Registers
AS16AN01R-A 16 digital outputs RxPDO1 Rx_Module1_EDO0 D6000
AS16AM01N-A 16 digital inputs TxPDO2 Tx_Module2_EDI0 D5000
4 Analog Rx_Module3_EDO0 D6001
channels for Rx_Module3_EDO1 D6002
AS04DA-A RxPDO3
output Rx_Module3_EDO2 D6003
(Integer format)* Rx_Module3_EDO3 D6004
4 Analog Tx_Module4_EDI0 D5001
channels for Tx_Module4_EDI1 D5002
AS04AD-A TxPDO4
input Tx_Module4_EDI2 D5003
(Integer format)* Tx_Module4_EDI3 D5004
Tx_Module1_error_code D5005
IO Module Tx_Module2_error_code D5006
- TxPDO5
Error Code Tx_Module3_error_code D5007
Tx_Module4_error_code D5008
RTU Error Code - TxPDO6 Tx_RTU_error_code D5009
* Here the analog module uses integer format; if you need to use floating point format, two PDOs will be used per
channel.
* Index 2002 to Index 200d are for system internal use only. Avoid using this range, when PDO is used.
* Only synchronization cycle is supported.

_9
9-68
Step 5
Double click the PLC icon and select Node ID 001 from the available nodes and then use the Right arrow to add the
selected one into the Node List. Output and Input tables are mapping registers for PDOs.
9_
9-69
Step 6
Double click the module icon and the Node Configuration window appears. Click Error Control Protocol and then
Error Control Setting windows appears. Select Heartbeat and set values for the Master Consumer Timeout and
Node Heartbeat Producer Timer. Select AH10COPM Master from the Node List and click the Down arrow to add it
to the list of Heart Consumer and then disconnection detection is now available for AS00SCM-A (RTU mode).
Click OK to confirm the setting. Download the parameters to the PLC. And then PLC can control the input/output of
the IO module remotely.
_9
9-70
An example of using PLC to control the input/output of the IO module remotely:
Start ISPSoft and download the program from AH series PLC. Switch digital output module between 1 and 0 in every
0.5 seconds; change output values of the analog output module. Wire DI/DO modules to AI/AO modules and then
you can see the changes of D6000 from D5000 and D6001-D6004 from D5001-D5004 as the example below shown.
The module error codes are stored in D5005-D5009. Refer to relevant module manuals for error code definitions.
9_
9-71
9.6.4 Remote IO Application (AS-FEN02)

When the firmware is V2.02 or later, AS-FEN02 can be installed on AS00SCM-A (RTU mode) and then PLC can
monitor right side IO modules remotely.
Device Function IP Address / Location Data Mapping Range

AS300 EtherNet/IP Master 192.168.1.5
D29000~D29019
AS00SCM-A + AS-FEN02 EtherNet/IP Slave 192.168.1.3
AS08AM10N Digital Input right side of AS00SCM-A X1.0~X1.15
AS08AN01T Digital Output right side of AS00SCM-A Y1.0~Y1.15
AS04AD-A Analog Input right side of AS00SCM-A D29060~D29079
AS04DA-A Analog Output right side of AS00SCM-A D29080~D29099
Step 1
After setting up AS300 in ISPSoft and HWCONFIG. Open EIP Builder and scan the network to add AS00SCM-A
(RTU) + AS-FEN02 to the Network. Double-click RTU module to open HWCONFIG and scan to obtain the
configuration and mapped register addresses of the I/O module on the right side of AS00SCM-A. You can also edit
the module configurations and write down the mapped register addresses. After saving, close HWCONFIG. Refer to
Section 9.4.2.3 for more details.
_9
9-72
Step 2
You can see the IP address and the data length from the data mapping table in EIP Builder. The data mapping table
can be downloaded and upload the mapped data to the device.
Step 3
An example of using PLC to control the input/output of the IO module remotely:
Start ISPSoft and switch digital output module between 1 and 0 in every 0.5 seconds and shift output values of the
analog output module between 10 V and 5V. Wire DI/DO modules to AI/AO modules. Refer to Chapter 2, 3 and 4 in
this manual for more details on module operation.
9_
9-73
9.6.5 Remote IO Application (Multiple AS-FEN02)

When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS Series PLC, it can be used as the Ethernet port of the CPU.
The following example shows how to add multiple AS00SCM-A (RTU) + AS-FEN02 (hereafter referred to as the
“RTU”) to an AS Series PLC in EIP connection. All IP addresses of RTU are set by the software.
Device Function IP Address Data Mapping Area

EtherNet/IP
AS200 192.168.1.5
master/scanner
AS00SCM-A + AS-FEN02 EtherNet/IP slave/adapter 192.168.1.30 D29540~D29559
AS08AN01T Digital output The right side of RTU Y1.0~Y1.15
AS16AM10N-A Digital input The right side of RTU X1.0~X1.15
AS08AM10N-A Digital input The right side of RTU X2.0~X2.15
Step 1 Set up an IP address for the RTU
Turn all the knobs of the FORMAT 2 of the 3 new RTUs to 0. The default IP addresses are 192.168.1.3. Refer to
section 9.4.2.2 for more information on using IP Setting Tool to set up the IP address.
Step 2
After the IP addresses of the 3 new RTUs are set, you can scan and add them in the network and connect to the AS
Series PLC. Do not download the project before uploading the already set RTU values to the network.
Now you can set up the right-side module of RTU. Refer to section 9.6.4 for more details. Scan all the RTU and save
the parameters. Make sure the data mapping table is updated and then download the project, including the
parameters, configurations, and data mapping table to the AS Series PLC and the RTUs.
_9
9-74
9.7 Error Codes

The error flags and the UD Link status codes are stored in data registers. You can modify the input device range as
needed.
9_
9-75
9.7.1 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM-A as a Communication

Module
9.7.1.1 ERROR LED Indicators are ON

The following error codes indicate possible errors when the AS00SCM-A module is installed on the right side of the
CPU module and is acting as a communication module.
Error
Description Solution
Code
1. Check that the module is securely installed.
16#1605 Hardware failure
2. Install a new AS00SCM-A or contact the factory.
1. Check if the function card is securely installed.
2. Install a new function card or contact the factory.
16#1606 The function card setting is incorrect. 3. Check if the setting in HWCONFIG is consistent
with the function card setting.
9.7.1.2 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds
The following error codes identify possible errors when the AS00SCM-A module is installed on the right side of the
CPU module and acts as a communication module.
Error
Code
Check the parameter in HWCONFIG. Download the
16#1802 Incorrect parameters
parameter again.
1. Check whether the communication cable is
properly connected.
2. Check if the station number and the
16#1803 Communication timeout
communication format are correctly set.
3. Check if the connection with the function card is
working correctly.
1. Check the settings of the UD Link.
16#1804 The UD Link setting is incorrect.
2. Check the warning settings in the PLC.
The following error codes can only be viewed with SCMSoft; when the following errors occur, they are not shown on
the LED indicators and the system does not send the error messages to the CPU module.
Error
Code
The settings in HWCONFIG and manual Check the settings in HWCONFIG and manual
16#0107 settings are not consistent with function settings for function card 1.
card 1.
The settings in HWCONFIG and manual Check the settings in HWCONFIG and manual
16#0108 settings are not consistent for function settings for function card 2.
_9 card 2.
parameter again.
16#0301 Function card 1 communication timeout
working correctly.
9-76
Error
Code
16#0302 Function card 2 communication timeout
working correctly.
Invalid UD Link Group ID for function card 1. Check the UD Link settings.
16#0400
1 2. Check the warning settings in the PLC.
Invalid UD Link Group ID for function card 1. Check the UD Link settings.
16#0401
Invalid UD Link Command for function card 1. Check the UD Link settings.
16#0402
Invalid UD Link Command for function card 1. Check the UD Link settings.
16#0403
9.7.2 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM-A as a Remote Module

Errors from the remote modules are regarded as warnings for AS Series CPU modules. The LED indicator of the
CPU module blinks and the CPU module can still operate. Use flag SM30 to manage error presentation in the remote
modules.
9.7.2.1 ERROR LED Indicators Are ON

Error codes:
Error
Code
1. Check if the module is securely installed.
16#1301 Hardware failure 2. Change and install a new AS00SCM-A or contact
the factory.
1. Check if the function card is securely installed with
the AS-FCOPM card.
2. Change and install a new function card or contact
16#1302 The function card setting is incorrect. the factory.
3. Check if the setting in HWCONFIG is consistent
with the function card setting.
9.7.2.2 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 1 Seconds
This indicates the remote module had been stopped before but the problem was cleared. The reasons for the remote
module to stop include lost connection with the master, lost connection with the IO module, and alarm occurring in IO
module. Refer to section 9.4.3 for more details.
9_
9-77

Error codes:
Error
Code
16#1500 Remote module communication timeout Make sure the communication cable is well connected
parameter again.
Make sure the communication cable is well connected
Remote extension module communication
16#1503 and the module is properly connected to the CPU
timeout
module and turn the modules on again.
The actual placement of the extension Check if the parameter in HWCONFIG is the same as
16#1505
modules is NOT the same as it is set. the actual placement.
This happens when the 24 VDC power supply for the remote module is not sufficient. Check the power supply. If the
power supply is normal, remove the extension module from the CPU module and then check if the SCM remote
module is out of order. Error codes:
Error
Code
24VDC power supply had not been Check whether the 24 V power supply to the module is
16#1303 sufficient before and then recovered from normal.
low-voltage that was less than 10 ms.
_9
9-78
10
Chapter 10 Function Cards
Table of Contents
10.1 Introduction .................................................................................... 10-3
10.2 Specification and Function............................................................... 10-3

10.2.1 AS-F232 .................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.2 AS-F422 .................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.3 AS-F485 .................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.4 AS-F2AD ................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.5 AS-F2DA ................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.6 AS-FCOPM ................................................................................. 10-5
10.2.7 AS-FEN02 .................................................................................. 10-6
10.2.7.1 Supported Software and Firmware Versions ................................. 10-6
10.2.7.2 Features ................................................................................. 10-6
10.2.7.3 Specifications .......................................................................... 10-7
10.2.7.4 Topology ................................................................................. 10-8
10.2.7.5 SM/SR .................................................................................... 10-9
10.2.7.6 Data Mapping through EtherNet/IP Adapter ................................ 10-11
10.2.7.7 Example of Connecting to 3rd Party PLC Scanner
through EIP Builder ................................................................. 10-13
10.2.7.8 Data Mapping through Modbus TCP ............................................ 10-18
10.2.7.9 Webpage ............................................................................... 10-19
10.2.8 AS-FPFN02 ............................................................................... 10-23
10.2.8.1 Supported Firmware Versions.................................................... 10-23
10.2.8.2 Features ................................................................................ 10-23
10.2.8.3 Specifications ......................................................................... 10-24
10.2.8.4 LED Indicators ........................................................................ 10-24
10.2.8.5 Configuring the Data Length for I/O Module (Works with AS300).... 10-25
10.2.8.6 Status Register (Works with AS300) .......................................... 10-27
10.2.8.7 I/O Module Selection (Works with AS00SCM-A) ........................... 10-29
10.2.8.8 Status Register (Works with AS00SCM-A) ................................... 10-30
10.2.8.9 Topology ................................................................................ 10-31
10.2.8.10 PROFINET Device Example (Adapter) ....................................... 10-32
10.2.9 AS-FOPC02 ............................................................................... 10-44
10.2.9.1 Supported Firmware Versions.................................................... 10-44
10.2.9.2 Features ................................................................................ 10-44
10-1
10.2.9.3 Specifications ......................................................................... 10-45
10.2.9.4 Topology ................................................................................ 10-46
10.2.9.5 Special Data Registers (SR) ...................................................... 10-46
10.2.9.6 OPC-UA Slave......................................................................... 10-46
10.3 Profiles and Dimensions ................................................................ 10-49

10.3.1 AS-F232 ................................................................................... 10-49
10.3.2 AS-F422/AS-F485/AS-F2AD/AS-F2DA ........................................... 10-49
10.3.3 AS-FCOPM ................................................................................ 10-49
10.3.4 AS-FEN02 ................................................................................. 10-50
10.3.5 AS-FPFN02 ............................................................................... 10-51
10.3.6 AS-FOPC02 ............................................................................... 10-52
10.4 Wiring ........................................................................................... 10-53

10.4.1 AS-F2AD .................................................................................. 10-53
10.4.2 AS-F2DA .................................................................................. 10-54

10.5.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................ 10-55
10
10-2
Ch ap te r 10 F unc tio n Car ds
10.1 Introduction
Function cards are extension cards such as analog input/output (AI/AO) and communication cards for the AS Series
PLC.
10.2 Specification and Function

10.2.1 AS-F232
The AS Series PLC is built with COM1 (RS-485) and COM2 (RS-485) ports. You can use the AS-F232 extension card for
communication other interfaces such as RS-232, PC, and so on. Except for the communication interface, however, the
communication functions are the same as the built-in ones. You can set up the communication port as either a slave or a
master node. After installing the extension card, use HWCONFIG in ISPSoft to configure the communication.
 Wiring example
AS-F232 Superior
(DB9 female) + + machine
DB9 male to DB9 female (standard cable)
10.2.2 AS-F422
Use the AS-F422 extension card to communicate with Delta HMI devices or other devices that use an RS-422
communication port. Other than the different communication interface, the communication functions remain the same as
the built-in ones. You can set the communication port as either a slave or a master node. After installing the extension
card, use HWCONFIG in ISPSoft to configure the communication.
 Wiring example for communication with Delta HMI DOPA series via COM2
AS-F422 De lta HMI DOPA s e r ie s

1 R+ Tx+ 3 6 RT S-
2 R- Tx- 4 7 RT S+
3 T+ Rx+ 2 8
4 T- Rx- 1 9 CT S+
CT S-
COM2/DB-9
10.2.3 AS-F485
With its own standalone communication port, the AS-F485 card can work independently and can be either a slave or a
 Wiring example
Master node Slave node Slave node
D+ D- SG D+ D- SG SG D+ D-
Terminal Terminal
resistor resistor
(120 ohm) (120 ohm)
Shielded Shielded
cable cable 10
10-3
10.2.4 AS-F2AD
2 DC analog signal input channels:
Item Voltage Input Current Input
Rated Input Range 0 V - 10 V 4 mA - 20 mA
Resolution 12-bit 11-bit

Digital Conversion
0 - 4000 0 - 2000
Range
Hardware Input 4mA ~ 20.37mA (FW V1.00)
0V ~ +10.24V
Limit*1 3.63mA ~ 20.37mA (FW V1.20 or later)
Digital Conversion 0 ~ 2047 (FW V1.00)
0 ~ 4095
Limit*2 - 48 ~ 2047(FW V1.20 or later)
Error Rate room temperature: ±0.5% ; full temperature range: ±1.0%
Input Impedance 2 MΩ 250 Ω
Conversion Time*3 3 ms / CH
4000
Digital Value Output
2000
Digital Value O utput

Characteristic
Curve
0 10V 4 20mA
Curr ent input
Voltage input
Digital Value Card 1 SR168 (CH1), SR169 (CH2)

Output*4 Card 2 SR170 (CH1), SR171 (CH2)
*1: The input signal should NOT exceed the limit. If exceeding the limit, damage may occur.
*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the input signal is
below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value. If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also
exceeds the digital conversion limit and a conversion limit error appears. For example in the current input mode (4 mA to
20 mA), when the input signal is 0 mA, exceeding the hardware lower limit, it also exceeds the conversion lower limit.
The module uses the lower limit value (-48) as the input signal. If a disconnected analysis is required, you can check if
the digital conversion value is -48.
*3: The conversion time is the time for each channel to convert signals to hardware input signals. If you need to calculate
a complete conversion time, you need to add the PLC scan time.
*4: Use the program to read the values in SR to obtain the corresponding A/D conversion value for the channel.
10
10-4
10.2.5 AS-F2DA
2 DC analog signal output channels:
Item Voltage Output Current Output
Analog Signal 0 V - 10 V 4 mA - 20 mA
Resolution 12-bit 12-bit

Digital Conversion
0 - 4000 0 - 4000
Limit
Error Rate room temperature: ±0.5% ; full temperature range: ±1.0%
Impedance
≥1 kΩ ≤500 Ω
Allowance
Conversion Time*1 2ms / CH

10V 20mA
Voltage Output
Curr ent Output

Characteristic
Curve
4
0 4000 4000
Digital Value Input
Di gital Value Input
Digital Value Card 1 SR172 (CH1) SR173 (CH2)

Output*2 Card 2 SR174 (CH1) SR175 (CH2)
*1: The conversion time is the time for each channel to convert signals to hardware input signals. If you need to calculate
a complete conversion time, you need to add the PLC scan time.
*2: Use the MOV instruction to move the value to the SR to obtain the corresponding voltage output value.
10.2.6 AS-FCOPM
With its own standalone communication port, the AS-FCOPM card can work independently and can be either a slave or a
 Wiring example
Master node Slave node Slave node

CAN _H CAN _L GND CAN _H C AN _L G ND GN D C AN _H C AN_ L
ON
12 0
O FF
Terminal Terminal
resistor Shielded resistor
(120 ohm) cable (120 ohm)
10
10-5
10.2.7 AS-FEN02
This communication card can work independently and does NOT occupy the communication port of PLC CPU. It can act
as Modbus TCP Server or Client and EtherNet/IP Adapter. After AS-FEN02 is installed, you can go to HWCONFIG from
ISPSoft to do the editing in the Function Card 2 section.
All the AS-FEN02 parameters are stored in AS300 PLC CPU or AS00SCM-A. If you need the IP address of AS-FEN02,
you need to go to HWCONFIG from ISPSoft to check its IP address in the Function Card 2 section. You can also use
COMMGR to see the IP address of this device.
10.2.7.1 Supported Software and Firmware Versions

 The firmware of AS300 Series PLC should be V1.06 or later for AS-FEN02 to be installed on it.
 The firmware of AS00SCM-A module (in RTU mode) should be V2.02 or later for AS-FEN02 to be installed
on it.
 ISPSoft version should be V3.06 or later.
 EIP Builder version should be V1.06 or later.
10.2.7.2 Features
 AS-FEN02 can be installed on AS300 Series PLC and AS00SCM-A (in RTU mode). This section introduces
the operations when it is installed on AS300 Series PLC. For the operations when it is installed on
AS00SCM-A and acting as remote module for AS/AH Series PLC, refer to section 9.4.2 for more details.
 When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC, it acts as a Master or a Slave for Modbus TCP
connection. The operation is the same as using the built-in connection port for communication and select
FEN02 as the Function Card on Data Exchange tab, refer to section 9.3.1.2 of AS Series Operation Manual
for more details.
 When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC, it acts as a EthernNet/IP Adapter but not EtherNet/IP
Scanner for EtherNet/IP connection. The operation is the same as the EtherNet/IP port on AS Series PLC,
10 refer to Section 10.2.7.6 in this manual and Chapter 9 of AS Series Operation Manual for more details.
10-6
10.2.7.3 Specifications
 System Specifications
Item Specification
Device type Master, Slave and RTU
Topology Star and linear topologies are supported.
 When installed on AS300 PLC CPU, you can
only use HWCONFIG from ISPSoft for editing.
 When installed on AS00SCM-A and used for
RTU application, you can edit via software
or hardware.
 Software: Set the ID2 and FORMAT2 to
General IP Settings
0x000 and use HWCONFIG from EIP Builder
for editing.
 Hardware: Use the ID2 and FORMAT2 to set
IP address to 192.168.1.X (X=1~254) or turn
ID2 and FORMAT2 to 0xFF to make it in
DHCP mode.
AS300 Series PLC
Availability
AS00SCM-A (available only for RTU mode)
Max. connection number 8
View device information
Account management
Web
Functions AS-FEN02 firmware update
When installed in AS00SCM-A and in RTU mode,
the module monitoring is supported.
 MODBUS TCP Specifications (only available for CPU modules)

Item Specification
General Device type Server, Client
MODBUS TCP
Max. data length/per
Server 200 words
transmission
MODBUS TCP
Client 200 words
transmission
Note: The connection numbers of Server and Client are counted separately.
 EtherNet/IP Specifications
Item Specification
General Device type Adapter
CIP connection number 8
TCP connection number 8 (Servers)
Requested Packet Interval
CIP Network I/O 1 ms~1000ms
(RPI)
Connection
Max. Transmission Speed 10,000 pps
200 bytes
transmission
Class 3
Total 8 (Servers)
CIP Network
Explicit Message
(Connected Type) 10
(for both class 3 and UCMM connection types)
UCMM
10-7
Item Specification
(Non-Connected Type, only
uses TCP connections)
Identity Object (16#01)
Message Router Object (16#02)
Assembly Object (16#04)
Connection Manager Object (16#06)
CIP Objects
Port Object (16#F4)
TCP/IP Interface Object (16#F5)
Ethernet Link Object (16#F6)
Not supporting self-defined objects
10.2.7.4 Topology
With its own standalone communication port, the AS-FEN02 card can work independently and can be MODBUS TCP
Server, Client and EtherNet/IP Adapter. After installing the extension card, use HWCONFIG in ISPSoft to configure the
communication.
 Linear Topology
 Star Topology
10
10-8
10.2.7.5 SM/SR
 Special Auxiliary Relays (SM)
AS300 Series
AS200 Series
Attribute
OFF STOP RUN
Latched
Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP
SM1006 Data exchange through AS-FEN02 enabled by ISPSoft. ○ – OFF – OFF N R/W OFF
Connection 1 for data exchange through AS-FEN02
SM1008 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
SM1009 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
SM1010 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
SM1011 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
SM1012 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
SM1013 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
SM1014 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
SM1015 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
Successful data exchange connection 1 through AS-
SM1016 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
SM1017 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
SM1018 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
SM1019 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
SM1020 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
SM1021 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
SM1022 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
SM1023 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Error in data exchange connection 1 through AS-
SM1024 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
SM1025 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
SM1026 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
SM1027 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
SM1028 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
10
SM1029 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
10-9
AS300 Series
AS200 Series
Attribute
OFF STOP RUN
Latched
Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

SM1030 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
SM1031 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Special auxiliary
Refresh time
relay
SM1006 After the parameters of data exchange are downloaded, you set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM1008~SM1015 After the parameters of data exchange are downloaded, you set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM1016~SM1031 The flag is ON, when the system is refreshed automatically.
 Special Data Registers (SR)
Attribute
OFF STOP RUN
Latched
Default
AS300
AS200
Series
Series
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP
Actual connection time for data exchange through the

SR1520 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02 connection 1
SR1521 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
SR1522 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
SR1523 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
SR1524 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
SR1525 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
SR1526 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
SR1527 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
The error code for data exchange through the AS-
SR1528 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 1
SR1529 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 2
SR1530 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 3
SR1531 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 4
SR1532 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 5
SR1533 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 6
10 The error code for data exchange through the AS-
SR1534 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 7
10-10
Attribute
OFF STOP RUN
Latched
Default
AS300
AS200
Series
Series
ON RUN STOP

SR1535 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 8
SR1536 AS-FEN02/FOPC02 TCP current connection number ○ – 0 – – N R 0
SR1537 AS-FEN02 MODBUS/TCP Server connection number ○ – 0 – – N R 0
SR1538 AS-FEN02 MODBUS/TCP Client connection number ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02/FOPC02 EtherNet/IP Adapter connection
SR1539 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
number
Special data
Refresh time
register
SR1520~SR1535 Refresh after AS-FEN02 communication is done.
SR1536~SR1539 The flag is ON, when the system is refreshed automatically.
10.2.7.6 Data Mapping through EtherNet/IP Adapter

When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS Series PLC, you can create a connection through EIP Builder and make it act as an
EtherNet/IP adapter. The below example uses two AS Series PLCs (one with AS-FEN02) to connect to each other and
perform data mapping through EtherNet/IP connection. Refer to Chapter 9 in AS Series Operation Manual for more
details on AS Series PLC acting as EtherNet/IP Scanner.

AS300 EtherNet/IP Scanner 192.168.1.5 D100, D200
AS300+ AS-FEN02 EtherNet/IP Adapter 192.168.1.3 D200, D300
Step 1
Double click AS Series PLC in HWCONFIG and the Device Setting window appears. Set up the IP Address of the AS-
FEN02 to 192.168.1.3 and then connect the scanner EtherNet/IP port to the AS-FEN02 through a network cable. Right-
click the AS300 Series PLC to open EIP Builder and then scan the network or drag and drop the ASCPU (AS-FEN02) to
add it to the same network as the scanner’s.
10
1 0 - 11
Step 2
Right click the Scanner’s communication port (red spot) and select Data Mapping from the menu. Data mapping table
appears for editing.
Step 3
Editing the data mapping table. You can enter the starting register address and the data length for data mapping between
the scanner and adapter. The unit for data length is byte. As the below example shows the value in the scanner’s D200 is
written by the data from the adapter’s D300. Read data from the adapter’s D200 and store the data in the scanner’s
D100.
10
10-12
Step 4
Click the Downloader icon and then select the parameters that you’d like to download. After the scanner starts to run,
check if the data stored in the adapter D300 and D200 increment by 1 every second to determine if the data mapping is
going well.
10.2.7.7 Example of Connecting to 3rd Party PLC Scanner through

EIP Builder
Through EIP Builder, a 3rd party PLC (when acting as a scanner) can create an EtherNet/IP connection to AS300 Series
PLC (when AS-FEN02 is installed). The following example uses Rockwell PLC as a scanner and Rockwell software
Studio 5000 to perform data mapping with a Delta PLC. Before you begin, you need to go to www.deltaww.com to
download EDS file.
(1) Use EDS Hardware Installation Tool to install the EDS file of ASCPU (AS-FEN02).
10
10-13
(2) Right-click Ethernet to see the context menu and click New Module to add a new device in.
10
10-14
(3) Set up the parameters including device name, IP address and many more. For basic operation, you can
use the default EDS file directly. No need to edit the EDS file. But you should change the data type to
meet the system format. Click Change in the section of Module Definition on the General tab to change the data
type according to your needs. Here the data type is INT, meaning when monitoring, data in each deice is shown in
one word (a D device).
10
10-15
(4) Setting up the data mapping table
I: Input data (TO), Ex. Connection 1 is corresponding to PLC D3000~D3099.
O: Output data (OT), Ex. Connection 1 is corresponding to PLC D2000~D2099.
C: here corresponds to the configurations. You can edit the corresponding PLC addresses of input and output. After
editing, you need to download the parameters to Rockwell PLC.
I/O Message Connection

Instance
Connection No. Function Length Defaults
Attribute
Input (TO) 0x65 100 words D3000~D3099
Connection 1 Output (OT) 0x64 100 words D2000~D2099
Configuration 0x80 8 words Refer to the table below
Input (TO) 0x6B 100 words D3300~D3399
Connection 4 Output (OT) 0x6A 100 words D2300~D2399
Input (TO) 0x6D 100 words D3400~D3499
10 Connection 5 Output (OT) 0x6C 100 words D2400~D2499
10-16
I/O Message Connection

Instance
Connection No. Function Length Defaults
Attribute
Input (TO) 0x6F 100 words D3500~D3599
Connection 6 Output (OT) 0x6E 100 words D2500~D2599
Configuration Defaults
Data type Description
address (Connection 1)
Input corresponding device
Word[0] UINT 0
0: D, 1: X, 2: Y
Word[1] UINT Reserved 200
Word[2-3] DWORD Input corresponding device number 3000
Output corresponding device
Word[4] UINT 0
0: D, 2: Y
Word[5] UINT Reserved 200
Word[6-7] DWORD Output corresponding device number 2000
10
10-17
10.2.7.8 Data Mapping through Modbus TCP

When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS Series PLC, you can create a connection by configuring the IP address and some
relevant parameters to make it act as a Modbus TCP Slave device.
The following example shows two AS Series PLCs (one with AS-FEN02) to connect each other and one as Master and
the other as Slave (AS-FEN02) to perform data mapping through the Modbus TCP connection. For the support function
codes and corresponding addresses, refer to AS Series Operation Manual for more details.

AS300 Modbus TCP Master 192.168.1.5 D100, D200
AS300+ AS-FEN02 Modbus TCP Slave 192.168.1.3 D200, D300
Step 1
Double click AS Series PLC in HWCONFIG and the Device Setting window appears. Set up the IP Address of the A to
192.168.1.3 and then connect Master and Slave AS-FEN02.
Step 2
Create a data mapping table in the Master and then perform data mapping with the Slave (AS-FEN02).
10
10-18
Step 3
Click the Downloader icon and then select the parameters that you’d like to download.
10.2.7.9 Webpage
When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC or AS00SCM-A (RTU mode), you can enter AS-FEN02 IP address in
the search bar of your browser to connect to your device. After that you can set up, update firmware and monitor AS-
FEN02. The webpage displays differently, when AS-FEN02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC or AS00SCM-A (RTU mode).
They will be explained in different sections.
List of browsers that support AS-FEN02 webpage:
Provider Browser Supported versions
Microsoft Internet Explorer V10.0 and later
Microsoft Edge V20 and later
Google Chrome V14 and later
Mozilla Firefox V17 and later
Apple Safari V5.1 and later
10
10-19
 When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC

a. After the setting IP address in HWCONFIG of ISPSoft. Open your browser and enter AS-FEN02 IP address in
the search bar to connect to AS-FEN02. After the webpage appears, enter “Admin” in the User section and
click Login without entering any password. You can set up the password after login.
b. After login, you can setting items on the left section.
c. The menu shows data based on the permission of the current user.
Permission
Nodes
Administrator Read
Device information V V
Account management V X
Firmware update V X
DLR status V V
Save configuration V X
10
10-20
d. Account Management: You can set 2 kinds of access types, Administrator and Read. After the setting is done,
click Apply and save the settings in Save configuration.
e. Firmware Update: You can update the firmware of AS-FEN02 via the webpage.
f. DLR Status: You can view the current DLR status and edit the refresh cycle. It is required to use AS-FEN02
with firmware V1.04 or later for DLR function.
10
10-21
g. Save Configuration: After any setting is done, save the settings in Save Configuration to reflect the changes.
 When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS00SCM-A

a. Use the switches on AS00SCM-A to set the AS-FEN02 IP address. Open your browser and enter AS-FEN02
IP address in the search bar to connect to AS-FEN02. After the webpage appears, enter “Admin” in the User
section and click Login without entering any password. You can set up the password after login.
b. The menu shows data based on the permission of the current user. When it is installed on AS00SCM-A, you
can monitor the Hardware Status.
Permission
Nodes
Administrator Read
Device information V V
Account management V X
Firmware update V X
Hardware status V V
DLR status V V
Save configuration V X
c. Hardware Status: you can monitor the connected right-side I/O modules, including their module names, the
current values, statuses and error codes. You can edit the values in the Refresh Cycle to update the cycle.
10
10-22
10.2.8 AS-FPFN02
When AS-FPFN02 is installed on AS300 PLC CPU, this communication card can work independently and does NOT
occupy the communication port of PLC CPU. AS-FPFN02 can act as a PROFINET adapter and connect to a PROFINET
scanner to exchange data on the PROFINET Network (PN). When AS-FPFN02 is installed on AS00SCM-A, Delta AS
Series I/O modules can be used remotely. However Delta software does NOT support PN network configuration, you can
use software from the PN scanner for editing the PN parameters. After editing, you need to download the updated
parameters to the scanner and then the scanner transfers the settings to AS-FPFN02.
10.2.8.1 Supported Firmware Versions

 When installed on AS300 series PLC CPU:
The firmware of AS300 Series PLC should be V1.08 or later.
The firmware of AS-FPFN02 should be V1.00 or later.
 When installed on AS00SCM:

The firmware of AS00SCM should be V2.06 or later.
The firmware of AS-FPFN02 should be V2.00 or later.
10.2.8.2 Features
 When AS-FPFN02 is installed on AS300/AS00SCM Series PLC, it acts as a PROFINET device and
exchanges data with PN Controller.
 Architecture: you can use software from the PN scanner for editing the PN parameters. After editing, you
need to download the updated parameters to the scanner and then the scanner transfers the settings to AS-
FPFN02.
10
10-23
Item Specification
Installed on PLC AS300 AS00SCM
Communication Protocol PROFINET RT
EtherNet/IP Interface 100 Mbit with 2 x RJ45
Fieldbus PROFINET Devices
Network Cable Length 100 meter
Error Indicator System Fail (SF): Red; Bus Fail (BF): Red
Max. IO Slot Supported 17 9
Devices to Read and Write AS300 series data registers RTU modules
Minimum Time for Data Exchange to Operate 10 ms

Input: 250 words
Maximum Data Length/Per Transmission
Output: 250 words
PROFINET Configuration Download PROFINET Configurations from PN Controller
10.2.8.4 LED Indicators

System Fault Indicator
RED light ON: an error occurs in PROFINET configuration or incorrect
1 SF indicator
data for exchange
OFF: no system error
Bus Fault Indicator
RED light ON: the network connection is OFF.
2 BF indicator RED light BLINKING: the network connection is working fine but the
communication with PN Controller is NOT normal.
OFF: the communication with PN Controller is working fine.
3 LINK indicator X1/X2 Green light ON: a network connection is established
4 ACT indicator X1/X2 Orange BLINKING: data transmission
RJ-45 Pin Definition

1 TX+ 2 TX- 3 RX+ 4 N/C
5 N/C 6 RX- 7 N/C 8 N/C
10
10-24
10.2.8.5 Configuring the Data Length for I/O Module (Works with
AS300)
When AS-FPFN02 communication card is installed on AS300 Series PLC, up to 500/500 bytes of I/O address area are
available. You can use PN Controller’s Software (the example below uses Siemens TIA Portal software) to configure the
modules and set up the data size for data exchange. You can also set up the corresponding I/O module addresses to the
AS300 data register addresses. Refer to Section 10.2.8.10 for more reference. The total data size and the number of
modules used are relevant. The total usage of I/O address area should also include Device Access Point (DAP) and the
bytes for information, such as IO Production Status (IOPS) and IO Consumption Status (IOCS) of each module.
Module Type Data Length

(for both DIO and AIO modules) (IOPS & IOCS)
Slot 0 (DAP) 4 bytes
Input module 1 byte
Output module 1 byte
I/O module 2 bytes
10
10-25
Example:
The address area used is within 500/500 bytes. But you need to add bytes used on IO Production Status (IOPS) and IO
Consumption Status (IOCS) of each module too. Here the example shows the address area of the input module is taken
by 500 bytes (data length) + 4 bytes (Slot 0) + 2 bytes *7 (7 I/O modules) + 1 byte (Slot 1) = 519 bytes. The same
example shows that the address area of the output module is taken by 500 bytes (data length) + 4 bytes (Slot 0) + 2
bytes *7 (7 I/O modules) + 1 byte (Slot 9) = 519 bytes. The data exceeds the total permitted maximum data length of
500/500 bytes. An error message appears as the image shown below by TIA Portal.
Note: this error message shown indicates the IO data length is abnormal.
10
10-26
10.2.8.6 Status Register (Works with AS300)

When AS-FPFN02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC, and Slot 1 is used as status register to show the communication
card status. Up to 8 bytes of status registers can be used for displaying the status of PN Device. See the example below.
Status
Register
Name Description
(Siemens
S7-1500)
Input Data If the value is TRUE, the input data to be sent to PN Controller is valid.
%I0.0
Available If the value is 0, the input data to be sent to PN Controller is invalid.
Indicates PN connection status of Slot 2 ~ Slot 9.

%I4.0 -
If the value is TRUE, the Slot is with a working PN connection (with IO module)
%I4.7
If the value is FALSE, the Slot is without a working PN connection.
Connection
Status
Indicates PN connection status of Slot 10 ~ Slot 17.
%I5.0 -
If the value is TRUE, the Slot is with a working PN connection (with IO module)
%I5.7
If the value is FALSE, the Slot is without a working PN connection.
10
10-27
 Determine whether the input data is valid.
You can check the first bit of the bytes %I0.0 (device register) to see if the data exchange is started; this can be
used when the PN device starts to work. You can determine if the input data is valid by checking %I0.0 (device
register); if it says TRUE, the input data is valid and data exchange can begin.
 Determine if the Slot is with a working PN connection.
You can check the corresponding registers %I4.0~%I4.7 and %I5.0~%I5.7 to see if the Slot 2~17 is with a working
PN connection.
The following example shows the values in the corresponding registers %I4.0~14.22 are TRUE and that indicates
Slot 2~4 are with PN connections respectively.
10
10-28
10.2.8.7 I/O Module Selection (Works with AS00SCM-A)

When AS-FPFN02 communication card is installed on AS00SCM-A, you can use PN Controller’s Software (the example
below uses Siemens TIA Portal software) to configure the modules.
10
10-29
You can drag and drop the I/O modules to Slot 2 ~ 9. And then you can double-click the module to open the setting page
and configure the module parameters.
10.2.8.8 Status Register (Works with AS00SCM-A)

When AS-FPFN02 is installed on AS00SCM-A, and Slot 1 is used as status register. As the example image shown, the
input data length of I address is 10 words for storing the current status of AS00SCM-A. Q address occupies 10 words
and reserves for output data.
10
10-30
Status Register
Name Description
(Siemens S7-1500)
%IW2 For AS00SCM-A
Error Code
%IW4 - %IW18 For Slot 2 to slot 9
The unit for the address series is byte. The data size for each status register is one word; the indication is %IW0 (%IB0 &
%IB1) and %IW2 (%IB2 & %IB3) and so forth.
See the example below:
AS00SCM-A is working normally.
AS00SCM-A is working abnormally. Errors occur on its right side modules.
10.2.8.9 Topology
 Linear Topology
 Star Topology
10
10-31
10.2.8.10 PROFINET Device Example (Adapter)

This section shows using Siemens TIA-Portal software to create a PROFINET IO from Siemens S7-1500 and PLC and
uses the function card AS-FPFN02 to read data registers in Delta AS300 Series PLC.
1. The arrangement is as the image shown below. The connection is established by using RJ45 connectors through
Ethernet communication. The IP addresses of your PC and PN controller should be in the same network segment.
The IP address of your PN device can be edit by PN Controller; see the steps below.
2. Create a new TIA-Portal project.
10
10-32
 Add a new device
 Select a PN Controller Model
10
10-33
 Select the Project View or click Device & Network to enter the Project View.
3. Click Manage general station description files (GSDML) to install the GSD files.
10
10-34
 After the installation is complete, select Device Configuration and Network View.
10
10-35
 Find and select the just-installed device from the Catalog on the right and drag and drop the selected device to
Device View on the left.
 Connect S7-1500 and AS-FPFN02 together with an Ethernet connection and edit their IP addresses.
10
10-36
4. Define PN Device Name

 Under the option of Online access, you can find the name of the function card and that is the PROFINET device
name.
10
10-37
 Click Online & diagnostics and select Assign PROFINET device name. You can enter a new PROFINET device
name and after that click Assign name to save the change.
 Go back to the Network View and enter the new device name again in the red box as shown below.
10
10-38
5. Compile and download the project.
10
10-39
6. If the project is downloaded successfully and the operation is normal, after you click Go Online, you can see a
similar view as the image shown below. And the basic configurations are complete.
7. Data Exchange
The range of data registers in AS300 Series PLC that an AS-FPFN02 can read/write is between D0 and D29999.
10
10-40
a. Configuring the data length for I/O
Select a module and configure the data length for it, as the image shown below.
Up to 250/250 Words of I/O address area are available for I/O of AS-FPFN02. If exceeding the limit, an error message
shows up. Refer to Section 10.2.8.5 for more details.
b. Setting up the starting address of the data register to exchange data.
Enter the starting address in Module Parameters for data exchange. When entering 100 in Input D Register and 200 in
Output D Register and using a 8 Word In/Out module, the PN Controller reads values starting from D100 to D115 and
writes the values in the data register starting from D200 to D215.
10
10-41
 PN Controller transmits 8 Words of data (Q0~Q15) to the data register D200~D207 in AS300 Series PLC.
 AS-FPFN02 transmits 8 Words of data (D100~D107) to the data register I0~I15 in S7-1500.
To determine if the data exchange is successful, you can check the program in Siemens TIA-Portal software. With a
created PLC program, when clicking Main [OB1], the value in the register QW0 increments every second and that
indicates the data exchange is successful.
The data exchange can only begin when the Bit Input Data Available is TRUE. Refer to Section 10.2.8.6 for more details.
To determine if the data exchange is successful, you can check the program in ISPSoft. Use the MOVE instruction, you
can see the value in D200 moves to D100 and PN Controller can read the data and that indicates the data exchange is
successful.
10
10-42
Check if the monitor values of registers QW0 and IW0 in the Watch Table are the same to determine the data exchange
is successful and if the exchanged data is accurate.
10
10-43
10.2.9 AS-FOPC02
This communication card can work independently and does NOT occupy the communication port of PLC CPU. It can act
as OPC-UA Server or EtherNet/IP Adapter. After AS-FOPC02 is installed, you can go to HWCONFIG from ISPSoft to do
the editing in the Function Card 2 section.
All the AS-FOPC02 parameters are stored in AS300 PLC CP. If you need the IP address of AS-FOPC02, you need to go
to HWCONFIG from ISPSoft to check its IP address in the Function Card 2 section. You can also use COMMGR to see
the IP address of this device.
10.2.9.1 Supported Firmware Versions

 The firmware of AS300 Series PLC should be V1.10.00 or later for AS-FOPC02 to be installed on it.
 AS00SCM-A does NOT support AS-FOPC02. You can NOT install AS-FOPC02 on AS00SCM-A.
 ISPSoft version should be V3.11 or later.
 EIP Builder version should be V1.08 or later.
10.2.9.2 Features
 When AS-FOPC02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC, it can act as OPC-UA Server. The tag settings are the
same as the network communication settings for AS Series; refer to Section 10.5.2 from AS Series Operation
Manual for more information.
 When AS-FOPC02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC, it can act as EtherNet/IP Adapter but NOT EtherNet/IP
Scanner. dapter. The EtherNet/IP settings for AS-FOPC02 are the same as the EtherNet/IP settings for AS-
FEN02, refer to Section 10.2.7.6 for more information.
10
10-44
 System Specifications
Item Specification
Device type Slave
Topology Star and linear topologies are supported.
General When installed on AS300 PLC CPU, you can use
IP Settings
HWCONFIG from ISPSoft for editing
Availability AS300 Series PLC
View device information
Web
Functions Account management
AS-FOPC02 firmware update
 OPC-UA Specifications
Item Specification
General Device type Server
OPC-UA Server
Max. tag number 64
(1) None
Security mode (2) Sign
(3) Sign and Encrypt
(1) Basic128Rsa15
Security policy (2) Basic256
(3) Basic256Sha256
(1) Anonymous
Authentication
(2) User name/Password
Transport protocol / encoding opc.tcp / binary
Supported profiles UA v1.03 Nano Embedded Device Server Profile
 EtherNet/IP Specifications
Item Specification
General Device type Adapter
CIP connection number 8
TCP connection number 8 (Servers)
Requested Packet Interval
CIP Network I/O 1 ms~1000ms
(RPI)
Connection
Max. Transmission Speed 10,000 pps
200 bytes
transmission
Class 3 (Connected Type)
UCMM Total 8 (Servers)
(Non-Connected Type, only (for both class 3 and UCMM connection types)
uses TCP connections)
Identity Object (16#01)
CIP Network Message Router Object (16#02)
Explicit Message Assembly Object (16#04)
Connection Manager Object (16#06)
CIP Objects
Port Object (16#F4)
TCP/IP Interface Object (16#F5)
Ethernet Link Object (16#F6)
10
Not supporting self-defined objects
10-45
10.2.9.4 Topology
After installing the extension card, use HWCONFIG in ISPSoft to configure the communication.
 Linear Topology
 Star Topology
10.2.9.5 Special Data Registers (SR)
Attribute
OFF STOP RUN
Latched
Default
AS300
AS200
Series
Series
ON RUN STOP
SR1536 AS-FEN02/FOPC02 TCP current connection number ○ – 0 – – N R 0

AS-FEN02/FOPC02 EtherNet/IP Adapter connection
SR1539 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
number
Special data
Refresh time
register
SR1536
The flag is ON, when the system is refreshed automatically.
SR1539
10.2.9.6 OPC-UA Slave

When AS-FOPC02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC, it can act as an OPC-UA Sever. Follow the steps below to create
Tags on AS300 Series PLC via OPC-UA variables.
(1) Open ISPSoft and create a new project and then double-click Global OPC-UA Variables under the Global
Symbols node to open the Global OPC-UA Variables setting table.
10
10-46
(2) Right-click on the Global OPC-UA Variables setting table to see the context menu. Click Add a Symbol to open the
setting page.
(3) Set up the OPC-UA tag. See the following example for reference.
10
10-47
(4) After the settings are complete, download the settings to PLC. After that devices can read/write the Tag. The way to
connect to the Tags varies in different brands. Refer to the specific device manual for more information on using tags
to connect.
10
10-48
10.3 Profiles and Dimensions

10.3.1 AS-F232
66.3
59.3
37 23.9
Unit: mm
10.3.2 AS-F422/AS-F485/AS-F2AD/AS-F2DA
59.3
60.8
37 23.9
Unit: mm
10.3.3 AS-FCOPM
61.3
59.3
37 23.9
10
Unit: mm
10-49
10.3.4 AS-FEN02
42 25.2
1
2
88
3
4
61.5 6
Unit: mm

Green light ON: the operation is working normal
Green light BLINKING: the setting is not complete
1 MS indicator
Red light ON: internal communication fail, can NOT be recovered
Red light BLINKING: internal communication timeout
OFF: no power
Green light ON: a CIP connection is established
Green light BLINKING: a CIP connection is not established after
power-on
2 NS indicator Red light ON: duplicated IP address
Red light BLINKING: communication timeout (a CIP connection has
been established after power-on) / IP address
change
3 RJ-45 port X1/X2 For network connections
Indicate the status of Ethernet connection
Indicate the status of Ethernet communication
6 Clip ring Secures AS series

Pin No. RJ-45
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 RX-
7 N/C
10
8 N/C
10-50
10.3.5 AS-FPFN02
42 25.2
1
2
88
3
4
61.5 6
Unit: mm

System Fail Indicator
Red light ON: an error occurs in the system
1 SF indicator Example: the parameters downloaded to the Controller are different from
the actual placement, connecting port 2, instead of connecting to port 1
OFF: no system error
Bus Fail Indicator
Red light ON: the connection with PROFINET Controller is OFF.
2 BF indicator Red light BLINKING: the connection is working fine but the communication
with PROFINET Controller is NOT normal.
OFF: the connection with PN-Controller is working fine.
3 RJ-45 port X1/X2 Uses for network connections

Pin No. RJ-45
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 RX-
7 N/C
8 N/C
10
10-51
10.3.6 AS-FOPC02
42 25.2
1
2
88
3
4
61.5 6
Unit: mm

Green light ON: the operation is working normal
Green light BLINKING: the setting is not complete
1 MS indicator
Red light ON: internal communication fail, can NOT be recovered
Red light BLINKING: internal communication timeout
OFF: no power
Green light ON: a CIP / OPC-UA connection is established
Green light BLINKING: a CIP / OPC-UA connection is not established
after power-on
2 NS indicator Red light ON: duplicated IP address
Red light BLINKING: communication timeout (a CIP / OPC-UA
connection has been established after power-on)
/ IP address change
3 RJ-45 port X1/X2 For network connections
Indicate the status of Ethernet connection
Indicate the status of Ethernet communication

Pin No. RJ-45
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 RX-
7 N/C
10
8 N/C
10-52
10.4 Wiring
10.4.1 AS-F2AD
Sh iel ded cab le *1
2-wi re : curre nt i np ut
3-wire: v olta ge in put

3-wire: c urre nt i np ut
*3. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor having a
capacitance in the range of 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.
*5. The wording “CHX” indicates that you can use the five wiring methods listed above for every input channel.
10
10-53
10.4.2 AS-F2DA
Vol tage o utpu t

0V~+10V *4
CHX
V O1 CH1
*2
IO1
COM
AC motor driv e, Sh iel de d ca ble *1 *3 AG
recorder,
propor tioning v al ve
FE
C urre nt o utp ut *4
CHX
4mA ~20mA
V O2 CH2
IO2
COM
AG
AC motor driv e,
recorder, Sh iel de d ca ble *1 *3
propor tioning v al ve
FE
*2. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor having a
capacitance in the range of 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.
*4. The wording “CHX” indicates that you can use the two wiring methods listed above for every input channel.
10
10-54

(2) Select a function card on the module.
10
10-55
(3) Double-click the function card to open the Device Setting page.
Card1 Detect mode: select Auto Detect or choose the function card model.
(a) When the function card is an AS-F232, AS-F422, or AS-F485, configure the communication settings in the red
box.
(b) Function card AS-FCOM can only be installed in function card slot 2.
10
10-56
(c) Configure the communication settings in the red box.
(d) When the function card is an AS-F2AD or AS-F2DA, configure the communication settings in the red box.
(e) When the function card is an AS-FEN02, configure the communication settings in the red box.
10
10-57
(f) Click OK to confirm the settings.
(4) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note that you cannot download the parameters while
the CPU module is running.
10
10-58
11
1
Chapter 11 DeviceNet Master Scanner Module
AS01DNET-A
Table of contents
11.1 Introduction o AS01DNET-A ............................................................ 11-3
11.1.1 Feature ..................................................................................... 11-3
11.1.2 Specifications ............................................................................. 11-3
11.2 Components of AS01DNET-A ........................................................... 11-4

11.2.1 Profile and Dimensions ................................................................ 11-4
11.2.2 Components............................................................................... 11-5
11.2.3 Mode Toggle（RTU- Master/Slave）................................................ 11-5
11.2.4 DeviceNet Connector ................................................................... 11-5
11.2.5 Address Switch ........................................................................... 11-6
11.2.6 Function Switch .......................................................................... 11-6
11.2.7 Digital Displayer ......................................................................... 11-6
11.3 DeviceNet Network Communication ................................................ 11-7

11.3.1 Relationship between Transmission Distance and Baud Rate .............. 11-7
11.3.2 DeivceNet Network Topology Structure........................................... 11-7
11.3.3 Choice and Purpose of a DeviceNet Terminal Resistor ...................... 11-11
11.3.4 DeviceNet Network Supply Power ................................................. 11-12
11.4 Master /Slave Mode ....................................................................... 11-13

11.4.1 Introduction of Master/Slave Mode ............................................... 11-13
11.4.1.1. Scan List, Input Table and Output Table ..................................... 11-13
11.4.2 Installation ............................................................................... 11-14
11.4.2.1. Connecting AS01DNET-A Module to AS series PLC ....................... 11-14
11.4.2.2. Connecting the DeviceNet Communication Connector .................. 11-14
11.4.3 IO Mapping for AS01DNET in AS PLC ............................................ 11-15
11.4.3.1. Data Mapping between Modules and AS PLC............................... 11-15
11.4.3.2. Tables of Input Mapping and Output Mapping areas ..................... 11-16
11.4.4 Bit-strobe Command .................................................................. 11-17
11.4.4.1. Bit-strobe Work Principle ......................................................... 11-17
11.4.5 Network Node Status Display ....................................................... 11-18
11.4.5.1. Scan-List Node Status Indication .............................................. 11-18
11.4.5.2. Module Status Indication ......................................................... 11-18
11.4.6 Setting the Time for Data Exchange between Master and Slaves ....... 11-18
11.4.7.1. Constructing One DeviceNet Network ........................................ 11-20
11 - 1
11.4.7.2. Using DeviceNet Builder to Configure a DeviceNet Network .......... 11-21

11.4.7.3. DeviceNet Network Control...................................................... 11-28
11.4.8 Sending Explicit Message through Ladder Diagram ......................... 11-29
11.4.8.1. Principle of Explicit Message Transmission ................................. 11-29
11
11.4.8.2. Explicit Message Transmission Instruction DNETRW..................... 11-30
11.4.9 LED Indicators and Troubleshooting .............................................. 11-36
11.4.9.1. NS LED................................................................................. 11-36
11.4.9.2. MS LED ................................................................................ 11-37
11.4.9.3. Combination of MS LED and NS LED ......................................... 11-37
11.4.9.4. Digital Displayer .................................................................... 11-37
11.4.10 Master-Slave Mode Switch and 8 Baud Rates Setting via Software .... 11-39
11.4.10.1. Setting AS01DNET-A to Slave Mode ........................................ 11-39
11.4.10.2. Setting AS01DNET-A to Master Mode ...................................... 11-42
11.4.10.3. Baud Rate Setting of When AS01DNET-A is in Slave Mode .......... 11-45
11.4.10.4. Baud Rate Setting of When AS01DNET-A is in Master Mode ........ 11-48
11.5 RTU Mode ...................................................................................... 11-51

11.5.1 Introduction of AS01DNET (in RTU Mode) ...................................... 11-51
11.5.2 AS-Series Extension Modules Connectable to AS01DNET (RTU) ........ 11-52
11.5.3 Installation ............................................................................... 11-53
11.5.3.1. Installing AS01DNET (in RTU Mode) .......................................... 11-53
11.5.3.2. Connecting the Cable to DeviceNet Connector ............................ 11-54
11.5.4 Configuring AS01DNET (in RTU mode) .......................................... 11-55
11.5.4.1. Terms .................................................................................. 11-55
11.5.4.2. Introduction of Software ......................................................... 11-56
11.5.4.3. DeviceNet Mapping Data ......................................................... 11-74
11.5.4.4. Connecting AS01DNET (RTU) to the Network ............................. 11-81
11.5.5.1. Network Structure ................................................................. 11-82
11.5.5.2. Using DeviceNet Builder to Configure the Network ...................... 11-82
11.5.5.3. Using LD Program to Control the Entire Network......................... 11-91
11.5.6 Error Diagnosis and Trouble Shooting ........................................... 11-91
11.5.6.1. Indicator Diagnosis ................................................................ 11-92
11.5.6.2. Codes in Seven-Segment Displayer .......................................... 11-93
11.5.6.3. Status Word Diagnosis ............................................................ 11-95
11.5.6.4. Software Diagnosis ................................................................ 11-96
11.6 How to Call DeviceNet Builder through ISPSoft (AS-Series PLC) 11-97
11 - 2
Ch ap te r 11 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A
11.1 Introduction of AS01DNET-A

 Thank you for choosing Delta AS01DNET-A. Please read this chapter carefully before use so as to ensure correct
installation and operation of AS01DNET-A.
 The instruction is simply a guideline for operation of the product and the details on the DeviceNet protocol is 11
excluded here. Please refer to relevant articles and literatures for more details on the DeviceNet protocol.
 AS01DNET-A, a DeviceNet network module can work in two modes: master /slave and RTU. The RTU-
Master/Slave switch is used for selecting one of the two modes. When AS01DNET-A works in master/slave mode,
it makes up the DeviceNet master or slave with AS-series PLC together. When working in RTU mode, AS01DNET-
A needs an external 24VDC power supply and can connect AS-series I/O modules onits right side.
Refer to Section 11.4 and 11.5 for details about master/slave mode and RTU mode.
11.1.1 Feature
 Supports the Group 2 server slave and Group 2 only servers.
 Supports the explicit connection in the predefined master/slave connection and I/O polling connection.
 Able to work as a DeviceNet master or slave as well as a remote RTU connecting AS series I/O modules.
 The network configuration software DeviceNet Builder offers the graphical configuration interface.
 Supports the EDS file configuration in the DeviceNet network configruation tool.
 DeviceNet Connector
Item Specifications
Transmission method CAN

Electrical isolation DC500V
Connector type Removable terminal block with screws (5.08mm)
Communication cable 2 communication wires, 2 power wires and 1 shielded wire included.
 DeviceNet Communication
Item Specifications
Message type I/O polling connection, explicit connection

Standard: 125 kbps, 250 kbps and 500 kbps
Baud rate Extension: 10 kbps, 20 kbps, 50 kbps, 125 kbps, 250 kbps, 500 kbps,
800kbps and 1M bps.
 Electrical Specification
Item Specifications
Voltage The power wires of the communication cable provide 11 ~ 25 VDC.

Current 28mA (typical value), 125mA impulse current (24 VDC)
11 - 3
 Environment
Item Specifications
11 ESD (IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-2): 8KV Air Discharge

EFT (IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-4): Power Line: 2KV, Digital I/O: 1KV
Noise immunity Analog & Communication I/O: 1KV
Damped-Oscillatory Wave: Power Line: 1KV, Digital I/O: 1KV
RS (IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-3): 26MHz ~ 1GHz, 10V/m
-20ºC ~ 60ºC (Temperature); 5 ~ 95% (Humidity), no condensation;

Operating Environment
pollution degree: 2
Storage Environment -40ºC ~ 80ºC (Temperature); 5~95% (Humidity), no condensation
International standard IEC 61131-2, IEC 68-2-6 (TEST Fc)/IEC 61131-2 &
Vibration/Shock resistance
IEC 68-2-27 (TEST Ea)
Safety Conforms to IEC 61131-2, UL508

Weight 128 g
11.2 Components of AS01DNET-A

11.2.1 Profile and Dimensions
11 - 4
11.2.2 Components
01DNET 1
MS
7 2 9
11
NS
1
x10
3
IN 0
IN 1 Node Address
0
x10
8 5
6
RTU Master/ Slave
10
Mode toggle
① Model name ⑥
(RTU-Master/Slave)
② State indicators ⑦ Left-side extension port
③ Address switch ⑧ Nameplate
④ Function switch ⑨ Right-side extension port
⑤ DeviceNet communication port ⑩ 24V DC power input port for RTU mode
Note:
The power input port of the network module is required to connect an external 24VDC power supply only when the toggle
(RTU- Master/Slave) is switched to RTU mode. Otherwise, the port does not need an external 24VDC power supply
connected when the toggle (RTU- Master/Slave) is switched to Master/Slave mode.
11.2.3 Mode Toggle（RTU- Master/Slave）
Mode Selection Description
Works in master or slave mode and constitutes a

Master/Slave DeviceNet master or slave without external
power supply.
When working in remote (RTU) mode,
AS01DNET-A is required to connect the external RT U M a ste r/Sl ave
RTU
DC 24V power supply and can have AS series
I/O modules connected on its right side.
11.2.4 DeviceNet Connector

The connector is used for the connection to DeviceNet. Wire by using the connector enclosed with AS01DNET –A.
Pin Signal Color Description

1 V- Black 0 VDC
2 CAN_L Blue Signal-
3 SHIELD - Shielded wire
4 CAN_H White Signal+
5 V+ Red 24 VDC
11 - 5
11.2.5 Address Switch

The switch is used for setting up the node address of AS01DNET-A in DeviceNet network. Range: 00~63 (64~99
are forbidden.)
11
Switch setting Description 2 3
4
0 1
x10
1
5 6
9
7 8
0 … 63 Valid DeviceNet node address Node Address
2 3
4
0 1
x10
0
5 6
9
64…99 Invalid DeviceNet node address
7 8
Example: If users need to set the node address of AS01DNET-A to 26, simply switch the corresponding switch of
x101 to 2 and the corresponding switch of x100 to 6.
Note:
 After the setup is completed, repower AS01DNET-A.
 While AS01DNET-A is working, changing the setting of the node address is invalid.
 Rotate the switch carefully with a slotted screwdriver to prevent damage to the switch.
11.2.6 Function Switch

 The function switches are used for:
 Setting up the work mode (IN0)
 Setting up the baud rate of DeviceNet network (DR0~DR1)
DR1 DR0 Baud Rate

OFF OFF 125 Kbps
OFF ON 250 Kbps IN 0
ON OFF 500 Kbps IN 1
ON ON Entering the mode of extended baud rate
ON When the slave is off-line, the I/O data in the buffer area will be held.
IN0
OFF When the slave is off-line, the I/O data in the buffer area will be cleared.
IN1 Reserved
Note:
 After the setup of the function switch is completed during power off, repower AS01DNET-A.
 While AS01DNET-A is working, changing the setting of the node address is invalid.
 Adjust the DIP switch carefully with a slotted screwdriver to prevent any damage to the switch.
11.2.7 Digital Displayer

01DNET
 The digital displayer provides following functions:
MS
 Showing the node address of AS01DNET-A and error ID

NS
 Showing the error information about a slave
11 - 6
11.3 DeviceNet Network Communication

11.3.1 Relationship between Transmission Distance and Baud Rate
The transmission distance of a DeivceNet network is determined by the baud rate. The following table shows the
corresponding maximum communication distance at different baud rates. 11
Baud rate (bits/s) 10K 20K 50K 125K 250K 500K 800K 1M
Max. transmission
5000 2500 1000 500 250 100 50 25
distance (M)
11.3.2 DeivceNet Network Topology Structure
11 - 7
List of Delta DeviceNet Fieldbus Network Products:
Product picture Model Function
11
1. AS01DNET-A, a DeviceNet module running on
the right of AS PLC can work as a DeviceNet
master or slave.
AS01DNET-A 2. AS01DNET-A can also be used as AS series
remote IO module for connecting AS series
DI/DO modules and AI/AO modules to DeviceNet
network.
AH10DNET-5A, a DeviceNet module, running on the

AH10DNET-5A right of AH500 series PLC can work as a DeviceNet
master or slave.
AHRTU-DNET-5A, a remote I/O module of AH

series, is used for connecting AH500 series DI/DO
AHRTU-DNET-5A
module, AI/AO module and 10SCM module to
DeviceNet network.
DVPDNET-SL, a DeviceNet module, running on the

DVPDNET-SL left of S series PLC can work as a DeviceNet
master or slave.
RTU-DNET, a remote I/O module of S series, is

RTU-DNET used for connecting S-series DI/DO module, AI/AO
module and other device to DeviceNet network.
11 - 8
Used for connection of the DeviceNet network and
IFD9502
electromechanical equipment such as AC motor 11
drive, PLC, temperature controller, servo drive, HMI,
user-defined device.
A fieldbus data analysis tool, with one end: CAN

interface and the other end: USB interface can be
IFD6503 used for getting the CAN data or sending the data to
the CAN node. It is used with the Netview Builder
software together.
Used for connecting AC motor drive to DeviceNet

E-series AC motor drive
network via CME-DN01 card.
Used for connecting C2000 series AC motor drive to

CMC-DN01
the DeviceNet network.
Used for the connection of DeviceNet network and

DN-02
AC motor drive.

DVPDT01-S
S series PLC.
11 - 9
11
DVPDT02-H2
DVP-EH2 series PLC.
The distribution box for CAN topology, with the 120

TAP-CP01 ohm resistor enclosed which is controlled to take
effect or not via its switch.

TAP-CN01 ohm resistor enclosed which is controlled to take

TAP-CN02 ohm resistor enclosed which is controlled to take
UC-DN01Z-01A UC-DN01Z-01A: DeviceNet trunk cable.
UC-DN01Z-02A UC-DN01Z-02A: DeviceNet branch cable.
11 - 1 0
11.3.3 Choice and Purpose of a DeviceNet Terminal Resistor

 Choice of a DeviceNet Terminal Resistor
A DeviceNet network requires two terminal resistors of 121 Ω connected at both ends of the trunk cable respectively.
The thick cable represents the trunk cable, the thin cable represents the branch cable and the yellow boxes at the two
11
ends are terminal resistors in the following figure.
 Purpose of a DeviceNet Terminal Resistor
The terminal resistor is used for eliminating the signal reflection in the communication cable.
All signal transmission cables have the characteristic impedance. The characteristic impedance of Delta DeviceNet
communication cable is about 121 Ω.
When being transmitted to the end of the communication cable, because the impedance of the end is different from the
characteristic impedance, the signal will be reflected, which will interfere with the new signal and the signal wave form
distortion will happen.
The phenomenon of the signal wave form distortion is not obvious in the short-distance transmission. But the wave form
distortion will become severer in the increasingly long communication cable. Therefore, the two ends of the trunk cable
must be installed with the terminal resistors respectively.
 Installation Position of Terminal Resistors
The DeviceNet communication cable consists of five wires such as red wire, blue wire, white wire, black wire and shielded
wire as below.
The terminal resistors must be installed to the two ends of the trunk cable only. Since the blue wire and white wire are
for signal transmission, both of the terminal resistors must be installed between blue wire and white wire at the two ends
of the main cable.
11 - 11
11.3.4 DeviceNet Network Supply Power

The network requires one or multiple supply powers to supply the power to each piece of network equipment via the bus
cable.
11 Delta DeviceNet communication cable consists of five wires, among which the power cable and signal cable occupy two
wires respectively and the one on the left is the shielded wire as the above figure shows.
The supply power for the bus is optional and could be a single supply power or multiple supply powers according to the
actual demand.
 Single Supply Power
 Multiple Supply Powers
11 - 1 2
11.4 Master /Slave Mode

11.4.1 Introduction of Master/Slave Mode
AS01DNET-A can work as a DeviceNet master as well as slave with at most 4 AS01DNET modules connectable to the
right side of AS PLC. Running on the right of AS-series PLC, AS01DNET-A with AS-series PLC together constitutes the 11
DeviceNet master or slave. When working in Master/Slave mode, AS01DNET-A is required to switch the function toggle
(RTU- Master/Slave) to Master/Slave mode and the DeviceNet Builder of version 2.04 and above is used for the setup.
For details about the setup, refer to Section 11.4.10.
 As a master, AS01DNET-A can provide the following function.
 Supporting the Client function of Explicit message;
 Supporting IO polling connection with slaves;
 The network configuration software DeviceNet Builder provides graphic configuration interface.
 Sending explicit messages to read and write the data in slave through the explicit message instruction
DNETRW.
 Automatically performing data exchange with the PLC module; users just need write a program for D register
in the PLC without using FROM/TO instructions.
 Offering 190 bytes of output data area and 190 bytes of input data area for exchanging data with the master.
 As a slave, AS01DNET-A can provide the following function.
 Explicit message Server and Group 2 only server connection mode;
 Polling connection;
 Offering 200 bytes of input data area and 200 bytes of output data area for exchanging data with master;
 Automatically exchanging data with the PLC. The user just need to write a program for D register in the PLC
without using FROM/TO instruction.
11.4.1.1. Scan List, Input Table and Output Table
Item Description Figure
Before AS01DNET-A module works, the scan list

must be configured through the configuration
software. The scan list stores slave information
including node address, I/O type, I/O size and etc. for
data exchange. The scanner module manages the
Scan List
slaves in the scan list, makes a connection with
slaves and exchange I/O data with them. For those
slaves which have not been configured to the scan
list, AS01DNET-A will not make a connection and I/O
data exchange with them.
11 - 1 3
The scanner module provides an input table of total

size: 190 bytes and an output table of total size: 190
bytes for data exchange with slaves. When one slave
is configured to the scan list, the configuration
11 software will automatically assign corresponding size
of I/O data exchange area to the slave. Input Table
and Output Table are the interface for data exchange
Input/output between the PLC of the master and slaves and show
Table the mapping relationships between the D registers in
the PLC of the master and the I/O data of slaves.
After the configuration is finished, download the
configuration data to the scanner module. Then the
module will exchange I/O data with corresponding
slaves according to the configuration. The data in the
output table will be transmitted to slaves and the data
returned from slaves will be filled in the input table.
11.4.2 Installation
11.4.2.1. Connecting AS01DNET-A Module to AS series PLC
For the details on how AS01DNET-A (in Master/slave mode) is connected to AS series PLC, refer to Section 1.3.1
Installing a Module in AS Series Module Manual.
11.4.2.2. Connecting the DeviceNet Communication Connector
 Make sure that the color marks for the PINs of the DeviceNet connection port match the colors of the connection
cables and the cable should be connected to the right PIN.
 Delta’s power module is recommended as the power module in the communication.
11 - 1 4
11.4.3 IO Mapping for AS01DNET in AS PLC

11.4.3.1. Data Mapping between Modules and AS PLC
Up to four AS01DENT modules can be connected to the right side of AS PLC at most. After AS01DNET modules and
PLC are connected, PLC will assign data mapping areas to each module. 11
POWER
01DNET 01DNET 01DNET 01DNET
RUN MS MS MS MS
ERROR
BAT. LOW NS NS NS NS
COM1
COM2
AS324MT 40
IN 0
x10
IN 0
x10
IN 0
x10
IN 0
x10
IN 1 Node Address IN 1 Node Address IN 1 Node Address IN 1 Node Address
0 8 x10 x10 x10 x10

1 9
2 10
3 11
IN
4
5
6
7
0 8
1 9
Ethernet
2 10
3 11
OUT
4 2 1
5
6
7
RTU Master/ Slave RTU Master/ Slave RTU Master/ Slave RTU Master/ Slave
AS01DNET modules are connected to the right of the PLC. The position of the first module on the right of AS PLC is 1, the
second module is 2, the third module is 3 and the fourth module is 4. The position is only defined for network modules such
as AS01DNET and AS00SCM, instead of digital modules, analog modules, temperature modules, and weight-
measurement modules. The positions of AS01DNET modules on the right of the PLC are shown in the following table
where there are two arrangement ways of module connections.
Example 1 Example 2
Arrangement order of Arrangement order of

Position of AS01DNET Position of AS01DNET
AS PLC and modules AS PLC and modules
on the right of the PLC on the right of the PLC
on the right of the PLC on the right of the PLC
AS PLC AS PLC
1 AS01DNET 1 AS01DNET
AS04AD AS04AD
2 AS01DNET AS00SCM
3 AS01DNET
11 - 1 5
When AS01DNET is at different positions of the right of the PLC, the input and output mapping areas for the AS01DNET
module in AS PLC are listed in the following table.
Position of
AS01DNET on
11 the right of the
Output mapping area Input mapping area
PLC
1 D26100 – D26199 D26000 – D26099
2 D26500 – D26599 D26400 – D26499
3 D26900 – D26999 D26800 – D26899
4 D27300 – D27399 D27200 – D27299
11.4.3.2. Tables of Input Mapping and Output Mapping areas
 When AS01DNET works in master mode, the input and output mapping areas for AS01DNET at different
positions of the right of AS PLC are listed in the following table.
Position of Output mapping area (for sending data to Input mapping area (for receiving data from
AS01DNET the slave) the slave)
on the right Data Data
D register Mapping area D register Mapping area
of the PLC size size
Scan-list node
Bit-strobe 4 4
D26100~D26103 D26000~D26003 status indication
command area words words
area
Module status
1 D26104 Reserved 1word D26004 1 word
indication area
DeviceNet
95 DeviceNet input 95
D26105~D26199 output data D26005~D26099
words data area words
area
Scan-list node
Bit-strobe 4 4
area
Module status
indication area
DeviceNet
D26505~D26599 output data D26405~D26499
area
Scan-list node
Bit-strobe 4 4
area
Module status
indication area
DeviceNet
D26905~D26999 output data D26805~D26899
area
Scan-list node
Bit-strobe 4 4
area
4
Module status
D27304 Reserved 1word D27204 1 word
indication area
D27305~D27399 DeviceNet 95 D27205~D27299 DeviceNet input 95
11 - 1 6
Position of Output mapping area (for sending data to Input mapping area (for receiving data from
AS01DNET the slave) the slave)
on the right Data Data
D register Mapping area D register Mapping area
of the PLC size size
output data words data area words 11
area
Note: See Section 11.4.5 for further explanation of scan-list node status indication areas and module status indication
areas. The input and output mentioned here are defined in the perspective of the master of the entire fieldbus system.
 When AS01DNET works in slave mode, the input and output mapping areas for AS01DNET at different positions
of the right of AS PLC are listed in the following table.
Position of Area for sending data to the master Area for receiving data from the master
AS01DNET on
the right of the
D register Data length D register Data length
PLC
1 D26100~D26199 100 words D26000~D26099 100 words
2 D26500 – D26599 100 words D26400 – D26499 100 words
3 D26900 – D26999 100 words D26800 – D26899 100 words
4 D27300 – D27399 100 words D27200 – D27299 100 words
11.4.4 Bit-strobe Command

11.4.4.1. Bit-strobe Work Principle
Bit strobe is one of the standard DeviceNet I/O transmission methods. The command length is fixed to 8 bytes, i.e. 64
bits. (Maximum 64 stations exist in a DeviceNet network.) One bit corresponds to one node. The following table takes
the first AS01DNET on the right of AS PLC for example.
Bit-strobe Corresponding network node

register b15 b14 b13 …… b1 b0
D26100 Node 15 Node 14 Node 13 …… Node 1 Node 0
When the value of bit0 of D26100 is 0, node 0 is selected and need return data to the master.
When the values of bit0 and bit1 of D26100 are both 0, node 0 and node 1 are selected and they need return data to the
master.
D6283 D6282
b31 b30 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b2 b1 b0
Node 0
Node 1
Node 2
Node 14
In the bit-strobe method, the master does not send control data to the slave node. However, the slave node need return
I/O data to the master if the corresponding bit is set to 0. If the corresponding bit is set to 1, the slave node does not need
to return I/O data to the master.
11 - 1 7
11.4.5 Network Node Status Display

11.4.5.1. Scan-List Node Status Indication
The following table takes the first AS01DNET on the right of AS PLC for example. AS01DNET master can monitor whether
the configured slave is online or not in real time and have the status of the configured slave mapped to one bit. Users can
11 get the status of network nodes by monitoring the contents in D26000~D26003. The corresponding relationships between
devices in the PLC and network nodes are shown in the following table. If the node in Scan List is normal, the corresponding
bit is OFF. If the node in Scan List is abnormal, the corresponding bit is ON.
Register in Corresponding network node

the PLC b15 b14 b13 …… b1 b0
D26000 Node15 Node 14 Node 13 …… Node 1 Node 0
11.4.5.2. Module Status Indication

The following table takes the first AS01DNET on the right of AS PLC for example. Users can get the status of the network
node by monitoring the content in D26004. When the module works normally, the content in D26004 is 0. When the module
is initializing, the content in the high byte of D26004 is 1 and the content in the low byte is 0. When an error occurs in the
module, the content in the high byte of D26004 is 2 and the content in the low byte is an error code. For details on error
codes, see Digital Displayer.
Register in Description
the PLC b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Module status
D26004 Error code in the module
（0：Normal，1：Initializing，2：error）
11.4.6 Setting the Time for Data Exchange between Master and
Slaves
When AS01DNET works in master mode, the period of time for a data exchange between master and all slaves need be
set. Master and all salves will periodically perform the data exchange based on the set time. See the following explanation
for details. Click menu Network >> Scanner Setting on the DeviceNet Builder software page. The Scanner Setting
window appears as below.
11 - 1 8
The explanation of Scan Interval Time and Expected Packet Rate is shown in the following table.
The period of time needed for a data exchange between master and all slaves.
Scan Interval Time
Master and all salves will periodically exchange data based on the set interval time.
Sets the timeout time for connection of master and slaves. The calculation method:
4 X EPR with the unit: ms. The default EPR is 75. The EPR for the connection of 11
Expected Packet Rate master and slaves is 4 X 75 = 300ms. The value indicates that the IO data exchange
(EPR) should be achieved once at least within 300 ms. Otherwise, the connection will fail
due to communication timeout and then the connection will have to be re-made so
that the IO data exchange can proceed.
Since most DeviceNet slaves only support polled IO data exchange, the EPR value is related to the value of Scan
Interval Time. Make sure that the actual setting must meet the following condition.
Scan Interval Time < （4 X EPR）
We suggest users refer to the following condition while setting the value of Scan Interval Time.
Scan Interval Time < （4 X EPR）/ 5
Click the Calculate Time button. The Calculate Scan Interval Time dialog box comes out. Clicking the Calculate button,
the values of Total input size, Total output size and Scan Interval Time are calculated. The value of Scan Interval Time
is a value in theory. We suggest users should set the scan interval time to a value slightly greater than the actually
calculated time. The scan interval time calculated here will not be filled in the Scan Interval Time box automatically and
so users need enter the value manually.
11.4.7 Application Example
To explain how to configure a DeviceNet network through an application example
Control requirement: AS PLC remotely monitors D26105~D26108 and D26005~D26008 in AS module through
DeviceNet network to achieve the data exchange as AS01DNET-A works as master and slave respectively.
11 - 1 9
11.4.7.1. Constructing One DeviceNet Network
This section describes how to construct a DeviceNet network configuration through an application example. Before
constructing a DeviceNet network, users should understand the control requirement of the network; plan the data for
11 exchange in advance such as maximum communication distance, slaves, total data length for exchange as well as the
requreiment for response time during data exchange.
The information above will determine whether the constructed network is reasonable and able to meet the demand. Even
it will directly affect the future maintenance and convenience of network capacity expansion and upgrade.
 Connection Figure
Note: Both of the ends of the DeviceNet Bus cable must connect one 121Ω terminal resistor respectively. The terminal
resistor is connected between CAN_H and CAN_L.
 Modules Setting
Prepare two AS PLCs and two AS01DNET-A modules for constructing one DeviceNet network. The setups for two
AS01DNET-A modules are shown in the follwing table.
DeviceNet network module Node address Baud rate
AS01DNET-A (Master) 0 500kbps

AS01DNET-A (Slave) 1 500kbps
11 - 2 0
11.4.7.2. Using DeviceNet Builder to Configure a DeviceNet Network
 Configuring DeviceNet slave
1. Set the driver for the connection of AS PLC and PC. Clicking Add, the Driver Properties dialog box appears.
Select the connection type for AS PLC and PC in the Type field. In this example, select Ethernet as the 11
connection type. Click Search to search the PLC and then click OK after searching is finished.
11 - 2 1
11
2. Opening the DeviceNet Builder software, the following window appears.
11 - 2 2
3. Selecting Setup>> Communication Setting, the following dialog box appears. Select the driver for
connection of AS PLC and PC as below. Click OK to finish the selection of Driver.
11
4. Click Network >> Online to scan the connected master.
5. Click Network>> Scan DeviceNet Network.
11 - 2 3
6. After scanning is finished, all node icons and device names which have been scanned in the network will
appear on the following interface. The node address of AS01DNET-A is 00 in this example.
11
7. Double click the icon of AS01DNET Slave. Then the Node Configuration… dialogue box appears. Input Size
and Output Size are both set to 8 bytes. Click OK to finish the setting.
11 - 2 4
8. Right click the icon of AS01DNET Slave and click Parameter Edit… on the drop-down menu. The Parameters
Edit… dialog box appears and Polled Input Length and Polled Output Length are both set to 8 bytes as
shown in the following red box. Then click Write button. Click OK after writing is finished. Afterwards, repower
AS01DNETSlave.
11
11 - 2 5
 Configuring AS01DNET-A
1. Double click the icon of AS01DNET Scanner (node 0). The Scanner Module Configuration… dialog box
appears. The left list shows the current available node AS01DNET Slave and the right Scan List is empty as
below.
11
11 - 2 6
2. Move the DeviceNet slaves from the left list to Scan List of the right side. Follows the steps: Select one
DeviceNet slave node and then click > . Then the DeviceNet slave nodes are moved to the Scan List one
by one.
11
3. Click OK to finish the configuration above. Then download the configuration data to AS01DNET-A. During
the download, the Warning dialog box will pop out if AS PLC is in RUN mode. Click OK to continue the
download.
11 - 2 7
 Configure the DeviceNet network by following the steps above. The IO data mappings between
AS01DNET-A and the slave are shown in the following tables.
 AS01DNET-A → Slave
11 AS PLC AS01DNET(Master) AS01DNET(Slave) AS PLC

D26105 D26000
D26106 D26001
D26107 D26002
D26108 D26003
 Slave → AS01DNET-A
AS PLC AS01DNET(Master) AS01DNET(Slave) AS PLC

D26005 D26100
D26006 D26101
D26007 D26102
D26008 D26103
 Saving configuration data
Select File>> Save to save current network configuration.
11.4.7.3. DeviceNet Network Control
This section describes how to write a ladder program to achieve the control requirement of the DeviceNet network.
 PLC Programs
 The program in the PLC connecting AS01DNET slave:
Program Explanation:
The contents in D26000~D26003 are the data received from the master and the contents in D26100~D26103
are the data transmitted to the master. SM400 is a normally open contact. The program above can make the
contents in D26000~D26003 move to D26100~D26103.
 The program in the PLC connecting AS01DNET master:
11 - 2 8
11
1. When M0 changes to ON, the value 16#5555 is written to D26105~D26108 in AS PLC. The data are
transmitted to the slave cyclically via DeviceNet Bus.
2. The contents in D26005~D26008 are the data which the master receives from the slave via DeviceNet
Bus. When M1 changes to ON, the data in D26005~D26008 are moved to D0, D1, D2 and D3.
11.4.8 Sending Explicit Message through Ladder Diagram

AS01DNET-A supports the sending of explicit messages via DNETRW instruction.
11.4.8.1. Principle of Explicit Message Transmission
1. AS PLC transmits the explicit request message to AS01DNET-A master according to the user program.
2. AS01DNET-A transmits the explicit request message to the slave according to the user program.
3. The slave sends back the response message to AS01DNET-A master after handling data.
4. AS PLC gets back the response message from AS01DNET-A master. Then the explicit message transmission of this
time is finished.
11 - 2 9
11.4.8.2. Explicit Message Transmission Instruction DNETRW
 DNETRW instruction:
API Instruction code Operand Function

11
S1，S2，S3，S4，S5，S6，S7，S8，S9， Read and write DeviceNet
1818 DNETRW
S10，D1，D2，D3，D4，D5 communication data
Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1    
S2    
S3    
S4    
S5    
S6    
S7    
S8 
S9    
S10    
D1   
D2   
D3 
D4 
D5 
DWORD
STRING
LWORD
WORD
LREAL
BOOL
REAL
UINT
DINT
LINT
TMR
CNT
INT
Data type
S1   
S2   
S3   
S4   
S5   
S6   
S7   
S8   
S9   
S10   
D1 
D2 
D3   
D4   
D5   
Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS AS
11 - 3 0
 Symbol:
DNETRW
S1 D1
S2 D2
S3 D3 11
S4 D4
S5 D5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S 10
S1 The sequence number of the DeviceNet communication module
S2 DeviceNet node address (MAC ID)
S3 Service Code
S4 Class ID
S5 Instance ID
S6 Attribute ID
S7 Written-data size
S8 The start device where written data are stored
S9 Communication timeout time
S10 Times of re-transmission
D1 Completion flag
D2 Error flag
D3 Error code
D4 Read-data size
D5 The start device where read data are stored
 Explanation:
 S1 is the sequence number of the module on the right of the PLC. The number of the first module is 1; the
second module is 2 and so on. Any type of module need be numbered within the range of 1~32. If the number
is out of the range, the instruction will take the minimum (1) or maximum (32) for operation.
 S2 is a DeviceNet node address within the range of 0~63. Users can specify the node address of a slave
which the master is to read and write. It also can be the node address of the master, which means to read and
write the data in the master.
11 - 3 1
 S3 is DeviceNet service code:
Service code Explanation

0x01 Get all attributes (Get_Attribute_All)
11 0x02 Set all attributes (Set_Attribute_All)

0x0E Get one single attribute (Get_Attribute_Single)
0x10 Set one single attribute (Set_Attribute_Single)
 S4, S5 and S6 represent Class ID, Instance ID and Attribute ID respectively.
 S7 is the written-data size with the unit: Byte.
 S8 is the start device where written data are stored. The data are arranged in the order from low byte to high
byte.
 S9 is the communication timeout time within the range: 1~100 and with the unit: 0.1 second.
 S10 is the times of re-transmission within the range: 0~3. When communication timeout occurs, the
communication will be resent
 D3 represents the error codes to read and write.
Error Code
Explanation
Code 1 (High Byte) Code 2 (Low Byte)
XX FF Not conform to the DeviceNet standard
20 01 The target slave does not exist.
20 02 Unable to make the connection with the slave
20 03 Sending explicit message failed.
16 00 Explicit message response timeout.
 D4 is the read-data size with the unit: Byte.
 D5 is the start device where read data are stored. The data are arranged in the order from low byte to high
byte.
 D1 and D2 are communication completion flag and error flag respectively.
 Application Example 1
Control requirement: when M0=ON, read the data of class1>>instance1>>attribute1 of the DeviceNet function
card CMC-DN01.
 Connection Figure
POWER
01DNET
RUN MS
ERROR
BAT. LOW NS
COM1
COM2
AS324MT 40
IN 0
x10
IN 1 Node Address
0 8 x10
1 9
2 10
3 11
IN
4
5
6
DeviceNet
7
0 8
1 9
Ethernet
2 10
3 11
OUT
4 2 1
5
6
7
RTU Master/ Slave
11 - 3 2
 Parameters Setting and Device Explanation
 Setup for AS01DNET-A
Parameter Setting value Description

Node ID 00 Set the node ID of AS01DNET-A to 00. 11
Baud rate 500 kbps Set the baud rate of AS01DNET-A to 500 kbps.
 Setup for VFD-C2000

00-20 08 Frequency command source
00-21 05 Operation command source
09-30 0 Communication decoding method
09-70 01 Node ID of AC motor drive
09-71 02 Baud rate: 500Kbps
 PLC Program
 S1: The number of the module sending DeviceNet communication. The first one of the right side is 01.
 S2：DeviceNet node ID (MAC ID); Node ID of VFD-C2000: 01.
 S3：Service code; 0X0E: read one single attribute content.
 S4：Class ID; Class ID of CMC-DN01: 01;
 S5：Instance ID; Instance ID of CMC-DN01: 01;
 S6：Attribute ID; Attribute ID of CMC-DN01: 01；
 S7：Write data size. When DNETRW instruction is used to read data, the value in S7 can be set to any
data.
 S8：The start device where the written data are stored. When DNETRW instruction is used to read data,
the value in S8 can be set to any data.
 S9：Communication timeout time
 S10：Times of re-transmission. Times of re-sending communication when communication timeout occurs.
 D1：Completion flag
11 - 3 3
 D2：Error flag
 D3：Error code
 D4：Read data size

11
 D5：The start device where data are read.
 Program Explanation
 When M0 changes to ON, execute the explicit message instruction DNETRW to read Class 1 >> Instance
1 >> Attribute 1 of the target equipment with node ID: 01. If the explicit message communication succeeds,
the completion flag M1 changes to ON.
 When M0 changes to ON, AS01DNET-A sends out the request message only once. If the request
message is to be resent, the instruction DNETRW need be re-triggered.
 If the data reading succeeds, the content of Class 1>> Instance1 >> Attribute 1 of CMC-DN01 will be
stored in D5. In this example, the content in D5 should be 031FHex.
 Application Example 2
Control requirement: When M1 changes to ON, set the content of Class ID: 0x05>> Instance 1>>Attribute ID:
09 of CMC-DN01 to 000AHex.
 Connection figure
POWER
01DNET
RUN MS
ERROR
BAT. LOW NS
COM1
COM2
AS324MT 40
IN 0
x10
IN 1 Node Address
0 8 x10
1 9
2 10
3 11
IN
4
5
6
DeviceNet
7
0 8
1 9
Ethernet
2 10
3 11
OUT
4 2 1
5
6
7
RTU Master/ Slave
 Parameters Setting and Device Explanation
 Setup for AS01DNET-A

Node ID 00 Set the node ID of AS01DNET-A to 00.
Baud rate 500 kbps Set the baud rate of AS01DNET-A to 500 kbps.
 Setup for VFD-C2000

00-20 08 Frequency command source
00-21 05 Operation command source
09-30 0 Communication decoding method
09-70 01 Node ID of AC motor drive
09-71 02 Baud rate: 500Kbps
11 - 3 4
 PLC Program
11
 S1：The number of the module sending DeviceNet communication. The first one of the right side is 01.
 S2：DeviceNet node ID (MAC ID); Node ID of VFD-C2000: 00.
 S3：Service code; 0X10: read one single attribute content.
 S4：Class ID; Class ID of CMC-DN01: 05.
 S5：Instance ID; Instance ID of CMC-DN01: 01.
 S6：Attribute ID; Attribute ID of CMC-DN01: 09.
 S7：Write data size with the unit: Byte. The written-data size is 2 in this example.
 S8：The start device where the written data are stored.
 S9：Communication timeout time.
 S10：Times of re-transmission. Times of re-sending communication when communication timeout occurs.
 D1：Completion flag.
 D2：Error flag.
 D3：Error code.
 D4：Read data size. When DNETRW instruction is used to write data, the value in D4 can be set to any
data.
 D5：The start device where read data are stored. When DNETRW instruction is used to write data, the
value in D5 can be set to any data.
11 - 3 5
 Program Explanation
 When M0 changes to ON, AS01DNET-A sends the request message and 000AHex is written to Class
ID: 05>> Instance 1 >> Attribute ID: 09 of the target equipment with node ID: 01. If explicit message
communication succeeds, the completion flag M1 changes to ON.
11
 When M0 changes to ON, AS01DNET-A sends out the request message only once. If the request
message is to be resent, the instruction DNETRW need be re-triggered.
11.4.9 LED Indicators and Troubleshooting

AS01DNET-A has two LED indicators and one digital displayer. NS LED and MS LED display the connection status of
AS01DNET-A. The digital displayer shows the node address and error information of AS01DNET-A as well as error
information of the slave.
01DNET
MS
NS
11.4.9.1. NS LED
LED status Indication Correction

1. Check if AS01DNET-A is powered and the connection
No power;
is normal.
OFF Or duplicate ID check has not been
2. Make sure that at least one node can communicate
completed.
normally.
Green light
blinking
The connection to the DeviceNet No correction;
(ON:0.5s and
network failed. Refer to Digital Displayer for troubleshooting.
OFF: 0.5s
alternately)
Online;
Green light ON The connection to the DeviceNet No correction
network is normal.
Red light
blinking
(ON:0.5s and Communication error Refer to Digital Displayer for troubleshooting.
OFF: 0.5s
alternately)
1. Make sure that all the devices in the network have
their unique node addresses.
Network trouble, duplicate node ID, no 2. Check if the network installation is correct.
Red light ON
network power or Bus-OFF. 3. Check if the baud rates of the master and slave are
same.
4. Check if the network power is normal.
11 - 3 6
11.4.9.2. MS LED
LED status Indication Correction

Make sure that the power supply for AS01DNET-A is
OFF No power
normal and the connection is proper.
11
Green light
blinking
Configure the scan list and then download the
(ON:0.5s and No module is configured.
configuration to AS01DNET.
OFF: 0.5s
alternately)
Green light ON Input and output data are normal. --
Red light When AS01DNET works as the
blinking master, the slave in Scan List can not Refer to Digital Displayer.
(ON:0.5s and work normally. Make sure that the slave information in Scan List
OFF: 0.5s When AS01DNET works as the slave, matches that of the actually connected slave.
alternately) an error occurs in the configuration.
1. Check if the configuration is correct.
Red light ON An error inside AS01DNET 2. Return the module to factory for repair if the error still
exists after repower ON.
11.4.9.3. Combination of MS LED and NS LED
LED status
Indication Correction
NS LED MS LED
OFF OFF No power Check if the power supply for AS01DNET-A is normal.
Make sure that the baud rate of at least one node in the
Green light Duplicate ID check has
OFF network is the same as that of the module and their
ON not been completed.
communication is normal.
Green light Duplicate ID check failed 1. Ensure that the node ID of AS01DNET is unique.
Red light ON
ON or Bus-OFF. 2. Repower the module.
Red light
blinking
1. Check if the network cable connection is proper.
Red light ON (ON:0.5s and No network power
2. Check if the network power supply is normal.
OFF: 0.5s
alternately)
Red light ON Red light ON Hardware error Return the module to the factory for repair.
11.4.9.4. Digital Displayer
Code Explanation Correction

Node address of AS01DNET-A
0~63 --
(in normal operation)
80 AS01DNET-A is in STOP status. Turn the PLC to RUN and start I/O data exchange
The node ID of AS01DNET is the
1. Ensure that the node address of AS01DNET is unique.
F0 same as that of other node or
2. Re-power AS01DNET.
exceeds the allowed range.
No slave is configured in Scan Configure the scan list and then download the configuration to
F1
List. AS01DNET.
Too low voltage of the work
F2 Check if the power supply for AS01DNET and the PLC is normal.
power
Switch the function switch IN1 from On to Off and re-power
F3 AS01DNET enters the test mode
AS01DNET-A.
11 - 3 7

1. Check if the network cable is normal and the shielded cable is
grounded.
2. Check if the baud rates of all nodes in the network are same.
F4 BUS-OFF
11 3. Check if the start and end of the network cable are both connected
with a 121Ω terminal resistor.
4. Re-power AS01DNET-A.
1. Check if the network cable is normal.
F5 No network power
2. Ensure that the network power is normal.
Internal error; Flash or RAM If the error still exists after re-power, send AS01DNET-A back to the
F6
check error factory for repair.
Error produced in factory If the error still exists after re-power, send AS01DNET-A back to the
F8
manufacturing factory for repair.
Internal error; EEPROM access If the error still exists after re-power, send AS01DNET-A back to the
F9
failure factory for repair.
1. Configure the network correctly and re-download it to AS01DNET-
A.
FA Invalid configuration data
2. Check if the node address of one slave in the scan list is the same
as that of AS01DNET-A.
1. Check if there is any change in node ID of the slave in the
Identification parameters returned
network.
E0 from the slave do not match the
2. Check if some node device in the network is replaced.
configuration data.
3. Re-configure the network.
I/O Data size returned does not Re-configure I/O data size of the slave, download the configuration to
E1
match that in the scan list. AS01DNET-A and run the PLC.
The slave device in the scan list
does not exist or is offline when 1. Check if there is a change in the node address of the slave.
AS01DNET-A is in master mode. 2. Check if the communication cable is disconnected or connected
E2 The I/O connection between the loosely.
slave AS01DNET-A and the 3. Check if the bus cable length exceeds the maximum transmission
master is broken when distance. If so, the system may not be stable.
AS01DNET-A is in slave mode.
1. Make sure that the connection between AS01DNET-A and the
AS01DNET-A fails to transmit network is normal.
E3
data. 2. Check if the baud rate of AS01DNET-A is the same as that of
other node in the network.
Error detected in sequence of
E4 fragmented I/O data from the Check if the slave is operating normally.
slave device.
The slave device returns error
E5 when AS01DNET-A attempts to Check if the slave is operating normally.
communicate with it.
IO data size returned from the
Check that the IO data size of the slave should be the same as that
E6 slave is bigger than that
configured in Scan List.
configured in Scan List.
If the code is displayed long, do the troubleshooting according to the
following steps.
AS01DNET-A is checking MAC 1. Make sure that at least two nodes work normally in the network.
E7
ID. 2. Check if either end of the network is connected with the terminal
resistor of 121Ω.
3. Check if the baud rates of the node devices in the network are
11 - 3 8

same.
4. Check if the communication cable is normal so as to avoid that
the cable is disconnected or connected loosely.
5. Check if the bus cable length exceeds the maximum transmission 11
distance. If so, the system may not be stable.
6. Check if the shielded wire of the network cable is grounded.
7. Re-power AS01DNET-A scanner module.
11.4.10 Master-Slave Mode Switch and 8 Baud Rates Setting via

Software
AS01DNET-A can serve as a DeviceNet master or slave by modifying its mode. When the AS01DNET-A module works as
a slave, the input and output data sizes are both 8 Bytes by default. The maximum input and output data sizes are both
200 Bytes.
Under standard mode, AS01DNET-A supports three baud rates: 125K, 250K and 500K. Under non-standard mode,
AS01DNET-A supports eight baud rates: 10K, 20K, 50K, 125K, 250K, 500K, 800K and1M.
11.4.10.1. Setting AS01DNET-A to Slave Mode

1. Build a driver through the COMMGR software.
Refer to Section 2.4 Communication Setting in the ISPSoft User Manual for more details.
2. Call the DeviceNet Builder software through the ISPSoft software.
Refer to Section 11.6 in this manual for details on how to operate.
3. The called DeviceNet Builder software interface is shown as below.
11 - 3 9
4. Selecting Setup>> Communication Setting, the following dialog box appears. Select the driver for connection of
AS PLC and PC as below. Click OK to finish the selection of Driver.
11
6. Click Project List>>Properties. Then the Properties dialog box appears. Select Slave mode and then click OK.
11 - 4 0
11
7. Click Network >> Download. If the PLC is in STOP state, the following dialog box will exist during the download.
The dialog box will disappear automatically after the download is finished. AS01DNET-A will be in slave mode after
repower ON.
8. If the PLC is in RUN state, the Warning dialog boxes will pop out before and after the download. Users can click
OK or Cancel according to actual situation.
11 - 4 1
11.4.10.2. Setting AS01DNET-A to Master Mode
11
2. Call the DeviceNet Builder software through the ISPSoft software.
Refer to Section 11.6 in this manual for details on how to operate.
3. The called DeviceNet Builder software interface is shown as below.
11 - 4 2
5. Click Network >> Online to scan the connected slave.
11
6. Click Project List>>Properties as below. Then the Properties dialog box appears. Select Master mode and
then click OK.
11 - 4 3
11
7. Click Network >> Download. If the PLC is in STOP state, the following dialog box will exist during the download.
The dialog box will disappear automatically after the download is finished. AS01DNET-A will be in master mode
after repower ON.
8. If the PLC is in RUN state, the Warning dialog boxes will pop out before and after the download. Users can click
OK or Cancel according to actual situation.
11 - 4 4
11.4.10.3. Baud Rate Setting of When AS01DNET-A is in Slave Mode
11
11 - 4 5
11
4. Clicking Network>> Scan DeviceNet Network, the DeviceNet Builder software starts to scan the whole network.
5. After scanning is finished, all node icons and device names which have been scanned in the network will appear
on the following interface. The node address of AS01DNET-A is 01 in this example.
11 - 4 6
6. Right-click AS01DNET(Slave), select Parameter Edit… on the drop-down menu to enter the Parameter Edit
page.
11
7. Set Extend Baudrate Enable to Enable and then select the desired baud rate. Click Write button after setting is
finished.
8. After the download is completed, switch DR0 and DR1 of AS01DNET to ON. Finally, repower AS01DNET-A.
11 - 4 7
11.4.10.4. Baud Rate Setting of When AS01DNET-A is in Master Mode
11
11 - 4 8
11
4. Clicking Network>> Scan DeviceNet Network, the DeviceNet Builder software starts to scan the whole network.
5. After scanning is finished, all node icons and device names which have been scanned in the network will appear
on the following interface. The node address of AS01DNET-A is 00 in this example.
11 - 4 9
6. Click Network >> Scanner Setting. The Scanner Setting dialog box appears. Select Enable under Extension
Baudrate and the desired baud rate as below. Click OK after the setting is finished.
11
7. Click Network >> Download to download the extension baud rate setting to the master. After the download is
completed, switch DR0 and DR1 of AS01DNET-A to ON. Finally, repower AS01DNET-A.
11 - 5 0
11.5 RTU Mode

11.5.1 Introduction of AS01DNET (in RTU Mode)
 As DeviceNet slave, AS01DNET-A supports standard DeviceNet communication protocol.
11
 Supports explicit connection in the predefined master/slave connection and I/O polling connection.
 The network configuration software DeviceNet Builder provides graphic configuration interface, and supports
auto scan and recognition of I/O modules, free mapping of special module parameters as I/O exchange data
as well as the setting of exception handling and diagnosis of module error states.
 Users can choose to retain the data in registers or not when the network is disconnected according to actual
need.
 AS01DNET (in RTU mode) can connect max. 8 AS-series extension modules including digital modules, analog
modules, temperature modules and etc. The mapping length of digital modules is determined by number of
digital points. The max. length of mapping parameters for input of other module is 20 words and the max.
length of mapping parameters for output of other module is 20 words.
 Max lengths for output data and input data of AS01DNET (in RTU mode) are both 100 bytes.
 AS01DNET (in RTU mode) needs the external 24VDC power supply.
11 - 5 1
11.5.2 AS-Series Extension Modules Connectable to AS01DNET (RTU)

The model and specification of AS-series digital modules connectable to AS01DNET (in RTU mode):
Length of I/O mapping data (Unit: words)

11 Digital I/O module
model （Master→AS01DNET）（AS01DNET→Master）
AS08AM10N-A None 1
AS16AM10N-A None 1
AS32AM10N-A None 2
AS64AM10N-A None 4
AS08AN01T-A 1 None
AS08AN01R-A 1 None
AS08AN01P-A 1 None
AS16AN01T-A 1 None
AS16AN01R-A 1 None
AS16AN01P-A 1 None
AS32AN02T-A 2 None
AS64AN02T-A 4 None
AS16AP11T-A 1 1
AS16AP11R-A 1 1
AS16AP11P-A 1 1
The model and specification of AS-series special modules connectable to AS01DNET (in RTU mode):
Length of I/O mapping data (Unit: words)

Special module model
DeviceNet→AS01DNET(RTU) AS01DNET(RTU)→DeviceNet
AS04AD-A 6 None
AS04DA-A 2 4
AS06XA-A 10 4
AS02LC-A 7 1
AS04RTD-A 10 None
AS06RTD-A 14 None
AS04TC-A 10 None
AS08TC-A 18 None
AS08AD-B 18 None
AS08AD-C 18 None
Note:
The length of mapping data of the I/O modules connected to AS01DNET (in RTU mode) is fixed. The default mapping
parameters of special modules must be chosen.
Besides default mapping parameter configuration, you can also choose other parameters for I/O mapping according to
need when special modules are connected to AS01DNET (RTU). The max. input length and max. output length of
default parameters and user-added mapping parameters of each special module are both 20 words.
11 - 5 2
11.5.3 Installation
11.5.3.1. Installing AS01DNET (in RTU Mode)
11.5.3.1.1. Connecting AS01DNET-A (in RTU Mode) and Extension Module on DIN Rail
 Please push the clips of AS01DNET-A (RTU) in the directions indicated by arrow ① until hearing a click. That 11
means the DIN clips are interlocked each other. Then insert the module hooks at the bottom into the DIN rail
mounting slot until hearing a click. That means AS01DNET-A (RTU) is connected to the DIN rail.
 To install the second module AS16AP11T, push the clips of AS16AP11T in the direction indicated by arrow ①.
Then aim the left-side slot of AS16AP11T at the right-side slot of AS01DNET-A (RTU) and push AS16AP11T in
the direction as illustrated by arrow ② until hearing a click. That means the module is on the DIN rail and is
connected to AS01DNET-A (RTU). In the same way, install more IO modules on the right side of AS01DNET-A
(RTU) and DIN rail one by one.
1 DI N ra il clip
2
01DNET
MS
NS
x101
IN 0
IN 1 Node Address
0
x10
RTU Mas te r/ Sl a ve
1 DIN rail clip
 Tighten the screws on the top of the module at the end of installing.
11 - 5 3
11.5.3.1.2. Connecting the DeviceNet Communication Connector
 The color marks on the communication connector match the colors of the connection cables. During the wiring,
please check whether the colors of the connection cable and the color mark are same.
11  Delta’s power module is recommended as the power module in the communication.
11.5.3.2. Connecting the Cable to DeviceNet Connector
 Use an efficient tool to peel the communication

cable for approx. 30mm. DO NOT damage the
shielded cable during the peeling.
 Peel off the metallic shielded net and foil, and you
will see 2 power cables (red and black), 2 signal
cables (blue and white) and 1 shielded cable.
 Peel off the exterior metallic shielded net, foil and

the plastic cover of the power cable and signal
cable for appropriate length.
11 - 5 4
 Insert the peeled communication cables into the

holes in the connector in correct order.
11
 Tighten the screws on the connector by a slotted

screwdriver and fix the communication cables in the
holes in the connector.
11.5.4 Configuring AS01DNET (in RTU mode)

As DeviceNet slave, AS01DNET (RTU) mainly achieves the data exchange between the master and AS-series I/O modules
connected to AS01DNET.
 Transmits output data of DeviceNet master to I/O modules.
 Transmits input data from I/O modules to DeviceNet master.
11.5.4.1. Terms
No. Name Unit Description
The first WORD for output data that the master assigns to AS01DNET is
the control word of AS01DNET for setting the work mode of AS01DNET.
1 Control word WORD When the content in the control word is set to 2, AS01DNET is in STOP
mode. When the content in the control word is set to 1, AS01DNET is in
RUN mode.
The first WORD for input data that the master assigns to AS01DNET is
the status word of AS01DNET for displaying the operation state of
2 Status word WORD
AS01DNET.
Refer to section 11.5.4.3.4 for more about status word.
Range of input data Determined by start input address and input mapping parameter length
5 WORD
in modules of each module.
Range of output data Determined by start output address and output mapping parameter
6 WORD
in modules length of each module.
The sum of the size of status word of AS01DNET and the size of input
data of the modules connected to it. The status word occupies one word.
Digital input module takes 16 bits as one word. The input data length of
7 Input data size WORD
analog I/O modules and temperature modules are determined by the
default mapping parameter length and user-added parameter length, no
more than 20 words.
The sum of the size of control word of AS01DNET and the size of output
8 Output data size WORD data of the modules connected to it. The control word occupies one word.
Digital output module takes 16 bits as one word. The output data length
11 - 5 5
No. Name Unit Description

of analog I/O modules and temperature modules are determined by the
default mapping parameter length and user-added parameter length
together, no more than 20 words.
11
11.5.4.2. Introduction of Software
Before the new version of DeviceNet Builder software is used for making a connection with PLC, make sure that the
communication manager COMMGR has been installed.
(Refer to ISPSoft user manual for details on COMMGR usage.)
11.5.4.2.1. Making a connection between DeviceNet Builder and PLC
Before making a normal connection between DeviceNet Builder and PLC, you have to do relevant setup for COMMGR
software.
2. Call DeviceNet Builder via ISPSoft
Refer to Section 11.6 for details on how to operate.
3. The called DeviceNet Builder is started as below.
11 - 5 6
4. Click menu Network>> Online.
11
5. The master module AS01DNET-A which has been scanned is shown in the left-side Project List.
11 - 5 7
6. Click Network >> Scan DeviceNet Network.
11
7. After online is implemented, click the Scan DeviceNet Network button to start scanning the nodes in the network.
11 - 5 8
11.5.4.2.2. Main Configuration Page of AS01DNET (RTU)
1. After scanning is finished, double click the AS01DNET (RTU) node in the network. Then the Node Configuration…
window comes out. The polled transmission is supported with default input data size of 2 bytes and output data size of
2 bytes which are mapping address lengths of control word and status word of AS01DNET (RTU) respectively.
11
Input Size and Output Size under Polled Setting mean the lengths of AS01DNET (RTU) parameters which are
mapped in the master.
11 - 5 9
2. Click the I/O Configure… button in the Node Configuration… window. Then the main configuration page appears
as below.
11
Explanation of parameters on the AS01DNET (RTU) configuration page
Item Description
All I/O modules currently connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU) are scanned. The
Scan existing modules in the software will be compared with the actually connected I/O module. The
mismatched one will be displayed in an abnormal icon.
Upload and show the configuration data including I/O list, I/O configuration, parameter mapping
Upload
and basic control information in AS01DNET (RTU) in the software.
Download current AS01DNET (RTU) configuration including I/O list, I/O configuration, parameter
Download mapping and basic control information to AS01DNET (RTU), which is retained when the power is
turned off.
Reset Make the connected AS01DNET (RTU) restart.
Clear the configuration data stored in the latched area and automatically reset the configuration.
Clear config
Then the indicator displays F1.
11 - 6 0
Item Description
Watch and set in real time the configured exchange data in current system; change output data,
Start
watch input data and use control word to control the operation state of AS01DNET (RTU) in real
Monitor
time.
Name Name of each module 11
Firmware version of each module. Choosing corresponding version of firmware, download the
Firmware
module parameter information which matches the firmware version.
Description The description of basic information of each module.
The mapping range of input data of each module, determined by start address offset of mapping
Input
input data and the size.
The mapping range of output data of each module, determined by start address offset of mapping
Output
output data and the size.
Comment Add a comment for each I/O modules
The current configuration data will not be saved until you click the OK button to finish the
OK
configuration.
Clicking the Cancel button to exit AS01DNET (RTU) configuration page, current configuration data
Cancel
will not be saved.
3. Clicking the Scan button on the page, the main AS01DNET (RTU) configuration page changes as below.
11 - 6 1
After the I/O modules connected to AS01DNET (RTU) are scanned, abnormal icons may appear.
Here is the list of abnormal icons.
11 The I/O module configured in the software does not match the current I/O module
actually connected, e.g. the software configuration is AS32AM, but the actually
connected module is AS16AP. So the abnormal icon such as left-side icon will appear
after the scan. You can change it into current configuration icon with double clicks on it.
The I/O module in the software configuration does not exist in the actual connection,
e.g. the software configuration is AS32AM, but it has not been connected actually. So
the abnormal icon such as left-side icon will appear after the scan. You can change it
into current configuration icon with double clicks on it.
AS01DNET (RTU) scans an unknown module. Right click current icon to select Change
from the menu which appears to change it into a module icon which can be recognized
for configuration.
11.5.4.2.3. AS01DNET (RTU) Parameters Setup Page
After I/O modules are scanned, the main configuration interface changes as follows.
11 - 6 2
Double click AS01DNET (RTU) icon on the far left of the configuration page. Then the parameter setting interface of
AS01DNET (RTU) comes out for setting the error handling method as follows.
11
Explanation of AS01DNET (RTU) parameter setup:
Item Description Default

Output start
The start output address of AS01DNET (RTU), occupying one word. None
address
Input start
The start input address of AS01DNET (RTU), occupying one word. None
address
When loses AS01DNET (RTU)’s error handling method when AS01DNET (RTU) and RTU
DeviceNet DeviceNet master are disconnected. “RTU keep running” and “RTU stop” are keep
connection for option. running
AS01DNET (RTU)’s error handling method when an error occurs in any one
RTU
When IO module of I/O modules connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU). “RTU keep
keep
error or no reply running” and “RTU stop” are for option.
running
Chooses the extension baud rate of AS01DNET (RTU) after ticking the
checkbox of it. The selected baud rate is stored in AS01DNET (RTU) after the
Software baud
download and it will not take effect until the hardware switch of AS01DNET None
rate
(RTU): DR1 and DR0 are both ON.
Refer to Section 11.2.6 for details on function switch.
Firmware version Displays the firmware version of AS01DNET (RTU). None
11 - 6 3
11.5.4.2.4. I/O Module Configuration Page
The mapping parameters of each module can be set through double clicks on the selected I/O module icon on the
following interface.
11
11 - 6 4
Double click the 08AD icon. Then the AS08AD-C configuration interface appears as below for configuration of parameter
mapping of AS08AD-C module.
11
Explanation of I/O module configuration interface:
Item Description
Displays module name, MDS version and creation date. The module parameters will be shown
MDS information in the left-side window based on the MDS file. For explanation of module parameters, refer to the
relevant module manual.
Displays all module parameters read from the MDS file of the module. Set up these parameters
I/O parameter list
to control the operation of the module.
Exception The error handling of AS01DNET (RTU) when AS01DNET (RTU) detects that an error occurs in
handling the module. “RTU keep running” or “RTU stop” can be selected as the solution to the error.
11 - 6 5
Generally, the settings for I/O module parameters and device mappings can be made in the following three cases.
Case 1: Select one appropriate parameter value from the drop-down list in the Initial column, e.g. select -20Ma~+20mA
11 as channel 1 input mode of AS08AD-C.
Case 2: Manually enter the value for the parameter to change in the Initial column, e.g. write 100 for CH1 Cal.Offset of
AS08AD-C).
11 - 6 6
Case 3: For the module parameter which need be monitored in real time or need be modified in its value, tick the desired
parameter in the Mapping to Device column and then the corresponding value of the parameter will map to the
bus data for exchange i.e. the D registers in PLC. After the values of the ticked parameters in the Mapping to
Device column go to the software monitor page, the current values of parameters can be monitored and
modified in real time. 11
 Explanation of IO module parameters
Double click the icon of AS08AD-C module. Then the Module Configuration: AS08AD-C dialog box comes out as
below.
11 - 6 7
MDS information of AS08AD-C
11
Present value setting
11 - 6 8
Format setting (Integer format and Float format for option)
11
CH1~CH8 Mode setting【8】
11 - 6 9
CH1~CH8 Calibration【16】
11
Average filter setting【16】
11 - 7 0
Sampling time
11
Channel Detect and Alarm settings
11 - 7 1
11.5.4.2.5. Monitor Function of the Software
When the software is in online mode and current configuration in AS01DNET (RTU) is the same as that stored in the
software, click the Start Monitor button to enter the monitor interface and start to monitor the operation states of
AS01DNET (RTU) and I/O modules in real time.
11
11 - 7 2
The list of operation state of modules:
Indicates that the module is in the normal operation.

11
Indicates that the module is in the Stop state.
Indicates that the module is in the warning or error state. For details on errors, refer to
explanation of error codes in the related product manual.
Indicates that the actually connected module does not match the module configured in the
software or currently configured module has been disconnected.
On the following interface, right click the selected module icon and select RUN or Stop from the drop-down box to
change the operation state of the I/O module.
11 - 7 3
11.5.4.3. DeviceNet Mapping Data
The model of the entire mapping data exchange is displayed below and eventually data will map to the registers in the
PLC of the master.
11
PLC AS 01DNET Dev ic eNET AS0 1DNE T IO modules
(RTU)
Note: All mapping addresses mentioned below means the D registers in the PLC.
The start input address and start output address of AS01DNET (RTU) are assigned automatically by the master when
AS01DNET (RTU) is added to the master. The input mapping address length and output mapping address length of
AS01DNET (RTU) are determined by the configuration of modules connected to AS01DNET (RTU).
The start input and output mapping addresses of one I/O module are assigned automatically by the software. Its input
mapping address length and output mapping address length are determined by the configuration of the module. The range
of input / output mapping address is limited by the input / output mapping address range of AS01DNET (RTU).
11.5.4.3.1. The Rule for Assignment of Mapping Addresses by AS01DNET Master
11 - 7 4
Data mapping areas are assigned according to the following table.
Input area: Slave  Master Output area: Master  Slave

Register in AS PLC Purpose Data size Register in AS PLC Purpose Data size
Scan-list node
D26000~D26003 state indication 4 words D26100~D26103
Bit-strobe
4 words
11
command area
area
Scanner module
D26004 state indication 1 word D26104 Reserved 1 word
area
DeviceNet
DeviceNet input
output area; the
data area; for
data in the
D26005~D26099 receiving state 95words D26105~D26199 95 words
registers will be
data back from
sent to slaves
slaves
as control data.
11.5.4.3.2. The Rule for Assignment of Mapping Addresses for AS01DNET (RTU)
The start input and start output mapping addresses of AS01DNET (RTU) are assigned automatically by the master when
AS01DNET (RTU) is added to the master. The master assigns mapping addresses of AS01DNET (RTU) according to input
mapping address length and output mapping address length. Input mapping address length and output mapping address
length are determined by the configuration parameters of all modules connected to AS01DNET (RTU). The start addresses
of AS01DNET (RTU) will not be assigned until AS01DNET (RTU) is added to the master and they are related to the order
of adding slaves to the master.
When there are two slaves of AH10DNET and AS01DNET (RTU), the input size and output size of AH10DNET are both 4
bytes and the input size and output size of AS01DNET (RTU) are both 4 bytes. If AS01DNET (RTU) is added to the master
before AH10DNET is added to the master, then the input mapping addresses and output mapping addresses of AS01DNET
(RTU) are respectively D26005~D26006 and D26105~D26106 as below. D26005 and D26105 are respectively the start
input mapping address and start output mapping address, i.e. status word and control word of AS01DNET (RTU). The
registers after start input mapping address and start output mapping address are for mapping the configuration parameters
of I/O modules.
11 - 7 5
If AS01DNET (RTU) is added to the master after AH10DNET is added to the master, then the input mapping addresses
and output mapping addresses of AS01DNET (RTU) are respectively D26007~D26008 and D26107~D26108 as below.
D26007 and D26107 are respectively the start input mapping address and start output mapping address, i.e. status word
and control word of AS01DNET (RTU). The registers after start input mapping address and start output mapping address
11 are for mapping the configuration parameters of I/O modules.
11 - 7 6
11.5.4.3.3. The Rule for Assignment of Mapping Addresses for I/O Modules
Each module has two forms of data mapping. When DeviceNet master has not assigned the start input mapping address
and start output mapping address to AS01DNET (RTU), the contents in Input and Output in the following figure represent
offsets based on start input or start output mapping address of AS01DNET (RTU). After DeviceNet master has assigned
the start input mapping address and start output mapping address to AS01DNET (RTU), the contents in Input and Output 11
in the following figure represent mapping addresses of parameters in the modules on the right of AS01DNET (RTU).
When AS01DNET (RTU) is added to Scan List on the page of Scanner Module Configuration…, DeviceNet master
assigns start input and output mapping addresses to AS01DNET (RTU). When AS01DNET (RTU) is removed from Scan
List on the page of Scanner Module Configuration…, the start input and start output mapping addresses of AS01DNET
(RTU) are unknown.
Before the master assigns mapping addresses to AS01DNET (RTU), the device mappings of modules connected to the
right side of AS01DNET (RTU) are displayed as below.
11 - 7 7
After AS01DNET (RTU) is pulled into Scan List, the mapping addresses that the master assigns to AS01DNET (RTU) are
shown as below.
11
11 - 7 8
After the master assigns mapping addresses to AS01DNET (RTU), the mapping devices of the modules connected
to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU) are shown as below.
11
The software automatically assigns mapping addresses of module parameters in the arrangement order of modules
connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU) from left to right.
Below is the table of configuration of one master AS01DNET and one slave AS01DNET (RTU) and mapping addresses
that the software automatically assigns to each module. D26005 and D26105 are the control word and status word of
AS01DNET (RTU).The input mapping address and output mapping address of AS16AP are D26006 and D26106
respectively. The input mapping addresses and output mapping addresses of AS04DA are D26007~D26008 and
D26107~D26114 respectively. The input mapping addresses of AS04AD are D26009~D26018.
Auto Assignment Input Output
AS01DNET(RTU) D26005 status word D26105 control word
AS16AP D26006 D26106
AS04DA D26007~D26008 D26107~D26114
AS04AD D26009~D26018
The input and output mapping addresses of AS01DNET (RTU) are D26005~D26018 and D26105~D26114.
11 - 7 9
11.5.4.3.4. Status Word and Control Word of AS01DNET (RTU)
The start input address and start output address in the mapping areas of AS01DNET (RTU) are used as the status word
and control word of AS01DNET (RTU) respectively with the detailed explanation in the following table.
11
 Control word of AS01DNET(RTU)
Bit Status value Description
000 Make no control setting for the operation of AS01DNET(RTU)
bit0
001 Set AS01DNET(RTU) to RUN mode
~
010 Set AS01DNET(RTU) to STOP mode
bit2
Other Reserved
0 Reserved
bit3
1 Restart AS01DNET (RTU)
bit4 0/1 Reserved
bit5 0/1 Reserved
bit6 0/1 Reserved
bit7 0/1 Reserved
bit8 0/1 Reserved
bit9 0/1 Reserved
bit10 0/1 Reserved
bit11 0/1 Reserved
bit12 0/1 Reserved
bit13 0/1 Reserved
bit14 0/1 Reserved
bit15 0/1 Reserved
 Status word of AS01DNET(RTU)

0 AS01DNET (RTU) in RUN state
bit0
1 AS01DNET (RTU) stops.
bit1 0/1 Reserved
0 No error occurs in I/O modules.
bit2
1 An error occurs in I/O modules.
bit3 0/1 Reserved
0 Current connection matches the configuration.
bit4
1 Current connection is inconsistent with the configuration.
0 AS01DNET (RTU) works normally.
bit5
1 The voltage of the power supply for AS01DNET (RTU) is too low.
bit6 0/1 Reserved
0 AS01DNET (RTU) works normally.
bit7
1 The number of points/ modules exceeds allowed range.
bit8 0/1 Reserved
bit9 0/1 Reserved
bit10 0/1 Reserved
bit11 0/1 Reserved
bit12 0/1 Reserved
11 - 8 0

bit13 0/1 Reserved
bit14 0/1 Reserved
bit15 0/1 Reserved
11
11.5.4.4. Connecting AS01DNET (RTU) to the Network
To configure AS01DNET (RTU) successfully and make it work normally in the network, the following steps should be
taken for the setup.
Ha rdwa re Co n fig u rati on Co n fig u rati on Mo ni tor & C he ck

Wiri ng On li n e Scan
Settin g Do wn lo ad
 Hardware wiring
During hardware wiring, notice that the standard cable should be used and two terminal resistors of 121Ω should be
connected respectively to the two ends of the main line in the DeviceNet network. The node IDs of all nodes in the network
bus can not be repeated and their baud rates should be consistent.
 Online scan
The online scan consists of two parts: scanning online network nodes and scanning I/O modules of AS01DNET (RTU).
Before the scan, make sure that the communication channel selected is proper and the communication setup is normal in
the communication manager COMMGR.
 Configuration setting
The configuration setting includes the master configuration and AS01DNET (RTU) configuration settings. The master
configuration contains the master scanner module setting (configuration of master) and the scan list configuration setting.
AS01DNET (RTU) configuration contains AS01DNET (RTU) setting and other I/O modules setting.
 Configuration Download
Configuration download consists of master configuration download and AS01DNET (RTU) configuration download. During
the master configuration download, the seven-segment displayer of AS01DNET (RTU) shows 80 and its node ID alternately.
During the AS01DNET (RTU) configuration download, the seven-segment displayer of AS01DNET (RTU) shows 83 and
its node ID alternately.
 Monitor and Check

After the configuration is downloaded, check if AS01DNET (RTU) works normally. If AS01DNET (RTU) works normally, the
digital displayers of the master and AS01DNET (RTU) show their own node IDs and MS and NS indicators are ON in green.
11 - 8 1
11.5.5 Application Example

This section describes how to configure AS01DNET (RTU) and its right-side I/O module parameters in the DeviceNet
Builder software through an application example. And how the parameters of the I/O modules connected to the right side
of AS01DNET (RTU) are controlled and accessed through AS01DNET master is illustrated as well.
11
Control Requirement:
1. Connect the output point of AS16AP to the input point; turn on the output point to make the input point ON.
2. Write one value for channel 1 of AS04DA to change into analog signal and then convert the analog signal to
digital signal to output via AS04AD.
11.5.5.1. Network Structure

AS01DNET-A
Master
POWER 01DNET
DeviceNet RUN
ERROR
MS
Network Configuration Tool

BAT. LOW NS
COM1
COM2
AS324MT 40
IN 0
x1 0
IN 1 N o d e A d d re ss
0 8 x1 0
1 9
AS01DNET
2 10
3 11
IN
4
5
6
RTU Mode
7
0 8
1 9
Ethernet
2 10 01DNET 16AP 04DA 04AD
Ethernet OUT
3
4
11
2 1
MS
5 NS
6
IN OUT
7
R TU M ast er/ Sla ve 1
IN 0
x1 0 S/S C0 VO1 VO2 V1+ V2+
IN 1 N o d e A d d re ss PWR P WR PWR
C0 IO1 IO2 I1+ I2+
x1 0
0
IN
0 0 0 AG AG E RR VI1 VI2- ERR
1 D A A D
1 1 2 SLD SLD V3+ V4+
3
2 2 4 VO3 VO4 I3+ I4+
5
DeviceNet
3 3 IO3 IO4 VI3 VI4-
6
4 4 7 AG AG SLD SLD
OUT
5 5 0 SLD SLD
1
6 6 2 24V AG 24 V
3
7 7 4 0V 0V
5
6
7
R TU M ast er/ Sla ve
Note:
1. During the wiring, connect the voltage output of channel 1 of AS04DA to the voltage input of channel 1 of
AS04AD. And add the 24 V power to AS04DA and AS04AD respectively.
2. Make sure that the baud rates of AS01DNET and AS01DNET (RTU) match.
Module Node ID Baud rate

AS01DNET 0 500Kbps
AS01DNET(RTU) 2 500Kbps
3. Connect the 24V network power module between V+ and V- and a terminal resistor of 121Ω between CAN_H
and CAN_L.
11.5.5.2. Using DeviceNet Builder to Configure the Network

11.5.5.2.1. Building and Starting up Driver1 via COMMGR
Build driver1 in the COMMGR software.
11 - 8 2
11.5.5.2.2. Configuring AS01DNET (RTU)
1. Call DeviceNet Builder via ISPSoft.

Refer to Section 11.6 for details on the operation.
11
2. The called DeviceNet Builder is started as below.
11 - 8 3
11
The AS01DNET-A master module which has been scanned is shown in the left-side Project List.
11 - 8 4
4. Click menu Network >> Scan DeviceNet Network.
11
5. The RTU slave in the DeviceNet network is scanned as follows.
11 - 8 5
6. Double click AS01DNET (RTU). Then the Node Configuration… dialog box appears. Click the IO Configure…
button to make the AS01RTU-DNET interface appear, where to configure the modules connected to AS01DNET
(RTU).
11
11 - 8 6
7. Click the Scan button to scan the I/O modules connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU).
11
11 - 8 7
8. After the module is scanned, configure module parameters. Double click AS04DA module and select “-10V~+10V”
for channel 1 mode setting. Click the OK button to finish the setting. Use the same setting way for channel 1 mode
setting of AS04AD and set it to “-10V~+10V” as well.
11
9. After the configuration of modules is finished, click the Download button to download the configuration of I/O
modules connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU) to AS01DNET (RTU).
11 - 8 8
10. After the download, click the OK button to go back to the main page of the software. Double click AS01DNETScanner
icon and then move the slave in Available Nodes to Scan List on the Scanner Module Configuration dialog box.
Click the OK button to finish the setting.
11
11 - 8 9
11. Click menu Network >> Download to download AS01DNET (RTU) configuration to the master.
The input mapping address D26005~D26018 and output mapping address D26105~D26114 are for AS01DNET
(RTU). The start input address D26005 and start output address D26105 are respectively used as the status word
and control word of AS01DNET (RTU). The parameter mappings of all modules connected to AS01DNET (RTU) are
11 displayed below.
I/O Module Input Output

AS16AP D26006 D26106-
Status D26007~D26008
Channel 1 output value D26107~D26108
AS04DA Channel 2 output value - D26109~D26110
Channel 3 output value - D26111~D26112
Channel 4 output value - D26113~D26114
Status D2609~D26010
Channel 1 input value D26011~D26012
AS04AD Channel 2 input value D26013~D26014
11 - 9 0
11.5.5.3. Using LD Program to Control the Entire Network
11
1. In network 1, write a value for the output of AS16AP and for the output of channel 1 of AS04DA when M0 changes
to ON.
2. In network 2, move the input value of AS16AP to D0 and the input value of channel 1 of AS04AD to D1 when M1
changes to ON.
11.5.6 Error Diagnosis and Trouble Shooting
AS01DNET (RTU) provides four diagnosis methods such as LED indicator, seven-segment displayer, status word
diagnosis and software diagnosis.
11 - 9 1
11.5.6.1. Indicator Diagnosis
 NS indicator
11 LED status Indication How to deal with

No power supply; 1. Check the power supply for AS01DNET (RTU) and the
Or the repeated node ID connection are normal.
OFF
detection has not been 2. Make sure that the baud rates of AS01DNET (RTU) and
completed. the master match.
Green light
blinking No connection between
Configure AS01DNET (RTU) in the DeviceNet software and
(ON:0.5s and AS01DNET (RTU) and its right-
download the configuration correctly.
OFF: 0.5s side modules
alternately)
Normal I/O data transmission
Green light
between AS01DNET (RTU) and No correction needed
ON
DeviceNet master
Red light
blinking I/O connection timeout between
Refer to the error shooting in Codes in Seven-Segment
(ON:0.5s and AS01DNET (RTU) and DeviceNet
Displayer below.
OFF: 0.5s master
alternately)
1. Ensure that the IDs of all nodes are unique on the bus.
Network trouble; 2. Check if the network installation is normal.
Repeated node ID; 3. Check if the baud rate of AS01DNET (RTU) is the same
Red light ON
No network power; as that of the bus.
Or BUS-OFF. 4. Check if the node ID of AS01DNET (RTU) is valid.
5. Check if the network power supply is normal.
 MS indicator
LED status Indication How to deal with
Check if the power supply for AS01DNET (RTU) and

OFF No power
connection are normal.
1. AS01DNET (RTU) is waiting for
the I/O data from DeviceNet
Green light master.
blinking 2. No I/O data transmission 1. Configure AS01DNET (RTU) in the DeviceNet software
(ON:0.5s and between AS01DNET(RTU) and and download the configuration correctly.
OFF: 0.5s DeviceNet master 2. Switch the PLC to RUN state
alternately) 3. The PLC connected to
DeviceNet master is in STOP
state.
Normal transmission of I/O data
Green light
between AS01DNET (RTU) and No correction needed
ON
DeviceNet master
11 - 9 2
LED status Indication How to deal with
Red light
1. Check if the network power supply is normal;
blinking No network power supply;
2. Reset the internal parameters in AS01DNET (RTU);
(ON:0.5s and Configuration error;
OFF: 0.5s Module alarms.
3. Check if there is an error or alarm in the I/O modules 11
connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU).
alternately)
Return the product to factory for repair if the error still exists
Red light ON Hardware error
after re-power on.
11.5.6.2. Codes in Seven-Segment Displayer
Code Indication How to deal with

Node ID of the scanner module
0~63 No correction needed
(When in RUN state)
1. Ensure that the node ID of AS01DNET (RTU) is unique in
The node ID is repeated or
F0 the DeviceNet network within the range of 0~63.
exceeds allowed range.
2. Repower it on after changing the node ID.
No I/O module is configured to Add I/O modules in AS01DNET (RTU) in the DeviceNet
F1 AS01DNET (RTU) in the Builder software and download the configuration data to
DeviceNet Builder software. AS01DNET (RTU) after the configuration is finished.
The work voltage of AS01DNET Check if the power supply for AS01DNET (RTU) works
F2
(RTU) is too low. normally.
AS01DNET (RTU) enters the
F3 Repower AS01DNET (RTU).
test mode.
1. Check if the network communication cable is normal and
the shielded cable is grounded.
AS01DNET (RTU) is the Bus- 2. Ensure the baud rates of all network nodes are same.
F4
Off state. 3. Check if the two ends of the network are both connected
4. Repower the scanner module.
1. Check if the network cable is normal.

No network power supply for 2. Check if the network power supply is normal. (The external
F5
AS01DNET(RTU) 24V DC network power supply is connected between red
V+ and black V- of AS01DNET (RTU) .)
Internal error;
F6 An error in the internal storage
after re-power on.
units of AS01DNET (RTU)
Internal error;
F7 An error in the data exchange
after re-power on.
units of AS01DNET (RTU)
F8 Manufacture error
after re-power on.
11 - 9 3
Code Indication How to deal with
Internal error;
F9 An error in the access of the
after re-power on.
11 Flash of AS01DNET (RTU)
Check if an error occurs in the modules connected to the

right side of AS01DNET (RTU);
Check if the module exists;
E4 Module error
Check if current module matches that configured in the
software;
Check if the unconfigured module is added.
If the code has emerged for a long time, please shoot troubles
in the methods below.
1. Ensure that there are at least two nodes working normally
in the network.
2. Check if the two ends of the network are both connected
3. Ensure that the baud rates of all network nodes are same.
Repeated node ID detection 4. Check if the network cable has a problem such as being
E7
disconnected and loosened.
5. Check if the bus communication cable length exceeds
maximum transmission distance. If the maximum
transmission distance is exceeded, the stability of the
system can not be ensured.
6. Check if the shielded wire of the network communication
cable is grounded.
7. Turn on the power of AS01DNET (RTU) again.
The number of I/O modules
Check if the number of I/O modules connected to AS01DNET
E9 connected to AS01DNET (RTU)
(RTU) is more than 8.
exceeds the maximum 8.
1. Check if the RUN/STOP switch of the PLC connected to
AS01DNET (RTU) is in STOP the DeviceNet master is turned to RUN.
80
state. 2. Check if the value of control word of AS01DNET (RTU) is
1. For details, refer to Section 11.5.4.3.4.
The AS01DNET (RTU)
Wait until the download of AS01DNET (RTU) configuration
83 configuration in the software is
data is completed.
being downloading.
When multiple errors exist, the seven-segment displayer of AS01DNET (RTU) will display error codes cyclically. For
example, the error codes: E4 03 80 02 are displayed cyclically. See the detailed meaning as below.
E4 03 80 02
1.
2.
3.
4.
 E4 indicates a module error or offline. For details, see the explanation of codes above.
 03 indicates the position of the module where an error occurs. The position of the first module connected to the right
side of AS01DNET (RTU) is 1 and that of the second module is 2. Maximum 8 I/O modules are connectable to
AS01DNET (RTU) within the range of 1~8.
11 - 9 4
 80 means AS01DNET (RTU) is in STOP state.
 02 is the node ID: 2 of AS01DNET (RTU).
11.5.6.3. Status Word Diagnosis

11
The status word of AS01DNET (RTU) shows the operation states of special modules and digital I/O modules. See the
following table for status word diagnosis and disposal.
Status
Bit Description Disposal
value
0 AS01DNET (RTU) is in RUN state No correction needed
bit0
1 AS01DNET (RTU) is in STOP state. Restart AS01DNET(RTU)
Valid configuration data in
0 No correction needed
AS01DNET(RTU)
bit1 Re-download the configuration data to
Invalid configuration data in AS01DNET
1 AS01DNET (RTU) by using the DeviceNet
(RTU)
Builder software.
bit2 Reserved —— ——
Currently connected module matches the
0 No correction needed
configuration in the software.
1. Check if currently connected module is
consistent with the configuration in the
bit4 Currently connected module is software.
1 inconsistent with the configuration in the 2. Change current module to match the
software. configuration in the software or change the
configuration in the software to match
currently connected module.
0 AS01DNET(RTU) in normal operation No correction needed
bit5 Check if the power supply for AS01DNET (RTU)
1 AS01DNET(RTU) in low voltage
is normal.
0 AS01DNET(RTU) in normal operation No correction needed
bit7
Reserved —— ——
11 - 9 5
11.5.6.4. Software Diagnosis

Click the Start Monitor button on the AS01DNET (RTU) interface. The Error code column will show relevant contents as
follows.
11
Error No. Explanation Solution

AS01DNET (RTU) can not 1. Check if the module is disconnected.
0x8001
detect the configured module. 2. Check if the module is damaged.
Current module is not
Ensure that the actually connected module is the same as
0x8002 consistent with the configured
that configured in the software.
module.
Note: For details on more error codes, refer to the explanation of Error ID in AS-series product manual.
Remark:
 The software diagnosis function can not be enabled until the DeviceNet Builder software is online.
11 - 9 6
11.6 How to Call DeviceNet Builder through ISPSoft (AS-

Series PLC)
Network structure

11
Connect the devices according to the following figure. PC accesses AS-series PLC through Ethernet.
11 - 9 7
 Operation of Software
1. Open the ISPSoft software and then select menu File>> New>> New. In the following dialog box which appears,
select corresponding PLC type AS marked in the red box below.
11
Note: The PLC type used in this section is AS332T-A.
11 - 9 8
2. Click the OK button. Then the main interface of the ISPSoft software appears as below.
11
3. Set up COMMGR communication. Refer to Section 2.4 Communication Setting in the ISPSoft User Manual for
more details.
11 - 9 9
4. After the setup of COMMGR communication is finished, select menu Tools>> Communication settings…
11
5. The following dialog box appears. Select one desired driver which has been created and then click the OK button.
11 - 1 0 0
6. Double click HWCONFIG marked in the red box below.
11
7. Select menu Option>> I/O Scan in the following window which pops up. Then the AS01DNET-5A icon will show
up.
11 - 1 0 1
8. Select menu Option>> Download in the HWCONFIG window. Then the following dialog box appears. Select the
checkbox of Download All Items or select the checkboxes of the items which are needed for download.
Afterwards, click the OK button.
11
9. Then the following two dialog boxes of HWCONFIG and PC=>AS appear. Click Yes to perform the PC=>AS status.
10. When the download is finished, the progress bar is shown as below.
11 - 1 0 2
Meanwhile the following dialog box pops out. Click the Yes button.
11
11. The following dialog box appears to show that the download has been finished.
12. Return to the HWCONFIG window and right-click AS01DNET module to make the drop-down menu pop out. Select
Communication Software >> DeviceNet Builder from the menu.
11 - 1 0 3
13. The following dialog box pops out. Click the Yes button there.
11
14. The DeviceNet Builder software is opened as below, which means the DeviceNet Builder software has been
opened through the ISPSoft software.
11 - 1 0 4
11
16. The master module AS01DNET-A has been scanned as below.
11 - 1 0 5
17. Right-click the master module AS01DNET-A under the left-side Project List. Then a drop-down list pops up. Click
the option Scan DeviceNet Network from the list.
11
18. The following progress bar appears then.
11 - 1 0 6
19. The master and slave which have been scanned both show up in the network.
11
11 - 1 0 7
MEMO
11
11 - 1 0 8
12
Chapter 12 Positioning Module AS02/04
Table of Contents
12.1 Overview ......................................................................................... 12-2
12.1.1. Characteristics ............................................................................. 12-2
12.2 Specifications and Functions ........................................................... 12-3

12.2.1. Specifications .............................................................................. 12-3
12.2.2. Profile......................................................................................... 12-5
12.2.3. Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................. 12-6
12.2.4. Special Designed Instrucitons ........................................................ 12-8
12.2.5. Wiring ........................................................................................ 12-9

12.3.1. Initial Setting ............................................................................. 12-12
12.3.2. Checking the Version of a Module.................................................. 12-15
12.3.3. Online Mode ............................................................................... 12-16
12.3.4. Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................ 12-17
12.3.5. Parameters ................................................................................ 12-18
12.3.6. Normal Exchange Area ................................................................ 12-20
12.4 Troubleshooting ............................................................................ 12-21

12.4.1. Error Codes ................................................................................ 12-21
12.4.2. Troubleshooting Procedure ........................................................... 12-21
12.4.3. State Codes (Axis 1 - 4) .............................................................. 12-21
12-1
12.1 Overview
This chapter describes the specifications for the positioning module, its operation, and its programming. On
the analog input/output module, four channels receive analog signals (voltage or current), and converts those
signals into 16-bit digital signals. In addition, the analog input/output module receives two blocks of 16-bit
digital data from a CPU module, and converts the digital data into analog signals (voltage or current). The
analog input/output module sends the analog signals by two channels
12 12.1.1. Characteristics
(1) Use the AS02/04 PU-A module, based on its practical application.
AS02PU-A: 2-axis differential output, 1 encoder
AS04PU-A: 4-axis NPN transistor (sinking) output
(2) High-speed input/output
AS02PU-A: high speed output frequency at 200 k Hz (A/B/Z phase) and 2-axis 200 k HZ differential
output
AS04PU: 4-axis NPN transistor (sinking) output at 100 k Hz
(3) Input/output
AS02PU-A: 5 direct current input points (sinking or souring)
AS04PU-A: 6 direct current input points (sinking or souring)
(5) Specially designed instructions for the module
You can use specially designed instructions to control the modules without spending too much time to
figure out how to achieve the required applications.
12-2
Ch a pt er 1 2 Pos i t io n i ng M o d ul e A S 0 2/ 04 P U

12.2.1. Specifications
 Electrical specifications for the inputs
Module Name AS02PU-A AS04PU-A
Input High speed Standard Standard
3 5 12
Number of Input Points 6
(A+/A-, B+/B-, Z+/Z-) (X0.0-X0.4)
Direct current
(sinking or sourcing)
Sinking: The inputs are
NPN transistors whose
Direct current collectors are open

Input Form Differential input
(sinking or sourcing) collectors.
Sourcing: The inputs are
PNP transistors whose
collectors are open
collectors.
Input Current 5-24 VDC, 5 mA 24 VDC, 5 mA 24 VDC, 5 mA
OFF→ON >3 VDC >15 VDC >15 VDC

Action Level
ON→OFF <1.5 VDC <5 VDC <5 VDC
Response time <2.5 μs <0.5 ms <0.5 ms

200 k Hz
Maximum input frequency 10 k Hz 10 k Hz
(A+/A-, B+/B-, Z+/Z-)
Input impedance 4.7kΩ
Input isolation 500 VDC
Weight 120 g
12-3
 Electrical specifications for the outputs
Model
AS02PU-A AS04PU-A
Item
Number of outputs Four (2-axis) Eight (4-axis)
Connector type Removable terminal blocks
Output form differential output Transistor-T (sinking) (NPN)

12 Output current 5 VDC*1 5-30 VDC
Resistance 10 mA 0.1A
Maximum
Inductance N/A
load
Bulb N/A
Maximum Resistance 200 kHz 100 kHz
output Inductance N/A
frequency*1 Bulb N/A
Maximum OFF→ON 0.1 μs 1.5 μs

Response
time ON→OFF 0.1 μs 1.5 μs
Input isolation 500 VDC
Weight 120 g
*1: Acutal output: 4 VDC (high input impedance) to 3.3 VDC (10 mA)/output
12-4
12.2.2. Profile
38.2 95
1
7
7
98 .3
88
3
8 2
12
4
9
5
6 75
35
Unit: mm
Indicates the status of the power supply

POWER LED indicator
ON: the power is on
(Blue)
OFF: no power

Run LED indicator
ON: the module is running and ready to accept instructions.
(Green)
OFF: the module is stopped and can NOT accept instrucitons.

2
Error LED indicator OFF: the module is normal.
(Red) Blinking (0.2 seconds ON/OFF): hardware error occurs in the
module, can NOT operate normally
Input LED indicator ON: Receives an input signal
(Red) OFF: Receives no input signal
Output LED indicator ON: Receives an output signal
(Red) OFF: Receives no output signal

3
Arrangement of the
input/output terminals
5 Terminal block clip Removal of the terminal block
12-5
8 Ground clip On the DIN reail for grounding
9 Label Nameplate
12.2.3. Arrangement of Terminals

12
AS02PU-A AS04PU-A
02PU
04PU
IN IN
IN OUT
A+ A-
C0
B+ B- PWR
0 PWR
Z+ Z- RUN
ERR 0 1 RUN
0 A ERR
B 1 2 0
1 2 Z 1
0 2 3 2
3 4 IN
IN 1 3
OUT OUT 3 C1
2
0+ 0- 4
5
3 4 4
1+ 1-
4 0
5 5
2+ 2- 1
●
6 2
3+ 3- 0 3
1 OUT
●
7 4
OUT
2 5
3 6
7
12-6
AS02PU-A AS04PU-A
Wordings with the same indications that are used Wordings with the same indications that are used
on the terminal block and manual on the terminal block and manual
Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
Manual Block Manual Block Manual Block Manual Block
(left) (right) (left) (right)
A+ A+ A- A- S/S S/S C0 C0
12
B+ B+ B- B- S/S S/S Y0.0 0
Z+ Z+ Z- Z- X0.0 0 Y0.1 1
S/S S/S X0.0 0 X0.1 1 Y0.2 2
X0.1 1 X0.2 2 X0.2 2 Y0.3 3
X0.3 3 X0.4 4 X0.3 3 C1 C1
Y0.0+ 0+ Y0.0- 0- X0.4 4 Y0.4 4
Y0.1+ 1+ Y0.1- 1- X0.5 5 Y0.5 5
Y0.2+ 2+ Y0.2- 2-  Y0.6 6
Y0.3+ 3+ Y0.3- 3-  Y0.7 7
12-7
12.2.4. Special Designed Instrucitons

Special designed instructions for the positioning modules are listed below:
Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction
Reading data from the control register in an extension

1400 FROM DFROM 
module
12 1401 TO DTO  Writing data into the control register in an extension module
1402 PUCONF DPUCONF  Setting output control parameters of PU module

1403 PUSTAT – – Reading PU module output state
1404 – DPUPLS – PU module pulse output (no acceleration)
Relative position output of PU module (with acceleration and
1405 – DPUDRI –
deceleration)
Absolute addressing output of PU module
1406 – DPUDRA –
(with acceleration and deceleration)
1407 – DPUZRN – PU module homing
1408 – DPUJOG – PU module jog output
1409 – DPUMPG – PU module MPG output
1410 – DPUCNT – High-speed counter function of PU module
Note: Refer to section 6.15 in AS Series Programming Manual for more information on the instrucions listed
above.
12-8
12.2.5. Wiring
 Precautions
To ensure the positioning module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise.
AS02/04PU-A must be separate cables.

12
(2) Do not install the cable near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load that
is not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a
cable connected to a load which is not a PLC.
(5) Use single-core cables or twin-core cables with a diameter of 24–22 AWG and with pin-type
connectors smaller than 1 mm. The plastic jackets that are removed from the cables should be 8
mm to 10 mm long. Only use copper conducting wires which can withstand temperatures of 60° C
/75° C or higher.
< 1m m 8-10m m 24-22AWG
ohm.
 Four-wire connection (active transducer): the transducer uses an independent power supply, so
12-9
 External wiring
(1) AS02PU-A
X0.4
Delta s ervo d rive

X0.3 *7 ASDA - A2 Series
Y0.0+ PLS 43
X0.2 Y0.0- /PLS 41
Y0.1+ SIGN 36
12 X0.1
Y0.1- /SIGN 37
X0.0
*1 S /S Delta s ervo d rive

+ 24V
*7 ASDA - A2 Series
*2
MPG *3 Y0.2+ P LS 43
Shi el ded
c able Y0.2- /PLS 41
A+
Y0.3+ SIGN36
Phase
A A- Y0.3- /SIGN37
B+
Phase
B B-
Z+
Phase
Z
Z-
5 ~2 4V *4
A+
R* 6
A-
B+
R*6
B-
Z+
R*6
Z-
*5
A+
R* 6
A-
B+
R* 6
B-
Z+
R* 6
Z-
5 ~2 4V
*1. Sinking
*2. Souring
*3. Differential input
*4. Open collector sinking
*5. Open collector sourcing
*6. Open collector sinking/sourcing to conncet to phase A/B/Z and if the input frequenct is higher than 100
kHz, add a 3W/470 ohm resistor between + the positive end and – the negative end.
*7. Refer to API1402 in AS Series Programming Manual and Delta Servo Drive Manual for more
information on the output mode.
12-10
(2) AS04PU-A
D elta s erv o dri ve ASD A - A2 s eri es

24V
*1 VD D 17
9 1kΩ
PU L L_ HI_ P 339 Ma x.
2 00Kpps
PUL SE 43
X0.5 51Ω
Y0.0 /PU L SE 41
51Ω
C0 COM- 45
X0.4 0V
*3
12
Delta s erv o driv e ASD A -A2 s eries
X0.3
2 4V
*1 V DD 17
X0.2 5 1 kΩ
PU LL _ HI_ S 339 Max.
200 Kp ps
SIGN 36
51Ω
X0.1 Y0.1 /S IGN 37
51Ω
C0 C OM- 45
*3 0V
X0.0
5~30VD C, 0.1A
*4 S/S
Y0.4
C1
*2
+24V
*5 *3
*1. VDD and COM are seen as a group and its power is provided by Delta servo drive.
*2. It is a load or an input point.
*3. Use the same power supply for the same COM group.
*4. Sinking
*5. Sourcing
1 2 - 11

12.3.1. Initial Setting
12
12-12
12
12-13
12
12-14
12.3.2. Checking the Version of a Module

12
12-15
12.3.3. Online Mode

12
12-16
12.3.4. Importing/Exporting a Parameter File

12
12-17
12.3.5. Parameters
 The input point settings
You can set values in the input points as the triggering conditions (phase Z, DOG, LSN, LSP) for the
axis1 and axis 2 to position. Rising-edge and falling-edge can also be specified in the triggering
conditions.
12
 Filter time settings
The default setting is 10 ms; the system filters out distortion and noises in a pulse width modulated
transmission that is below 10 ms.
12-18
 The output point settings
You can set values in the output points (single pulse output, pulse + direction, CW+CCW, A phase + B
phase). Refer to API1402 in AS Series Programming Manual for more information on output modes.
12
 Axis settings
You can set up the axis in HWCONFIG or through positioning instructions. Use API1402 to set up the
followings starting speed, accelation time, deceleration time, max. speed, seeking the set number of Z phase
after homing, output the offset position after homing. Use API1407 to setup homing mode. Refer to API1402 –
1410 in AS Series Programming Manual for more information on the settings of axis.
12-19
12.3.6. Normal Exchange Area

For data exchange among the CPU module and the modules, the system assign special devices for specified
parameters.
 AS02PU-A
12
 AS04PU-A
12-20
12.4 Troubleshooting
12.4.1. Error Codes

Description
12
12.4.2. Troubleshooting Procedure
12.4.3. State Codes (Axis 1 - 4)
State Code Axis Axis

Description
Byte # 1-2 3-4
0 Error flag
1 The output is active.
2 The output has stopped working.
3 The instruction execution is complete.

Axis 1 Axis 3
4 Pulse in positive direction not allowed
5 Pulse in negative direction not allowed
6 Current position value overflow
7 Pulse direction (positive or negative)
8 Error flag
9 The output is active.
10 The output has stopped working.
11 The instruction execution is complete.

Axis 2 Axis 4
12 Pulse in positive direction not allowed
13 Pulse in negative direction not allowed
14 Current position value overflow
15 Pulse direction (positive or negative)
12-21
13
12
Chapter 13 IO-Link Communication Module
AS04SIL
Table of Contents
13.1 Overview .................................................................................................. 13-3
13.2 Specification and Wiring .......................................................................... 13-4
13.2.1 Specifications ...................................................................................... 13-4
13.2.2 Profile ................................................................................................ 13-6
13.2.3 Wiring ................................................................................................ 13-7
13.3 Functions ................................................................................................. 13-9
13.3.1 Basic Functions ................................................................................... 13-9
13.3.2 Application Functions ......................................................................... 13-14
13.3.3 Firmware and Software Versions .......................................................... 13-16
13.4 Application Examples ............................................................................. 13-17
13.4.1 Using AS Series CPU as Upper Device ................................................... 13-17
13.4.2 Using AH Series CPU or Non-Delta Master PLC as Upper Device ................ 13-18
13.4.3 Application of AS Special Remote Mode ................................................. 13-19
13.4.4 Application of Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode ............................ 13-32
13.4.5 Application of CANopen DS301 Mode .................................................... 13-33
13.5 IO-Link Event Code Table ....................................................................... 13-40
13.6 Module Status Codes .............................................................................. 13-42
13-1
Ch ap te r 13 IO- Li nk Co mm un ica tio n M odu le AS04 SIL
13.1 Overview
Thank you for using the IO-Link master module AS04SIL-A. To ensure that your AS04SIL-A is installed and operated
correctly, read this manual carefully before using the module.
The AS04SIL-A module is an AS series IO-Link communication module (hereafter referred to as “SIL” module) connected
on the right side of AS CPU module or AS00SCM-A (RTU mode). When the communication card AS-FCOPM is being used
together, they serve as a CAN remote device. SIL provides 4 channels, which can be separately configured in IO-Link
master or standard I/O (SIO) mode. IO-Link master can freely connect with IO-Link devices and supports the hybrid use of
IO-Link sensors and traditional sensors. Digital I/O of the SIL module can be extended with IO-Link hubs so that the sensors
which do not support IO-Link can be connected to. Therefore it is pretty flexible to use the SIL module.
The setup software for AS04SIL-A is HWCONFIG 4.0 which is built in ISPSoft. You can use it after downloading the
software from Delta official website and installing it.
13
13.1.1 Firmware and Software Versions
Firmware
Model AS series CPU AS00SCM-A AS04SIL-A
Version V1.08 and later V2.06 and later V1.00 and later
Software
Model ISPSoft HWCONFIG 4.0 AS00SCM-A CANopen EDS file
Version V3.11 and later V4.03 and later V2.06 and later
13-3
13.2 Specification and Wiring

 Unit Specification
Item Specifications
Module type IO-Link master

Model name AS04SIL-A
Number of IO-Link ports 4
Baud rate 4.8kbps, 38.4kbps,230.4kbps
Topology 1:1
Communication
Compliant  IO-Link Interface and System Specification Version 1.1.2
standards  IO-Link Tester Specification Version 1.1.2
_13 IO-Link Yes
Mode SIO (DI) Yes
SIO (DO) Yes, up to 100 mA / channel
Cyclic communications Min. 2 ms; dynamic, according to the valid data length
Input: data size in each communication
Max. 32 bytes
port
Output: data size in each
Max. 32 bytes
communication port
Input: data size in each module Max. 128 bytes
Output: data size in each module Max. 128 bytes
Input PDO data size Max. 100 words
Output PDO data size Max. 100 words
Backup Yes
Type Unshielded (can also apply to shielded ones)
Length Max. 20 m
Electrostatic
Cable specification
capacity Max. 3 nF
between lines
Loop resistance Max. 6 Ω
External connection terminals Removable terminal block, clamping connector
13-4
 Electrical Specifications
Item Specifications
Rated voltage 24VDC (20.4VDC~ 28.8VDC) (-15%~+20%)

Power supply to
device in IO-Link Max. load
0.2A/port
mode or SIO (DI) current
mode Short-circuit
Yes
protection
Internal I/O
NPN, PNP
common
Input voltage/
Digital inputs in SIO 24VDC, 5mA
current
(DI) mode
ON voltage >15VDC
OFF voltage <5VDC
Input filter time No filter, 1ms (default), 2ms, 4ms, 8ms, 16ms, 32ms, 64ms, 128ms, 256ms 13
Internal I/O
NPN, PNP
common
Output voltage/
24VDC (20.4VDC~ 28.8VDC),0.1A/port
Digital outputs in current
SIO (DO) mode Short-circuit
Yes
protection
Leakage current <0.1mA
Residual voltage <1.5VDC
Internal I/O
NPN, PNP
common
Input voltage/
Digital inputs for 24 VDC, 2mA
current
Pin2 in IO-Link mode
ON voltage >15VDC
OFF voltage <5VDC
Input filter time No filter, 1ms (default), 2ms, 4ms, 8ms, 16ms, 32ms, 64ms, 128ms, 256ms
Power consumption 0.8W
Weight 133g
13-5
13.2.2 Profile
38.2 95
04 SI L 1
7
7
CQ 1 L1+
PWR
DI 1 L1-
CQ2 L2+ MS 2
98.3
NS
88
DI2 L2- C1
Q1
CQ3 L3+
E1
C2
3
DI3 L3 -
Q2
CQ4 E2
L4+
C3
DI4 L4-
Q3
4
●
24 V E3
C4
0V Q4
8
E4
5
6 75
_13 35
Unit: mm

POWER LED indicator (Blue) ON: the power is on
OFF: no power or the power voltage is too low

OFF: The module is normal.
Module LED indicator ON: The communication with its left-side PLC or RTU module fails.
(Red) Blinking:
1. Module setting or communication error (blinks every 1 second)
2. Hardware or low voltage error (blinks every 0.2 second)
Error status of the network
ON: No external power supply
Network LED indicator Blinking: Scanning is ongoing or the module is already configured and
(Orange) the diagnosis is done.
OFF: The module has been configured but the diagnosis has not done
yet.
2
IO-Link connection status of each communication port
ON: The communication port is in IO-Link mode and a device is
C1, C2, C3, C4 LED indicator connected.
(Orange) Blinking: The communication port is in IO-Link mode but no device is
connected or the device connected is not configured.
OFF: The communication port is disabled or in SIO mode.
Indicates the status of input / output in SIO mode

Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 LED indicator
ON: The input/output is working in SIO mode.
(Orange)
OFF: The communication port is disabled or in IO-Link mode.
Indicates if any warning or error occurs in each communication port of

E1, E2, E3, E4 LED indicator the IO-Link connection.
(red) Blinking: A warning or an error occurs
OFF: No warnings or errors
3 Removable terminal block IO-Link
13-6

Arrangement of the input/output
terminals
5 Terminal block clip Removal of the terminal block
8 Label Nameplate
13.2.3 Wiring
13.2.3.1 IO-Link Mode Wiring for Power and Communication
Precautions:
1. Keep the input cables, output cables and power cable separate from one another. It is suggested to use independent
power for AS04SIL-A. See the example below.
13
IO-Link Sens or
(w it h DI )
I O-Link Mast er
A S 04S I L-A 1 B rown
C Q1 . L1+ . 2 Whit e
D I1
. L1- . 3 B lue
4 Black
C Q2 L2+
D I2 L2-
C Q3 . L3+ . 1 B rown
D I3 L3- .
C Q4 L4+ 3 Blue
4 Black
D I4 L4-
. 24V I O-Link S ensor

(w it hout D I )
0V
0V 24V
DC Power S upply
24V D C
2. The 24 VDC cable should be twisted and connected to a module within a short distance.
3. Do not bundle 110 VAC cable, 220 VAC cable, 24 VDC cable, the (high-voltage high-current) main circuit, and the I/O
signal cable together and keep the power cables away from the earth cable. It is suggested that the distance between
adjacent cables should be more than 100 millimeters.
4. Connect a cable with a diameter of 14 AWG or higher to ground.
5. Use single-wire cables or two-wire cables with a diameter of 20 AWG to 14 AWG. Only use copper conducting wires
with a temperature rating of 60/75°C.
13-7
13.2.3.2 Digital Input Wiring in SIO Mode

When the connected device is a PNP type When the connected device is a NPN type
AS 04SI L-A AS 04SI L-A

24 V 24 V
Ln+ Ln+
CQn CQn
Ln- Ln-
0V 0V
2 4V 2 4V
0V 0V
_13 Note: n= 1~4
13.2.3.3 Digital Output Wiring in SIO Mode

A S04S I L-A A S04S I L-A

24 V 24 V
Ln+ + Ln+ +
R
signal signal
CQn CQn
R Load Load
Ln- - Ln- -
0V 0V
2 4V 2 4V
0V 0V
Note: n= 1~4
13.2.3.4 Digital Input Wiring
AS 04SI L-A A S04S I L-A

24 V 24 V
Ln+ Ln+
DI n DI n
Ln- Ln-
0V 0V
2 4V 2 4V
0V 0V
Note: n=1~4
13-8
13.3 Functions
AS04SIL-A supports the IO-Link devices when it works as the IO-Link master. Between the master and the devices is the
point-to-point connection adopting the reliable 3-wire technology and the unshielded standard cable to connect intelligent
sensors/actuators which function as IO-Link devices. AS04SIL-A is compatible with traditional digital sensors/actuators.
The designs for circuit status and data channels are both based on the reliable 24VDC technology.
13.3.1 Basic Functions

13.3.1.1 Cyclic Communication Function
I/O data (process data) in the IO/Link devices is cyclically exchanged with the IO-Link master module which operates as
the IO-Link communication master. Meanwhile as the extension module of the upper device, AS04SIL-A can cyclically
update the device data and status of the IO-Link master to the upper device.
For example, users can use cyclic communications to check the amount of incident light for photoelectric sensors, stability
13
detection margins, and excessive proximity for proximity sensors, etc. as well as detect the amount of performance
deterioration in devices and changes in usage conditions.
There are three modes for cyclic communications:

(1) Asynchronous: AS04SIL-A and IO-Link device defines the cycle time for each port and uses the shortest update cycle
time.
(2) Fixed Value: the system uses what you have set for the update cycle time here. The value here should be within the
cycle time range of the connected device and the minimum value should be a number bigger than the shortest cycle
time that the connected device supports.
(3) Synchronization: AS04SIL-A defines the update cycle time for all the selected communication ports synchronously.
(You need to select at least two ports.) Since different device supports different update cycle time, the system uses
the biggest time among all the shortest cycle times to have every device covered.
13-9
13.3.1.2 Message Communication Funciton

AS04SIL-A receives messages (non-cyclic) from ISPSoft, sends the data to IO-Link devices and sends back the response
from IO-Link devices to AS04SIL-A.
Non-cyclic data, including device parameters and events, uses specific index and sub-index for searching. AS04SIL-A uses
explicit message to read and write these data. It is very useful to use index or sub-index in reading and writing data.
You can select the data or parameter type to read or write as the setting image shown below. For example, during
operation you can change and adjust device parameters, such as threshold settings, execution tuning, and ON-delay time
from a program as well as check the internal status, such as the operating time of devices.
_13
13.3.1.3 Communication Mode Setting

You can select one operating mode among the modes of Inactive, SIO (Digital Output, Digital Input) and IO-Link for
each communication port on the following software page.
A mixture of IO-Link communication and digital I/O can apply to the same AS04SIL-A module.
13.3.1.4 Digital Input and Digital Output Function (SIO)

CQ1-CQ4 of AS04SIL-A can be used independently as the standard input or output. The DI/DO types of PNP and NPN
are supported and can be set up separately on the IO-Link page.
13-10
13.3.1.5 Automatic IO-Link Baud Rate Setting

AS04SIL-A can automatically match one of existing baud rates (4.8kbps, 38.4kbps and 230.4kbps) of IO-Link devices and
communicate with them. Thus there is no need to set the baud rate at communication ports for connected devices.
13.3.1.6 Connected Device Verification

As long as the Type Compatible option under Inspection Level is enabled and the setting is downloaded, AS04SIL-A will
check if the IO-Link device actually connected matches the product model of the configured device. If not matched, the
status code of the communication port will show 16#8CA2 which indicates that the connected device is inconsistent with
the configured one.
13
13.3.1.7 DI (Digital Input) Function of IO-Link Pin2

The IO-Link system may not respond fast enough for high-speed applications. When the connected IO-Link sensor
supports the second output, connect the sensor’s pin2 to DI of the port of AS04SIL-A. At this moment, the sensor can still
be watched and set up via the sensor’s pin4.
The real-time data can be monitored through Port 1- 4 Pin2 value of Normal Exchange Area. See the following figure as
an example.
The mapped register for Port 1- 4 Pin2 value of Normal Exchange Area is D29029. For the pin2 input value, the
addresses D29029.0~ D29029.3 correspond to port 1~ port 4 respectively.
Communication Port Address
Port 1 D29029.0
Port 2 D29029.1
Port 3 D29029.2
Port 4 D29029.3
DI1-DI4 of AS04SIL-A can also be used separately as standard inputs.
13.3.1.8 IO-Link Communications Error Detection

This function detects I/O-Link cable breaks, disconnections from IO-Link device ports, error-level device events, device
configuration verification errors, and IO-Link device malfunctions. See section 13.5 for IO-Link event codes.
1 3 - 11
13.3.1.9 Detection of Short-Circuits in I/O Cables

This function detects short-circuits in I/O cables. The status code for communication ports will show
16#8CA4 if an error occurs.
13.3.1.10 Event Log

The IO-Link event codes listed in section 13.5 are refreshed in the mapped devices for ports in the Normal Exchange
Area section as below.
_13
The device status for each port should be set to 3 bytes in length. See the following table of above device addresses
corresponding to ports in order.
Description Address
Port 1 D29022_H, D29022_L, D29023_H
Port 2 D29023_L, D29024_H, D29024_L
Port 3 D29025_H, D29025_L, D29026_H
Port 4 D29026_L, D29027_H, D29027_L
Device status consists of Event qualifier and Event Code as follows.
For event codes, see section 13.5.
Event Qualifier Event Code

Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2
The data frame of Event Qualifier:
MODE TYPE SOURCE INSTANCE

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Bit 0~ Bit 2: INSTANCE
Value Definition
0 Unknown
1-3 Reserved
4 Application
5-7 Reserved
13-12
Bit 3: SOURCE
Value Definition
0 Device (Remote)
1 Master (Local)
Bit 4~ Bit 5: TYPE
Value Definition
0 Reserved
1 Notification
2 Warning
3 Error
Bit 6~ Bit 7: MODE 13

Value Definition
0 Reserved
1 Event single shot
2 Event disappears
3 Event appears
13.3.1.11 Notification of Input Data Invalidity

Input Invalid Flag is used to determine whether the process input data in the upper device is invalid for the IO-Link
communication or not.
Whether the input data is invalid or not can be monitored by Port1 – 4(IO-Link Process Data) Input Invalid Flag of the
Normal Exchange Area section. If the flag is 1, then the input data is invalid. If it is 0, the input data is valid.
See the example in the following figure.
The mapped register for Port1 – 4(IO-Link Process Data) Input Invalid Flag is D29028 and for the input invalid flag,
D29028.0~ D29028.3 correspond to Port 1~Port 4 respectively as shown in the following table.
Communication Port Address

Port 1 D29028.0
Port 2 D29028.1
Port 3 D29028.2
Port 4 D29028.3
13-13
13.3.1.12 IO-Link Device Scan Function

HWCONFIG 4.0 can enable AS04SIL-A to auto-identify all IO-Link devices at its communication ports via a click on Scan
button.
You can also select any AS04SIL-A module and then click Scan All Device to scan all the IO-Link devices connected to
the communication port of AS04SIL-A.
_13
While SIL is auto-identifying devices, all IO-Link devices connected to IO-Link master need be restarted and therefore
the devices will probably stop running for a short time.
13.3.2 Application Functions

13.3.2.1 Load Rejection for Upper Device Stop or Communication Error
When the upper device enters STOP state or the communication with the upper device fails in IO-Link or SIO mode, the
output function of AS04SIL-A is disabled and all process data outputs are 0. This function is used to prevent the incorrect
output from the upper device as a communications error occurs.
13.3.2.2 The Switch among Process Data Parameter Sets

IODD file allows IO-Link devices support several work modes, each of which corresponds to different Process Data
parameter sets. Therefore SIL supports the switch among Process Data parameter sets if the IODD file of the configured
device supports more than two work modes. However, the Process Data parameter set can not be changed if the IODD
file of the configured device supports only one work mode.
For example, the IO-Link device configured for Port 1 supports four work modes in the following figure. The default work
mode is Segment mode (0).
13-14
When Level mode (1) is switched to, a Confirm dialog box will appear to alert that the Process Data content will be 13
changed.
Clicking Yes button, the Process Data content will be refreshed in the software.
Click menu Communication > Download. The switch is completed once the download is done.
13-15
13.3.2.3 Backup and Restoration of Parameter Setup in IO-Link Devices

The V1.1 IO-Link devices support the Backup and Restore functions which are not necessary functions and are
determined by their IODD files.
IO-Link device parameter settings are backed up to the IO-Link master or restored to IO-Link devices. When IO-Link
devices are replaced, the communication can be resumed according to original settings instead of setting parameters
once again. See the setting page below.
_13 Option Description

Disable The backup function is disabled and the backed up process data is cleared.
The backup file is empty if no data exists. It is allowed to back up the parameters read
Backup/Restore from the connected device to the master and write the parameters to the connected
device.
Restore To write parameters to the connected device is allowed.
13-16
13.4 Application Examples

13.4.1 Using AS Series CPU as Upper Device
The AS04SIL-A module can be connected on the right side of AS series CPU or AS00SCM-A (RTU mode). If AS04SIL-A
is placed on the right of AS00SCM-A (RTU mode), the AS-FCOPM communication card need be added to AS00SCM-A.
AS04SIL-A supports three remote communication modes and communicates with the upper device via CAN port. When
the upper device is an AS series CPU, the application situation is as illustrated in the following figure.
I O-Link
S ensor/A ctuat or 13
Input Hub
I OD D file
Connect to US B port
or E thernet port 16x DI / DO
of A S series CP U ….. …..
Soft ware:
HW CO NFI G 4 .0
CA N open Builder
I O-Link
S ensor/Actuat or
Hub
CA N
I O-Link
B inary
E thernet / U S B
P in2 DI funct ion
An AS04SIL-A module can connect with 4 IO-Link devices at most. If the hybrid use of the IO-Link devices and multiple
traditional sensors (binary sensors) is needed, there are two connection methods based on the number of traditional
sensors on site.
1. If there is only a small number of traditional sensors to be connected, each of AS04SIL-A module’s ports can connect
with one traditional sensor by using the DI function of Pin2 for each port.
2. If there are many traditional sensors to be connected, use the IO-Link hub from other brand to extend the connectable
digital I/O devices.
13-17
There are three communication modes for AS00SCM-A plus AS-FCOPM.
Work mode Description
The AS04SIL-A module is a NIO module. The number of configurable modules

AS Special Remote Mode
is limited to AS series CPU including remote modules. 4 NIO modules can be
configured at most.
Delta Special Driver & AS Remote All SIL modules and IO-Link devices can be configured in HWCONFIG 4.0.
Mode and can be monitored online by the software.
Here AS CPU is a CANopen master and AS00SCM-A is a CANopen slave.

Up to 4 SIL modules can be configured on the right side of the slave
AS00SCM-A (RTU). As many as 64 slaves can be connected to the AS CPU.
CANopen Builder does not support the configuration of extension modules on
the right side of AS00SCM-A and connected IO-Link devices.
CANopen DS301 Mode
First make the connection in AS special remote mode, complete the
configuration of all extension modules and IO-Link devices in HWCONFIG 4.0
_13 and then switch the mode back to CANopen DS301 mode.
Open CANopen Builder and configure PDO mapping according to the EDS file
of AS00SCM-A with V2.06 or later. For details on operation, see section 13.4.5.
13.4.2 Using AH Series CPU or Non-Delta Master PLC as Upper Device

As CANopen master, AH series CPU need be used together with AH10COPM-5A module to communicate with the
CANopen slave AS00SCM-A. See the application situation as illustrated in the following figure.
I mport
I OD D file
C on nect t o U SB p ort
o r Ethe rn et p o rt
o f AS Series C PU IO-Link
Sens or /Act uat or
Software:
: Hub
H WCON FIG4 . 0
CA Nopen Builder 16x D I/ DO
… .. …..
I O-Link
Sens or /Act uat or
Hub
C AN
IO-Lin k
Bina ry
Etherne t / U SB
Pin2 DI funct ion
13-18
According to the description on CANopen DS301 Mode in section 13.4.1, connect the AS00SCM-A module to AS CPU in
AS special remote mode, configure all extension modules and IO-Link devices in HWCONFIG 4.0 and then switch the
mode back to the CANopen DS301 mode.
If the upper device is an AH series CPU, the CANopen Builder software can be opened. Configure the PDO mapping list
according to the EDS file of the AS00SCM-A module. See the details in section 13.4.5.
If the upper device is a master PLC from other brand, use the software from the brand to configure the CANopen slaves
and PDO mapping.
13.4.3 Application of AS Special Remote Mode

See the following table of devices used in the application example:
Model name Device type
AS332T-A PLC
AS00SCM-A RTU 13
AS04SIL-A IO-Link Master
AI-B100 3rd IO-Link Device
E3S-DCP21-IL3 3rd IO-Link Device
MAXREFDES27# 3rd IO-Link Device
First of all, open the HWCONFIG 4.0 software and import the IODD files of IO-Link devices which can be downloaded from
vendors’ official websites. Follow the steps here to import the IODD files through the Device Description File Manager
tool.
13-19
_13
Put all IODD files in the same folder so as to import multiple IODD files at a time.
13-20
13
Check the following setups before the AS00SCM-A module is powered on.
1. The AS-FCOPM card is inserted to AS00SCM-A via Card 2. (The 120Ω terminal resistor is enabled.)
2. Use Delta standard cables to connect to AS CPU and the mode switch is turned to RTU mode.
3. Four switches are set to ID1: 0/ FORMAT1: 0/ ID2: 1/ FORMAT2: 7 and the status is set to AS Remote Communication,
node ID 1 and baud rate 1Mbps.
4. AS04SIL-A is connected on the right side of AS00SCM (RTU). Ensure that IO-Link devices are connected to the four
ports according to the wiring in section 13.2.3.
13-21
Switch the power on after the AS-FCOPM card is inserted to AS332T-A via Card 2. (The 120Ω terminal resistor is enabled.)
Open the HWCONFIG 4.0 software, set up function card 2 for AS CPU and then download the settings as follows.
_13
13-22
13
Ensure that the CANopen cables are connected properly and the AS00SCM-A module is already powered on. Check if the
Card2 LED indicator of AS00SCM-A keeps blinking after the configuration of AS332T-A is downloaded so as to make sure
the communication works normally.
Click Scan button.
13-23
_13
Once any AS04SIL-A module is detected through the software scan, the software will ask whether to scan the connected
IO-Link device.
13-24
Perform the scan of IO-Link devices. If some configured devices are in communication during the scan, they will fail to be
used temporarily. Restart the devices after the scan is over and restore the original work mode.
13
Click the IO-Link module and then select the IO-Link page where each device model and related information are can be
seen and the parameters to be set up are all default values.
If no matched IODD file can be found out for the scanned device, Unknown Device will be shown in the device name field.
Users need download the IODD file of the device from the coporate website of the device product according to the scanned
device details such as Vendor Name, Vendor ID, Device ID and Device Name and then import the file into the HWCONFIG
software.
13-25
_13
Under the Process Data tab, you can find the supported register addresses of each port. Since ISPSoft V3.11 supports
using tags in PLC programming, it is very useful to set up the tags and its corresponding register addresses.
Follow the steps 1~3 below to set up the tabs.
Step 1: Click Set All Tag
Step 2: A confirmation shows up asking you if you want to overwrite the set tags and comments. Click Yes to proceed.
13-26
Step 3: All the editable tags show up. Double-click the tags in blue to edit if you need to use a different name other than
the default ones.
Note: One register address coresponds to one tag, and it shows on the first group of address.
13
13-27
_13
13-28
13
13-29
Click the On-line Mode button on the IO-Link page and then see the connection status of all devices and the real time
monitored values of input and output process data.
_13
The Status of Port 1~ Port 4 above can also be known through the parsing in the Normal Exchange Area of the
AS04SIL-A module below.
13-30
With a click on any device, only the input and output process data of the clicked single device will be displayed.
13
13-31
13.4.4 Application of Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode

The device list in the following example is the same as that in section12.4.3.
AS332T-A PLC
AS00SCM-A RTU
E3S-DCP21-IL3 3rd IO-Link Device
Complete the following setups before the AS00SCM-A module is powered on.
2. Use Delta standard cable to connect to AS CPU and the mode switch is turned to RTU mode.
_13
3. Four switches are set to ID1: 0 / FORMAT1: 8 / ID2: 9 / FORMAT2: ７and the status is set to Delta Special Driver &
AS Remote Communication, node ID 9 and baud rate 1Mbps.
Switch the power on after the AS-FCOPM card is inserted to AS332T-A via Card 2. (The 120Ω terminal resistor is
enabled.) Open the HWCONFIG 4.0 software, set up function card 2 for AS CPU and then download the settings as
follows.
The following steps are the same as the operation in section 13.4.3.
13-32
13.4.5 Application of CANopen DS301 Mode

In this example, the AS00SCM-A RTU module works with EDS V2.06. Please download the EDS from Delta official
website and import the CANopen Builder software.
The device list in the following example is the same as that in section12.4.3.
AS332T-A PLC
AS00SCM-A RTU
E3S-DCP21-IL3 3rd IO-Link Device 13

The CANopen Builder does not support the configuration of extension modules on the right of the AS00SCM-A module
and connected IO-Link devices.
First make the connection in AS Special Remote mode, configure all extension modules and IO-Link devices in the
HWCONFIG 4.0 software (see the example in section 13.4.3) and then switch back to the CANopen DS301 mode.
Please complete the following setups before the AS00SCM-A module is powered on.
2. Use Delta standard cables to connect to AS CPU and the mode switch is turned to RTU mode.
3. Four switches are set to ID1: 0 / FORMAT1: 4 / ID2: 2 / FORMAT2:７and the status is set to CANopen DS301, node
ID 2 and baud rate 1Mbps.
Switch the power on after the AS-FCOPM card is inserted to AS332T-A via Card 2. (The 120Ω terminal resistor is
enabled.) Open the HWCONFIG 4.0 software, set up function card 2 for AS CPU and then download the settings as
follows.
13-33
_13
Right-click the AS332T-A symbol and open the CANopen Builder software as below.
13-34
Click the Online button.
Click the Scan button. Then the AS00SCM-A RTU module can be detected.
13
Double-click the detected AS00SCM-A RTU module and ensure that it is with EDS file V2.06 or later. If the EDS file is not
matched, check if the V2.06 EDS file has been imported to the left-side device list and the firmware of AS00SCM-A is
V2.06 or later.
13-35
_13
13-36
Each object in the EDS file is 1 word (2 bytes) in size and thus one PDO corresponds to one mapped register. Assign all
input parameters to available TxPDOs according to the parameters in the Normal Exchange Area of AS04SIL-A in
section 13.4.3. The mapped PDO object of the input process data is Tx_ModuleX_EDIY (Exchanging Data Input which is
referred to as EDI).
In this example, the AS04SIL-A module is the first one on the right of the RTU module. Therefore the value of X is 1 and
the PDO mapped object for error codes is Tx_Module1_error_code. The corresponding objects starts from
Tx_Module1_EDI0 as below.
13
Based on all communication port address information in the HWCONFIG 4.0 software in section 13.4.3, assign all input
process data to available TxPDOs, which corresponds to the mapped object Tx_NIOX_PD_InputZ and assign all output
process data to available RxPDOs, which corresponds to the mapped object Rx_NIOX_PD_OutputY.
In this example, the AS04SIL-A module is the first one on the right of the RTU module. Therefore the value of X is 1, the
input objects starting from Tx_NIO1_PD_Input0 correspond to IO-Link Port1~ Port4 in Process Data- Input respectively
and the output objects starting from Rx_NIO1_PD_Output0 correspond to IO-Link Port1~ Port4 in Process Data- Output
respectively.
Configure all parameters which need to be updated continuously (which are called objects in CANopen Builder) to one
TxPDO or RxPDO according to the steps described above. Add AS00SCM-A RTU to the slave list (Node List) and then the
real addresses of mapped registers in AS CPU show up immediately as below.
13-37
_13
According to the Normal Exchange Area page in HWCONFIG in section 13.4.3, the PDO mapped objects correspond to
the mapped registers assigned by CANopen Builder as follows.
13-38
Mapped register in
Parameter Configured PDO PDO mapped object
AS CPU
Error code Tx_Module_error_code D24032
Tx_Module1_EDI0 D24033
Port 1-2 Device TxPDO1
Status
Port 3-4 Device
Status
TxPDO2
Port1-4 (IO-Link
Process Data) Tx_Module1_EDI6 D24039
Input Invalid Flag
Tx_NIO1_PD_Input0 D24040
Port 1 Process
Data- Input TxPDO3
Port 2 Process Tx_NIO1_PD_Input3 D24043 13
Data- Input Tx_NIO1_PD_Input4 D24044
TxPDO4
Port 3 Process Tx_NIO1_PD_Input8 D24048
TxPDO5
Port 4 Process Tx_NIO1_PD_Input10 D24050
Port 1 Process Rx_NIO1_PD_Output0 D25032
Data- Output Rx_NIO1_PD_Output1 D25033
Port 2 Process No parameter need
No parameter need be output
Data- Output be output
RxPDO1
Port 3 Process
Rx_NIO1_PD_Output2 D25034
Data- Output
Port 4 Process
Rx_NIO1_PD_Output3 D25035
Data- Output
13-39
13.5 IO-Link Event Code Table

Here is the table of IO-Link event codes which are recorded in Port1-4 Device Status of the Normal Exchange Area
page. If the sources of events are IO-Link devices, please also refer to the IO-Link device operation manual.
IO-Link Type Source

Event Notifica- Event Solution IO-Link IO-Link
Codes Warning Error
tion Master Device
Device temperature
16#4000 V Lower load V
over-load
Device temperature
16#4210 V Clear source of heat V
over-run
16#5101 V Device fuse blown Change fuse V
Power supply voltage
16#5110 V Check tolerance V
over-run
_13 Power supply voltage
16#5111 V Check tolerance V
under-run
Check device
16#6320 V Parameter error V
specifications
Check device
16#6321 V Parameter missing V
specifications
16#7710 V Device short circuit Check installation V
Process variable range
16#8C10 V Check process data V
over-run
Measurement range
16#8C20 V Check application V
over-run
Process variable range
16#8C30 V Check process data V
under-run
No connected IO-Link
16#8CA0 V Check installation V
device
The version of the IO-
Link protocol is different Use matching IODD file
16#8CA1 V V
from the one and configured again.
configured.
Connected device is
different from the one Check configurations and
16#8CA2 V V
configured in the installation
software
16#8CA3 Reserved V
16#8CA4
IO-Link device process
16#8CAD V Check installation V
cable short circuit
16#8CAE
Master temperature
16#8CA5 V Clear source of heat V
exceeds 135°C
Master temperature Clear source of heat and
16#8CA6 V V
exceeds 160°C lower load
Device power supply Check the external power
16#8CA7 V voltage under-run L+ supply V
(<18V)
13-40
IO-Link Type Source

Event Notifica- Event Solution IO-Link IO-Link
Codes Warning Error
tion Master Device
Device power supply Check the external power
16#8CA8 V voltage under-run L+ supply V
(<9V)
Check device
16#8CA9 V Illegal device ID V
specifications
HWCONFIG configured Check device
process data exceeding specifications
16#8CAA V V
the IO-Link process
data range
IO-Link process data
Scan the device and
exceeding HWCONFIG
16#8CAB V download the configuration V
configured process
again 13
data range
16#8CAC V Data storage error Contact the factory V
0xFF21 V New connected device V
0xFF22 V Device disconnected Check installation V
Set the Data Storage
access locked and set it to
Data storage
0xFF23 V backup / restore and then V
identification mismatch
backing up data according
to actual placement.
Data storage not Check device
0xFF24 V V
sufficient specifications
Data storage parameter Check device
0xFF25 V V
access denied specifications
13-41
13.6 Module Status Codes

The following error codes identify possible errors when the AS04SIL module as a communication module is installed on
the right side of the CPU module or RTU module.
Error
Code
16#1605 Hardware failure Install a new AS04SIL or contact the factory.
24VDC power supply is not sufficient Check whether the 24 V power supply to the module is
16#1606 and then recovered from low-voltage normal.
for less than 10 ms.
Error
Code
16#1800 Error occurs in IO-Link Master See section 13.5 for more information.
16#1801 Error occurs in IO-Link device See section 13.5 for more information.
_13
16#1802 No external power supply Check the external power supply
Error in the download of IO-Link
16#1803 Redownload the configuration by the software
device mapping tables
Failure to switch the process data Check if the connected device is the same as that configured in
16#1804
parameter set the software.
Error occurs in the communication
16#1805
port 1 of IO-Link connection
Error occurs in the communication 1. Cut the external power off for 3 seconds and power-on
16#1806
port 2 of IO-Link connection again
Error occurs in the communication 2. Download the configurations again
16#1807
Error occurs in the communication
16#1808
1. Cut the external power off for 3 seconds and power-on
Error occurs in scan device and
16#1809 again
force to stop scanning
2. Scan all devices again
13-42
MEMO
13
13-43
14
10
Chapter 14 High Speed Counter Module
AS02HC
Table of Contents
14.1 Overview .................................................................................................. 14-2
14.1.1 Characteristics .................................................................................... 14-2
14.2 Specifications and Functions .................................................................... 14-3
Specifications ...................................................................................... 14-3
14.2.2 Profile ................................................................................................ 14-6
14.2.3 Terminals ........................................................................................... 14-7
14.2.4 Wiring ................................................................................................ 14-8
14.2.5 Pulse Input Counting .......................................................................... 14-11
14.2.6 SSI Input Counting ............................................................................ 14-12
14.2.7 Z-Phase Function Setting .................................................................... 14-19
14.2.8 LED Indicators .................................................................................. 14-20
14.3 Operation ............................................................................................... 14-21
14.3.1 List of Dedicated API Instructions......................................................... 14-21
14.3.2 The impact of AS CPU Status on AS02HC-A ........................................... 14-22
14.4 Hardware Configuration via HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ................................ 14-23
14.4.1 Initial Setting .................................................................................... 14-23
14.4.2 Checking the Module Version ............................................................... 14-26
14.4.3 Online Mode ..................................................................................... 14-27
14.4.4 Import and Export a Parameter File ...................................................... 14-28
14.4.5 Parameters ....................................................................................... 14-29
14.4.6 Normal Exchange Area ....................................................................... 14-31
14.5 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 14-32
14.5.1 Error Codes ...................................................................................... 14-32
14.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure .................................................................. 14-33
14-1
Overview
The AS02HC-A module is a high-speed counter module with two built-in channels. It performs counting through receiving
the pulse signal input or SSI encoder signal input. It is only connected to the right side of AS series CPU modules.
Configuring it to the right side of the remote modules is not allowed. This chapter mainly introduces the specifications,
functions and operation of the module.
Characteristics
1. Pulse signal / SSI signal input interface selection
Pulse input: Supports single-phase pulse input, two-phase pulse input (multiplication x2/4) and CW / CCW pulse input,
5V differential signal and 5-24VDC single-ended signal. The counting speed can reach up to 200kHz
(for single-phase input).
SSI input: The data transmission frequency can reach up to 1.25 MHz; the received data length can be up to 31 bits;
supports multi-turn and single-turn SSI encoders as well as the conversion of gray and binary codes.
2. 32-bit counter
The two channels of AS02HC-A are both 32-bit counters with the counting range of -2147483648 to 2147483647.
3. Counter type setting
Ring counter: cyclical counting between -2147483648 and 2147483647.
14 Linear counter: The upper and lower limit values need be set. When the counter value is out of the allowed range,
the module can detect that the upper or lower limit is exceeded.
4. High-speed comparison
Preset a comparison value and compare it with the present value of the counter. When they are equal, the external
output point actions can be controlled, the interrupt program can be executed or the counter value can be cleared at
the same time.
5. Phase-Ｚ function selection
Each of the two channels is configured with a phase Z which can be used as the external input point for Reset,
Capture or Gate control.
6. External output points
Four external output points. They can be controlled individually or be used for the output together with high-speed
comparison function.
7. Counter value capture
The counting value is captured through a phase Z input trigger or channel comparison-matched trigger.
8. Pulse rate and rotation rate (RPM) measurement
The function measures the input pulse rate and position change rate of the SSI encoder. And the rotation speed
(RPM) can be calculated automatically.
9. Use the tool software for easy settings
HWCONFIG built in ISPSoft can be used to create the hardware module configuration so that users can directly
select the mode and parameters without spending time programming to set up the registers corresponding to a
variety of functions.
10. Miscellaneous API instructions
The functions such as counter control, counter value capture, high-speed comparison output and measurement can
be achieved via dedicated API instructions.
14-2
Ch ap te r 14 H igh Spe ed Cou n te r Mod ul e AS02HC
Specifications and Functions

Specifications
Functional specification
Item Description
Number of channels 2
Phase A/B differential pulse input (multiplication x2/4), CW/CCW pulse

Input type inputs and pulse + direction inputs
Max. counting
200 kHz
Pulse Input frequency
Max. transmission
200 kHz → 30 m
distance
Counter type Ring counter, linear counter
Max. data length 31-bit (The single-turn, multi-turn and status data length can be set.)
Coding method binary code, gray code
Transmission
250 kHz, 500 kHz, 625 kHz, 1 MHz, 1.25 MHz
frequency
SSI Input
250 kHz → 150 m 14
500 kHz → 50 m
Max. transmission
625 kHz → 40 m
distance
1 MHz → 20 m
1.25 MHz → 10 m
Parity check None, odd parity, even parity

Counter type Absolute counter and ring counter
Counting range -2147483648 ~ 2147483647 (32-bit counter)
Counter control Reset, preset, gate, capture offset correction for absolute position
Counter
Count direction, counting overflow/underflow, linear counting beyond the
lower and upper limit values, SSI feedback, SSI position exceeding the
State check
protection limit, SSI parity checking, SSI communication status, a zero
point is set beyond SSI encoder resolution
Input point
2 (one point per channel)
number
Function Counter reset, gate control, counting value capture
External input
point (phase Z) Digital filtering Disabled, 100 us, 200 us …20 ms
Min. software
interrupt response 10 us (hardware response time included)
time
Output point
External output 4
number
point
Output type NPN transistor (sinking)
General comparison output instruction, table comparison output
Comparison Instruction instruction
function Interrupt Using comparison to achieve the interrupt function
Measured item Pulse rate and rotation rate (RPM)

Measurement
function Average times 1 ~ 10 times
14-3
Electrical specifications for the inputs

Model
Pulse input External input
Item
Number of inputs 4 (A+/B+/A-/B-) 2 (Z+/Z-)
Connector type D-sub15
Input voltage /
5~24 VDC, 6~15 mA
current
Action OFF→ON 3V
level ON→OFF 1V
Maximum input
200 kHz 20 kHz
frequency
Input impedance 4.7 kΩ
Input signal Single-ended signal: 5 ~ 24 VDC (sinking or sourcing); differential signal: 5 V
Electrical isolation 500 VDC
Weight 138 g
Electrical specifications for the SSI input and output
Model
SSI input SSI output
14 Item
Number of inputs /
2 (DATA+/DATA-) 2 (CLK+/CLK-)
outputs
Voltage / Current 5 VDC, 1 mA 5 VDC, ±60 mA (Max)
Action OFF→ON VID*1 ≧ 0.2 V -

level ON→OFF VID ≦ -0.2 V -
Maximum
1.25 MHz
frequency
Impedance 12 kΩ (terminal resistor 120 Ω) -
Signal RS-422
Input / output
When the optocoupler is driven, the LED indicator is ON.
display
*1：VID is the voltage difference between DATA+ and DATA-.
14-4
Electrical specifications for the external outputs
Model
AS02HC-A
Item
Number of outputs 4
Output type NPN transistor (sinking)
Voltage / Current 5~30 VDC, 0.1 A
Resistance 0.1 A
Maximum -
load Inductance
Bulb -
Resistance 10 kHz
Maximum
output Inductance -
frequency
Bulb -
Maximum
Response OFF→ON 25 us
time
14
Electrical specifications for the +5 V encoder power supply
Model AS02HC-A
Item
Number of outputs 2 (+5VO/GND)
Voltage / Current 5 VDC (±5%), 100 mA (Max)
14-5
Profile
7 5
1
5
98.3
88
2
6
4 75
35
14 1 Model name Model name of the module

POWER LED indicator ON: The power is on.
OFF: No power
ON: A serious error occurs in the module.
Error LED indicator
OFF: The module is normal.
Blinking: A minor error occurs in the module.
Counting status of the module (Green)
2 OFF: The counter is disabled.
When the pulse input takes place:
Counter LED indicator for
Ch1 Act. & Ch2 Act. ON: The counter is enabled but the result of counting is not changed.
Blinking: The result of counting is updating.
When the SSI input takes place:
Blinking: The counter is enabled and the position value is updating.
ON: Receives an input / output signal
Input / output LED
indicator OFF: Receives no input / output signal
Refer to section 14.2.8 for details.
Input: Connected for pulse input and encoder
3 D-sub15 Output: Connected to loads to be driven
Power: Providing external encoder +5 VDC
5 Extension module port Connects extension modules
6 Ground clip For Grounding
7 Label Nameplate
14-6
Terminals
Pin No. CH1 CH2

02HC
CH1 8 A1+ A2+
3 A1- A2-
PWR
7 B1+ B2+
ERR
CH1 Act.
CH1 A 2 B1- B2-
CH1 B
CH2
CH1 Z
Y0.0
Y0.1 6 Z1+ Z2+
CH2 Act.
CH2 A
CH2 B
CH2 Z
1 Z1- Z2-
Y0.2
Y0.3
10 CLK1+ CLK2+
5 CLK1- CLK2-
9 DATA1+ DATA2+
14
D-sub15 pin
4 DATA1- DATA2-
14 +5VO1 +5VO2
15
5
10
15 GND1 GND2
12 Y0.0 Y0.2
11
1
6
11 Y0.1 Y0.3
13 COM0 COM1
14-7
Wiring
Pulse Input
 The NPN output encoder wiring
A S02HC-A
NPN outp ut encoder

I solation
circuit
A+
Phase A O UT A-
B+
Phase B
O UT
B-
Z+
Phase Z O UT
Z-
COM
14
0V +24V
Ext ernal power supply:

5V , 12V , 24V D C
 The PNP output encoder wiring

AS 02HC-A
P NP output enco der

I solation
Phase A OUT circuit A+
Phase B A-
OUT B+
Phase Z B-
OUT
Z+
Z-
COM
+24V 0V
Ext ernal power supply:

5V, 12V, 24VDC
14-8
 The 5V differential output encoder wiring

AS02 HC-A
The e ncoder with 5 V

diffe rent ia l outputs
I solation
circuit A+
A
Phase A
A A-
B B+
Phase B
B B-
Z Z+
Phase Z
Z Z-
SSI Input and Output 14

AS 02HC-A
S SI enc oder
Is olation
circu it +5V
+V
0V GND
CL K+ CLK+
CL K- CL K-
DATA+ DATA +
DATA- DATA-
Note:
If the power supply to the SSI encoder is non-5 VDC power supply, please supply corresponding external power based
on SSI encoder specifications of different vendors.
14-9
External Output
AS02 HC-A
5~30V DC, 0.1 A

Y0. 0
*1
CO M0
*2
5~30 VDC, 0. 1A
Y0. 2
*1
CO M1
*2
14 *1：Loads or input points

*2：Use one single power supply for each COM port.
14-10
Pulse Input Counting

To perform the pulse-input counting, first set the configuration of channels, which includes pulse type and counter type
selection in HWCONFIG. If the counter type is set to the linear counter, the maximum counting value and minimum counting
value need be set. After the configuration setting is completed, use the API instruction DHCCNT which is special for
AS02HC-A in a program to obtain the counting value, achieve the counter control as well as get the real time counter state.
1. Pulse Type
Specify the pulse input type which can be A/B phase (2x), A/B phase (4x), CW/CCW or pulse + direction.
Parameter Setting Unit Default
A/B phase (2x),
A/B phase (4x),
Pulse Type - A/B phase (2x)
CW/CCW,
Pulse + direction
2. Using the ring counter

The ring counter value is cyclical in the range of -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647. When it is greater than
2,147,483,647, the count value changes to -2,147,483,648 and then the counting continues. When it is less than -
2,147,483,648, the count value changes to 2,147,483,647 and then the counting continues.
14
2,147,483,647
-2,147,483,648
3. Using the linear counter

The maximum and minimum counter values must be set up. The counter counts up and down between the two limit
counter value. When the count value exceeds the maximum value, the counter state will show the warning of “The
value exceeds the range!” and the count value will be fixed at the maximum counter value. When the count value is
below the minimum value, the counter state will show the warning of “The value exceeds the range!” and the count
value will be fixed at the minimum counter value.
When the count value is beyond the allowed range, the counting persists internally in the hardware. The counter
returns to normal and the count value is refreshed when the internal count value comes back within the valid range.
But when the internal count value in the hardware is beyond the valid range of -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647, the
counter state shows linear counter overflow or linear counter underflow, the counting stops and the internal count
value stops at 2,147,483,647 or -2,147,483,648. The counting can not continue until the count value overflow state of
the counter is cleared.
The methods to clear the states include resetting the counter through phase-Z inputs, executing Reset/Preset via
DHCCNT instruction, disabling DHCCNT instruction or changing the CPU from RUN to STOP.
Max. counter value
0 ~ 2147483647 - 2147483647
(upper limit)
Min. counter value
-2147483648 ~ 0 - -2147483648
(lower limit)
1 4 - 11
Linear counter
overflow
2,14 7,48 3,64 7
Ma ximum
co unte r va lue
Minimu m
co unte r va lue
-2,14 7,48 3,64 8
Linear counter
underflow
4. Ring counter overflow/underflow detection
Enable the Ring Counter Overflow/Underflow Detect function in the Alarm Setting of HWCONFIG.
When the overflow or underflow occurs, the alarm will appear.
231-1 231-1
Ring counter
14 Counter
overflow
0 0
value
Ring counter
underflow
Counting up Counting down
-231 -231
SSI Input Counting

To perform the SSI input counting, first set the configuration of channels in HWCONFIG which includes encoder coding
method, clock rate, SSI data format, monoflop time and maximum variation limit. After the configuration setting is completed,
use the API instruction DHCCNT which is special for AS02HC-A in a program to obtain the counting value, achieve the
counter control as well as get the real time counter state.
1. Encoder Coding Method
There are two coding methods, Binary Code and Gray Code for SSI absolute encoder. The Binary Code is the
default coding method. If the Gray Code is selected, the gray-code position data (multi-turn and single-turn data)
transmitted back from the SSI encoder will be converted into the binary-code position data.
2. Clock Rate
The HWCONFIG software provides 5 clock rates for option including 250 kHz, 500 kHz, 625 kHz, 1 MHz and 1.25
MHz. Default: 1 MHz.
3. SSI Data Format
Set Multi-turn, Single-turn and Status Data start bit & length as well as Parity Check based on the specifications of
the used SSI absolute encoder. For SSI data format, 12ST, 13ST, 12 MT+13ST and User-Defined are provided for
option. See the descriptions as below for details.
14-12
Data Format - 12ST:
MSB LSB
b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Single-turn data
Data Length (bits): 12

Multi-Turn Data Length (bits): 0
Single-Turn Data Length (bits): 12
Single-Turn Data Start Bit: b11
Status Data Length (bits): 0
Parity Check: No check
Data Format - 13ST:
MSB LSB
b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Single-turn data 14
Data Format - 12MT+13ST (Default):
MSB LSB
b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Multi-turn data Single-turn data

Multi-Turn Data Start Bit: b24
14-13
Data Format – User-Defined:
Users can define all parameters based on the illustration in the following diagram.
Data length
Parity Check Length
Multi-turn data length Single-turn data length Status data length

..
........ ........ ........
. b1 b0
Multi-turn Parity check Single-turn Status data Parity check

start bit start bit start bit start bit start bit
Note: For a multi-turn encoder, the multi-turn data and single-turn data should be next to each other without
additional data placed between them.
Item Setting Default
Data Length (bits) 7 ~ 31 25
Multi-Turn Data Length (bits) 0 ~ 31 12
14 Multi-Turn Data Start Bit B0 ~ b30 B24
Single-Turn Data Length (bits) 1 ~ 31 13
Single-Turn Data Start Bit B0 ~ b30 B12
Status Data Length (bits) 0 ~ 15 0
Status Data Start Bit B0 ~ b30 B0
No check, odd parity check, even
Parity Check No check
parity check
Parity Check Bit B0 ~ b30 B0
Parity Check Start Bit B0 ~ b30 B0
Parity Check Length (bits） 0 ~ 30 0
Example 1: 25-bit Single-Turn Encoder
MSB LSB
b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Single-turn data

14-14
Example 2: Encoder with Status Data
MSB LSB
b27 b26 b25 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Status
Multi-turn data Single-turn data
data

Multi-Turn Data Start Bit: b27
Status Data Start Bit: b2
Example 3: Encoder with Parity Check
MSB LSB
b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
14
Single-turn data Parity

Single-Turn Data Length (bits):17
Parity Check: Even parity check
Parity Check Bit: b0
Parity Check Start Bit: b17
Parity Check Length (bits): 17
4. Monoflop Time
The Monoflop Time parameter determines the interval time between two SSI data frames. The correct position data
can be received as long as the setting value is greater than that specified for the connected encoder. The range is
set as follows.
Monoflop
Time
CLK
MSB LSB MSB
DATA

Monoflop time 4 ~ 2500 16us 4
14-15
5. Maximum Variation Limit
The parameter is used to prevent sudden errors occurring in reading absolute position values due to noise interference.
You can set the limit value for the variation between two consecutive SSI positions.
When the position change exceeds the set limit, the read position value is discarded, the present count value is not
refreshed and the error code is displayed in the counter status. When the position change is back within the set range,
the counting returns to normal and the error code is cleared.
When the maximum position variation limit is set to 0, the function is disabled and no check on the position change
will be done.
Maximum Variation
0 ~ 2147483647 - 0 (Disabled)
Limit
6. Absolute Position
When the Absolute Position option is selected as the counter type, the counter value will show the absolute position
of the SSI absolute encoder within the range of 0 to 2resolution . The data information including single-turn data, multi-
turn data status, data and counting direction can be displayed independently based on the set data format. The offset
setting of the SSI absolute encoder can be modified as well. Refer to DHCCNT instruction for more.
7. Ring Counter
14 When Ring Counter is chosen as the counter type, AS02HC-A is used as a 32-bit ring counter by making two read
absolute position variations added up and the count value is changing cyclically in the range of -2147483648 to
2147483647. The counting value changes cyclically within the range of -2147483648 to 2147483647. The ring counter
value can be cleared to zero through phase Z. The DHCCNT instruction can also be used to clear and preset the
counter value. Refer to DHCCNT instruction for details.
8. Zero Crossing Detection
The SSI Zero Crossing Detect function is enabled on the Alarm Setting tab page of the HWCONFIG software. The
alarm will appear if the absolute position of the SSI encoder crosses the zero position. The detection function can be
used for both the absolute position and ring counters. The timing for the zero crossing is illustrated in the following
table.
2R es ol utio n 2R es ol utio n
Zero Zero
crossing crossing
Counter
Absolute value
Position
counting up counting down
0 0
The absolute position of SSI encoder (original data)
The absolute position of SSI encoder (after offsetting)
14-16
231-1 231-1
2R es ol utio n 2R es ol utio n
Counter Zero Zero Zero Zero

value crossing crossing crossing crossing
counting
Ring counting up down
Counter 0 0
The absolute position

of SSI encoder
Ring counter
31 31
-2 -2
14
9. Ring Counter Overflow / Underflow Detection
The Ring Counter Overflow/Underflow Detection function is enabled on the Alarm Setting tab page of the
HWCONFIG software. The alarm will appear as the counter value overflow/underflow occurs.
231-1 231-1
Ring counter
Counter overflow
value
0 0
Ring counter
underflow
Counting up Counting down
-231 -231
10. SSI Encoder Rotation Rate Restriction

For the SSI input counting, the rotation rate restriction is influenced by the SSI encoder resolution and monoflop time.
Use the corresponding formula in the following table to calculate the rotation speed of the SSI encoder.
Encoder type Rotation rate (RPM)
60
Single-turn encoder ± 2×tp×10−6 (tp: monoflop time, unit: us)
60×2MT data length
Multi-turn encoder ± (tp: monoflop time, unit: us)
2×tp×10−6
See the reference values for the formula above in the following table.
Max. rotation rate Max. rotation rate
Monoflop time
of single-turn encoders of multi-turn encoders
(us)
(RPM) (RPM)
64 468750 468750 ✕ 2MT data length
4000 7500 7500 ✕ 2MT data length
8000 3750 3750 ✕ 2MT data length
12000 2500 2500 ✕ 2MT data length
14-17
Max. rotation rate Max. rotation rate

Monoflop time
of single-turn encoders of multi-turn encoders
(us)
(RPM) (RPM)
16000 1875 1875 ✕ 2MT data length
20000 1500 1500 ✕ 2MT data length
24000 1250 1250 ✕ 2MT data length
28000 1071 1071 ✕ 2MT data length
32000 938 938 ✕ 2MT data length
36000 833 833 ✕ 2MT data length
40000 750 750 ✕ 2MT data length
14
14-18
Z-Phase Function Setting

AS02HC-A’s two channels which are with one input point CH1 Z and CH2 Z respectively should be configured in function
by HWCONFIG before they are used to achieve the functions of counter reset, gate control, counter value capture and
digital filtering.
Item name Setting Unit Default
Counter Reset, Counter Reset +Yno,
Phase-Z Function Setting - Counter Reset
Gate Control and Capture
Phase-Z Function Description Remark
The counter is cleared (the counter value is The counter value can not be cleared if
Counter Reset
reset to 0 and the counter status is the SSI input and the absolute-position
(Default)
cleared.) counter type are selected.
Same to Counter Reset above. Also clears
the output points that are set by the The DHCCMP or DHCCMPT instruction is
Counter Reset +Yno
DHCCMP comparison instruction or table used.
comparison instruction DHCCMPT.
The counter value capture is triggered
Capture through the rising edge and falling edge of The DHCCAP instruction is used.
phase Z.
When phase Z is at low level, the counter’s 14
Gate control counting pauses. When phase Z is at high Applicable to the pulse input only.
level, the counter’s counting continues.
Item name Setting Unit Default

Filter time 0 ~ 200 100 us 0 (Disabled)
14-19
LED Indicators
Indicator Color Name Description
ON: The power supply is normal.

PWR Blue Power indicator
OFF: No power supply
ON: A major error occurs in the module.
ERR Red Error indicator OFF: The module is operating normally.
Blinking: A minor error exists in the module (Blinks every 0.5 seconds.)
OFF: The counter is disabled.

Pulse Input -
ON: The counter is enabled but there is no change in the counter value.
Ch1 counter state
CH1 Act. Green Blinking: The counter value is changing. (Blinks every 0.5 seconds.)
indicator
SSI Input -
Blinking: The counter is enabled and the position value is being updated. (Blinks
every 0.5 seconds.)
Ch1 phase-A input ON: The phase-A input for channel 1 is active.
CH1 A Red
indicator OFF: The phase-A input for channel 1 is not active.
14 Ch1 phase-B input ON: The phase-B input for channel 1 is active.
CH1 B Red
indicator OFF: The phase-B input for channel 1 is not active.
Ch1 phase-Z or DI ON: The phase-Z input for channel 1 is active.

CH1 Z Red
input indicator OFF: The phase-Z input for channel 1 is not active.
Y0.0 output status ON: The Y0.0 output is active.

Y0.0 Red
indicator OFF: The Y0.0 output is not active.
Y0.1 output status ON: The Y0.1 output is active

Y0.1 Red
OFF: The counter is disabled.

Pulse Input -
ON: The counter is enabled but there is no change in the counter value.
Ch2 counter state
CH2 Act. Green Blinking: The counter value is changing. (Blinks every 0.5 seconds.)
indicator
SSI Input -
Blinking: The counter is enabled and the position value is being updated. (Blinks
every 0.5 seconds.)
Ch2 phase-A input ON: The phase-A input for channel 2 is active.
CH2 A Red
indicator OFF: The phase-A input for channel 2 is not active.
Ch2 phase-B input ON: The phase-B input for channel 2 is active.
CH2 B Red
indicator OFF: The phase-B input for channel 2 is not active.
Ch2 phase-Z or DI ON: The phase-Z input for channel 2 is active.
CH2 Z Red
input indicator OFF: The phase-Z input for channel 2 is not active.
Y0.2 Red
Y0.3 Red
14-20
Operation
List of Dedicated API Instructions
The operation of AS02HC-A is realized via dedicated API instructions in HWCONFIG after the counter configuration setting
is done. The dedicated API instructions for AS02HC-A include DHCCNT, DHCCAP, HCDO, DHCCMP, DHCCMPT and
DHCMEAS. For details on these instructions and application examples, refer to AS Series Programming Manual.
Instruction Symbol Function
Enable/ disable the counter

Change the count value
Clear the counter
Preset the counter
DHCCNT
Show current counter value
(Counter control)
Show the counting direction
Show the counter state
Correct SSI offset
Show SSI data
14
DHCCAP
Set a capture method
(Count vlaue
Show captured count values
capture)
HCDO Control output points

(Output point control) Show output-point state
Enable/disable comparison output function

DHCCMP Set two point comparison values
(Comparison output) Set comparison-matched actions
Show comparison-matched status
14-21
Instruction Symbol Function
Enable/disable table comparison output function

DHCCMPT
Set comparison values for up to ten points
(Table comparison
Set comparison-matched action
output)
Show comparison-matched status
Enable/disable measurement function

DHCMEAS
Set average times
(Rotation rate
Show measured frequency
measurement)
Show measured rotations per minute
14
The impact of AS CPU Status on AS02HC-A
The following table lists the module execution states corresponding to AS CPU operation states of poweroff, and Run ->
Stop. After the AS CPU state switches from Stop to Run, the operation state of AS02HC-A module is controlled by the PLC
program.
Item Poweroff, CPU Run -> Stop
Y0.0~Y0.3 Reset to OFF
Phase Z Disabled
Counter The counting stops and counter state is cleared.
DHCCNT The instruction is disabled.
HCDO The instruction is disabled.
DHCCAP The instruction is disabled.
DHCCMP The instruction is disabled; MATCH1 and MATCH2 are cleared.
DHCCMPT The instruction is disabled and CurNo is cleared.
DHCMEAS The instruction is disabled.
14-22
Hardware Configuration via HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

Initial Setting
1. Start ISPSoft and then double-click HWCONFIG.
14
2. Click the I/O Scan button.
14-23
3. After the scanning is completed, AS02HC-A will appear in the following window.
4. Select AS02HC-A and set module parameters.
14
14-24
5. Click OK to finish the setting.
6. Click Download to download the configuration data. (The download can not be performed if the CPU is in RUN
state)
14
14-25
Checking the Module Version

1. Click Option menu > Online Mode.
2. Double-click AS02HC module to check the firmware version and hardware version.
14
14-26
Online Mode
1. Click Online Mode to enter the online mode.
2. Right-click AS02HC module and select Module Status or Diagnosis from the context menu. Then the error code
information can be seen in the module state window and module error log can be seen in the diagnosis area.
14
14-27
Import and Export a Parameter File

1. Click Export in the Device Settings dialog box to save the current parameters as a CSV file (.csv).
14
2. Click Import in the Device Settings dialog box and select a CSV file to save parameters.
14-28
Parameters
1. Select one input interface in CH1 Setting / CH2 Setting.
2. Pulse Input in CH1 Setting / CH2 Setting.
14
14-29
3. SSI Input in CH1 Setting / CH2 Setting
4. Z-Phase Function Setting
14
5. Alarm Setting
14-30
Normal Exchange Area

The data exchange area between the CPU and a module is in the Device Setting dialog box. The normal exchange areas
for modules are different from one another. Special D registers are corresponded to automatically based on the
configuration data for the convenience of directly reading the values. The error codes of AS02HC-A are configured in the
Normal Exchange Area. The error codes of the module can be known by monitoring D registers.
14
14-31
Troubleshooting
Error Codes
Error ERR
Description Counter action Remark
code LED
Counted result in the latched
16#1605 area is not retainable (major
error)
The counter The error alarm makes the CPU
Module settings in the latched
module stops stop the system. (The module need
16#1606 area is not retainable. (major ON
operating and be set to keep counting or stop for
error)
counting when an error occurs in the module:)
Module setting error
16#1607
(major error)
Linear counter:
Counter value overflow inside the
Counter overflow / underflow
16#1800 Linear counter: hardware
on CH1
Counting stops. Ring counter:
After the Ring Counter
Blinking
Ring counter: Overflow/Underflow Detect function
Counting is enabled in the Alarm Setting of
Counter overflow / underflow
16#1801 continues. HWCONFIG, the alarm will appear
14 on CH2
when the overflow or underflow
occurs.
Linear count exceeding the set The counting value The counting inside the hardware
16#1802
upper/lower limit on CH1 is fixed at the set persists. When the internal counter
Blinking max. counter value value is back within the valid range,
Linear count exceeding the set or the set min. the counter returns to normal and
16#1803
upper/lower limit on CH2 counter value. the counting value is refreshed.
The variation in relation to an
16#1804 SSI encoder position The counting value
The variation between two
exceeding the limit on CH1 is fixed at the most
Blinking consecutive SSI positions exceeds
The variation in relation to an recent correct count
the setting value.
16#1805 SSI encoder position value.
exceeding the limit on CH2
Encoder disconnection/ wiring
Abnormal SSI communication error/no power supply to the
16#1806 The counting value
on CH1 encoder/ data format error/parity
is fixed at the most
Blinking check setting error
recent correct count
Abnormal SSI communication (Error log will not appear unless five
16#1807 value.
on CH2 consecutive abnormal situations
occur.)
SSI absolute position cross After the SSI Zero Crossing Detect
16#1808
zero point on CH1 function is enabled on the Alarm
Setting tab page of the HWCONFIG
Blinking Counting continues.
SSI absolute position cross software, the alarm will appear as
16#1809
zero point on CH2 the absolute position of the SSI
encoder crosses the zero position.
14-32
Troubleshooting Procedure
Counted data is lost. Switch the module power OFF and ON again. The
Counted result in the latched area is not
error code is cleared by the system. Contact the factory if the problem
retainable (major error)
persists.
Module setting data is lost. Switch the module power OFF and ON
Module settings in the latched area is not
again. Download the HWCONFIG settings again to clear the error code.
retainable. (major error)
Contact the factory if the problem persists.
Module setting error Check if the setting in HWCONFIG is consistent with the actual
(major error) placement. Contact the factory if the problem persists.
Counter overflow / underflow on CH1 Check the counter result. If the alarm is not required, disable the alarm
output function in HWCONFIG. Use any of the followings to clear the
error code: clear, reset, preset the counter, restart the module, or
Counter overflow / underflow on CH2
execute DHCCNT instruction again.
Linear count exceeding the set upper/lower
Check the signal received by channel 1 and 2.
limit on CH1
Hardware counter is still counting; when the number is back within the
Linear count exceeding the set upper/lower
range of the maximum to the minimum, the error code will be cleared.
limit on CH2
The variation in relation to a SSI encoder
position exceeding the limit on CH1 Check if there is any interruption and check the device specification to
The variation in relation to a SSI encoder see if the offset setting is matching with the actual placement. 14
position exceeding the limit on CH2
Abnormal SSI communication on CH1 Check the execution of DHCCNT instruction. If it is parity check, check if
there is any interruption and check if the data format is correct. Check if
Abnormal SSI communication on CH2 the device wiring is secure, and if the encoder power supply is normal.
SSI absolute position cross zero point on Check the SSI absolute encoder specification and modify the setting
CH1 accordingly. If the alarm is not required, disable the alarm output function
in HWCONFIG. Use any of the followings to clear the error code: clear,
SSI absolute position cross zero point on
reset, preset the counter, restart the module, or execute DHCCNT
CH2
instruction again.
14-33
MEMO
14
14-34

As - Series MANUAL AS SERIE DELTA

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

As - Series MANUAL AS SERIE DELTA

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

As - Series MANUAL AS SERIE DELTA

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AS Series Module Manual

Industrial Automation Headquarters

Delta Greentech (China) Co., Ltd.

Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc.

Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.

AS Series Module Manual

Delta Electronics Int’l (S) Pte Ltd.

Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd.

Delta Greentech (Brasil) S.A.

1.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 1-2

1.2 Specifications .................................................................................... 1-5

1.3 Installation ........................................................................................ 1-8

Chapter 2 Digital Input / Output Modules

2.1 Digital Input/Output Module Specifications....................................... 2-2

Chapter 3 Analog Input Module AS04/08AD

Chapter 4 Analog Output Module AS04DA

Chapter 6 Temperature Measurement Module AS04/06RTD

Chapter 7 Temperature Measurement Module AS04/08TC

7.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 7-2

7.2 Specifications and Functions ............................................................. 7-4

7.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 7-39

7.5 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 7-56

Chapter 8 Load Cell Module AS02LC

8.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 8-2

8.2 Specifications .................................................................................... 8-2

8.3 Making Adjustments ........................................................................ 8-19

8.4 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft...................................................................... 8-27

8.5 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 8-35

9.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 9-2

9.2 Specification, Function and Wiring ...................................................... 9-3

9.3 COM mode ........................................................................................... 9-9

9.4 RTU Mode .......................................................................................... 9-16

9.5 Normal Exchange Area ...................................................................... 9-37

9.6 Application ........................................................................................ 9-39

9.7 Error Codes ....................................................................................... 9-75

Chapter 10 Function Cards

10.1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 10-3

10.2 Specification and Function ................................................................ 10-3

10.3 Profiles and Dimensions .................................................................. 10-49

10.4 Wiring ............................................................................................. 10-53

10.5 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 10-55

Chapter 11 DeviceNet Master Scanner Module AS01DNET-A

11.1 Introduction o AS01DNET-A .............................................................. 11-3

11.2 Components of AS01DNET-A ............................................................. 11-4

11.3 DeviceNet Network Communication .................................................. 11-7

11.4 Master /Slave Mode ........................................................................ 11-13

11.5 RTU Mode ........................................................................................ 11-51

Chapter 12 Positioning Modules AS02/04PU

12.1 Overview ......................................................................................... 12-2

12.2 Specifications and Functions ........................................................... 12-3

12.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ................................................................... 12-12

12.4 Troubleshooting ............................................................................ 12-21

13.1 Overview ...................................................................................... 13-3

13.2 Specification and Wiring............................................................... 13-4

13.3 Functions ..................................................................................... 13-9

13.4 Application Examples ................................................................. 13-17

13.5 IO-Link Event Code Table ........................................................... 13-40

13.6 Module Status Codes .................................................................. 13-42